MAGNUM CONTROLS

5580 Enterprise Pkwy.

REFR V17
Fort Myers, FL 33905 Rev. 2.8 - 2021-06-02
Office: 239-694-0089
Fax: 239-694-0031

www.mcscontrols.com

MCS Total
Solution
for all your
Control
Needs Energy Efficient and Storage Climate Controls

RoHS Compliant
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

The MCS Commitment is to provide practical solutions for the industries

needs and to be both a leader and partner in the effective use of
microprocessor controls.

Micro Control Systems, Inc.

5580 Enterprise Parkway
Fort Myers, Florida 33905
PH:(239) 694-0089 FAX:(239) 694-0031
www.mcscontrols.com

All information contained within this document is considered to be proprietary information of Micro Control Systems, Inc.
No information or data from this document shall be published, used, reproduced, transmitted, or disclosed to others out-
side your organization without the prior expressed written consent of Micro Control Systems, Inc. This document and the
information contained herein shall be treated as proprietary. Reasonable provisions shall be provided to ensure that this
information remains proprietary by your employees, agents, and other personnel that may have access to this document.
Copyright ©2020

2
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Table of Contents
Chapter - 1. Purpose of the REFR software ....................................................................................9
1.1. Compressor Control ....................................................................................................................................9
1.2. Defrost .........................................................................................................................................................9
Chapter - 2. Introduction to the Magnum .......................................................................................10
Magnum V17 Software Control Point Capacity..........................................................................................10
Magnum Hardware Supported by Magnum V17 Software.........................................................................10
Chapter - 3. MCS-MAGNUM-N and Expansion Boards .............................................................12
3.1. MCS-Magnum Revision 9.1........................................................................................................................12
3.2. MCS-SI16-A04- Version 1.3.......................................................................................................................13
3.3. MCS-RO10 - Version 1.2............................................................................................................................13
3.4. MCS-Magnum-N-12 Revision 9.2...............................................................................................................14
3.4.1 Optional Single Output Power Supply..............................................................................................14
3.5. MCS-IO-BASE and MCS-IO-EXT .............................15
3.6. MCS-RO-BASE and MCS-RO-EXT ..........................................................................................................18
3.7. MCS-SI-BASE and MCS-SI-EXT ..............................................................................................................19
Chapter - 4. Network Connection–MCS-485 ................................................................................20
4.1. MCS 485 Network......................................................................................................................................20
Chapter - 5. Network Connection–Ethernet ..................................................................................21
5.1. ETHERNET................................................................................................................................................21
5.1.1 RJ45 using a Crossover Ethernet Cable..........................................................................................21
Chapter - 6. Network Connection–Remote ....................................................................................22
6.1. Remote using Ethernet...............................................................................................................................22
Chapter - 7. PC Software for the Magnum .....................................................................................23
7.1. Requirements for PC Software...................................................................................................................23
Chapter - 8. Authorization Function ..................................................................................................24
8.1. Authorization Function ...............................................................................................................................24
Chapter - 9. Standard Control Options ............................................................................................26
9.1. General Options.........................................................................................................................................26
9.2. Variable Capacity Control Method..............................................................................................................26
9.2.1 Screw Compressor with slide piston.................................................................................................26
9.2.1.1. Force Digital Compressor Speed.........................................................................................27
9.2.2 Compressor with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)........................................................................27
9.2.3 Example of a system with 3 variable Step Compressors..................................................................27
9.2.4 Compressor Types............................................................................................................................27
9.2.5 Condenser Options...........................................................................................................................28
9.3. Target Reset (only if temperature control)..................................................................................................28
9.4. Oil Differential Calculation..........................................................................................................................28
9.5. On/Off Switches..........................................................................................................................................28
9.6. Low Suction Unloading & Holding..............................................................................................................29
9.7. High Discharge Pressure Unloading & Holding..........................................................................................29
9.8. High Discharge Temperature Unloading & Holding....................................................................................29
9.9. High Ampere Unloading & Holding.............................................................................................................30
9.10. Control Power Relay –No Stop...................................................................................................................30
9.11. Part Wind or Star Delta Starter...................................................................................................................30
9.12. English or Metric sensor readings..............................................................................................................31
9.13. Compressor Auto Rotation.........................................................................................................................31
9.14. Expanded Compressor Rotation to Check for Maximum Run Time...........................................................32
9.15. Run Hour Lockout.......................................................................................................................................32
9.16. Compressor Anti-Cycle Logic.....................................................................................................................32
9.17. Warning & Alarm Relay Outputs.................................................................................................................33
9.18. Operating Schedules..................................................................................................................................33
9.19. Modification to adjust approach values......................................................................................................33
Chapter - 10. Magnum Control Zone ...................................................................................................34

3
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

10.1. Control Method Option...............................................................................................................................34

10.2. Common Definitions...................................................................................................................................34
10.2.1 Target................................................................................................................................................34
10.2.2 Control Zone.....................................................................................................................................34
10.2.3 Control Sensor..................................................................................................................................35
10.2.4 Control Input Rate of Change...........................................................................................................35
10.2.5 Step Delay and Sensitivity................................................................................................................35
Chapter - 11. Magnum Voltage SI Control Method ......................................................................36
11.1. Number of steps supported:.......................................................................................................................36
11.2. Common Definitions...................................................................................................................................36
11.2.1 Targets, Stage Cut In Values............................................................................................................36
11.2.2 Stage Cut Out Values.......................................................................................................................36
11.2.2.1. Step Delay............................................................................................................................36
11.2.2.2. Controlling Sensor................................................................................................................36
Chapter - 12. REFR Defrost ......................................................................................................................37
12.1. Defrost cycle initialization:..........................................................................................................................37
12.2. Approach type setup...................................................................................................................................38
12.2.1 Approach type based circuit evaporator temperature.......................................................................39
12.3. Defrost Ready Indicator .............................................................................................................................40
12.4. Defrost Indicator ........................................................................................................................................40
12.5. Defrost Indicator setup...............................................................................................................................40
12.6. Defrost Types supported:...........................................................................................................................41
12.7. Defrost - Time Off.......................................................................................................................................41
12.8. Defrost - Reverse Cycle.............................................................................................................................41
12.9. Defrost - Electric.........................................................................................................................................41
12.10. Defrost - Hot Gas - Conventional (set point #117 = Active)........................................................................42
12.11. Defrost - Hot Gas on the Fly (set point #117 = Inactive).............................................................................42
12.12. Rotating Compressor Air Defrost Selection:...............................................................................................43
12.12.1 Defrost function: ...............................................................................................................................43
12.12.2 Defrost is initiated ............................................................................................................................44
12.13. Defrost - Multiple Evaporator/Reheat.........................................................................................................44
12.13.1 Purpose of Multiple Evaporator/Reheat: ..........................................................................................44
12.13.2 Multiple Evaporator/ Reheat (normal) Selection: .............................................................................44
12.13.3 Compressor Info window:.................................................................................................................44
12.13.4 Evaporator Info window:...................................................................................................................44
12.13.5 Circuit Base:.....................................................................................................................................44
12.13.6 Relay output sequence for a variable compressor with 4 EVAP/REHT:...........................................44
12.13.7 Relationship of evaporators and reheat:...........................................................................................45
12.13.8 Set points that support this selection:...............................................................................................45
12.13.9 Defrost; Electric type with multiple evaporator/reheat relays:...........................................................45
12.14. Unit Operating with the Evaporator/Reheat Selection................................................................................46
12.14.1 Unit is in normal mode (not dehumidification) & circuit is on............................................................46
12.14.2 1.3.2 Unit is in dehumidification mode & circuit is on .......................................................................46
12.14.3 Unit is a normal mode & circuit is off.................................................................................................46
12.14.4 Unit is a NOT in a normal mode (RUN/STOP, Emergency Stop etc.)...............................................46
Chapter - 13. Dehumidify Function .......................................................................................................47
Chapter - 14. Common Definitions ........................................................................................................48
14.1. How a Defrost Cycle can be initiated..........................................................................................................48
14.1.1 Approach Set point Temperature & Time (Air Defrost)......................................................................48
14.1.2 Approach Set point Temperature & Time (Standard Defrost)...........................................................48
14.1.3 Approach Actual Temperature & Time .............................................................................................48
14.1.4 Defrost Fan Relay.............................................................................................................................49
14.1.5 Defrost Slave...................................................................................................................................49
Chapter - 15. Magnum Displays .............................................................................................................50
15.1. Menu Key...................................................................................................................................................50
15.2. Status Display – Chiller (Default at Power Up)...........................................................................................50
15.3. Status Display – Circuit (x).........................................................................................................................50

4
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

15.4.Outputs.......................................................................................................................................................51
15.5.Inputs..........................................................................................................................................................52
15.6.Alarms........................................................................................................................................................53
15.7.Graphs........................................................................................................................................................53
15.8.Set points ...................................................................................................................................................53
15.9.Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................57
Chapter - 16. Control Status Display ...................................................................................................58
16.1. From the MCS-Connect program...............................................................................................................58
16.1.1 Information displayed:.......................................................................................................................58
Chapter - 17. Magnum Control States ................................................................................................60
Chapter - 18. Capacity Control States (number) ...........................................................................61
18.1. UNIT IN POWER UP (0).............................................................................................................................61
18.2. POWER LOSS DELAY (1)..........................................................................................................................61
18.3. NO RUN- I/O LOST (2)...............................................................................................................................61
18.4. UNIT IN LOCKOUT (3)...............................................................................................................................61
18.5. UNIT IS OFF (4).........................................................................................................................................62
18.6. UNIT IS HOLDING (5)................................................................................................................................62
18.7. UNIT UNLOADING (6)...............................................................................................................................62
18.8. UNIT IS LOADING (7)................................................................................................................................62
18.9. CMP IN STARTU (8)...................................................................................................................................62
18.10. RUN/STOP SW OFF (9).............................................................................................................................62
18.11. SCHEDULED OFF (10)..............................................................................................................................62
18.12. OFF- NO FLOW(s) (11)..............................................................................................................................62
18.13. NOT USED (12)..........................................................................................................................................63
18.14. NOT USED (13)..........................................................................................................................................63
18.15. NOT USED (14)..........................................................................................................................................63
18.16. UNIT IS UNLOADED (15)..........................................................................................................................63
18.17. UNIT IS LOADED (16)................................................................................................................................63
18.18. NOT USED (17)..........................................................................................................................................63
18.19. NOT USED (18)..........................................................................................................................................63
18.20. NOT USED (19)..........................................................................................................................................63
18.21. DEF-STARTING CMP (20) (only used if not Air Normal Defrost)...............................................................63
18.22. DEFROSTING COILS (21) (only used if not Air Normal Defrost)...............................................................63
18.23. LO TEMP UNLOAD (22).............................................................................................................................63
Chapter - 19. Circuit Control States (number) ...............................................................................64
19.1. LOST IO LOCKED (0)................................................................................................................................64
19.2. CMP LOCKED OUT (1)..............................................................................................................................64
19.3. SWITCHED OFF (2)...................................................................................................................................64
19.4. UNLD & PMPDWN (3)................................................................................................................................64
19.5. CMP ANTICYCE (4)...................................................................................................................................64
19.6. CMP OFF/READY (5).................................................................................................................................64
19.7. NOT USED (6)............................................................................................................................................64
19.8. NOT USED (7)............................................................................................................................................64
19.9. CMP UNLOADED (8).................................................................................................................................65
19.10. CMP UNLD STEP1 (9)...............................................................................................................................65
19.11. CMP UNLD STEP2 (10).............................................................................................................................65
19.12. CMP IS HOLDING (11)...............................................................................................................................65
19.13. CMP IS LOADING (12)...............................................................................................................................65
19.14. CMP IS UNLDING (13)...............................................................................................................................65
19.15. CMP IS RUNNING (14)..............................................................................................................................65
19.16. FAST UNLOADING (15).............................................................................................................................65
19.17. LO SUCT UNLOAD (16).............................................................................................................................65
19.18. LO SUCT HOLD (17)..................................................................................................................................66
19.19. HI DISC UNLOAD (18)...............................................................................................................................66
19.20. HI DISC HOLD (19)....................................................................................................................................66
19.21. SAFETY TRIPPED (20).............................................................................................................................66
19.22. NOT USED (21)..........................................................................................................................................66
19.23. HI AMP UNLDING (22)...............................................................................................................................66
5
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

HI AMP HOLD (23).....................................................................................................................................66

19.24.
19.25.
HI DIS TMP HLD (24).................................................................................................................................67
NOT USED (25)..........................................................................................................................................67
19.26.
19.27.
NOT USED (26)..........................................................................................................................................67
19.28.
HI WATER HOLD (27)................................................................................................................................67
DEFROST EVAP1 (28) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only).......................................................................67
19.29.
DRIP DOWN #1 (29) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)..........................................................................67
19.30.
DEFROSTR EVAP2 (30) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)....................................................................67
19.31.
19.32.
DRIP DOWN #2 (31) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)..........................................................................67
DEF-START CMP (32) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only).......................................................................67
19.33.
DEF-PUMP DOWN (33)............................................................................................................................67
19.34.
DEFROST COILS (34) ..............................................................................................................................68
19.35.
19.36.
DEF-AIR NORMAL (35)..............................................................................................................................68
NOT USED (36)..........................................................................................................................................68
19.37.
CMP OFF/D-DOWN (37)............................................................................................................................68
19.38.
CMP OFF/DefAIR (38) (only used if Air Defrost).......................................................................................68
19.39.
DEFcmp&val OFF (39)...............................................................................................................................68
19.40.
19.41.
LO TEMP HOLD (40)..................................................................................................................................68
19.42.
HI TEMP UNLOAD (41).............................................................................................................................68
HI TEMP HOLD (42)...................................................................................................................................68
19.43.
Chapter - 20. Condenser Control Logic ..............................................................................................69
20.1. Condenser Introduction..............................................................................................................................71
20.1.1 RO Step Condenser Cut In – Out Logic...........................................................................................71
20.1.2 RO Step Condenser with Variable Speed Fan..................................................................................72
20.1.2.1. Condenser Control...............................................................................................................72
20.1.2.2. Common Terms....................................................................................................................72
20.1.2.3. Control Discharge Pressure Calculation...............................................................................72
20.1.2.4. Condenser Reset..................................................................................................................74
20.1.2.5. Condenser Low Ambient......................................................................................................74
20.1.2.6. Condenser Related Setpoints...............................................................................................75
20.2. CONDENSER TYPES................................................................................................................................76
20.2.1 No Condenser...................................................................................................................................76
20.2.2 RO Step Common............................................................................................................................76
20.2.3 RO Step Common with a Fan AO and Condenser Faults................................................................77
20.2.4 RO Step Individual............................................................................................................................78
20.2.5 RO Step Combined ..........................................................................................................................79
20.2.6 Modulating........................................................................................................................................79
20.2.6.1. Modulating Common............................................................................................................79
20.2.7 Modulating Step Common................................................................................................................80
20.2.8 Modulating Individual........................................................................................................................81
20.2.9 RO Step Shared...............................................................................................................................81
20.2.10 Dual V8.............................................................................................................................................81
20.2.11 Common VFD Fan w/Bypass...........................................................................................................82
20.2.12 Evaporative types of Condenser Control..........................................................................................84
20.2.12.1. Viewing on MCS-CONNECT and MCS-MAGNUM LCD KEYPAD.......................................84
20.2.13 PID MOD Individual..........................................................................................................................85
20.2.14 PID Step Common............................................................................................................................86
20.3. PID CONTROL...........................................................................................................................................87
Chapter - 21. User Logic ............................................................................................................................88
21.1. Operands....................................................................................................................................................88
21.2. Operators ...................................................................................................................................................89
21.3. User Sensor Input.......................................................................................................................................90
21.3.1 Examples of User Logic Sensor Inputs.............................................................................................90
21.4. User Relay Output......................................................................................................................................91
21.5. User Analog Output....................................................................................................................................92
Chapter - 22. Electronic Expansion Valve Control Logic (EXV) ............................................93
22.1. Electronic Expansion Valve Control Logic (EXV).......................................................................................93
22.1.1 EXV Control States...........................................................................................................................94
6
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

22.1.2
EXV Maximum Operating Pressure..................................................................................................95
22.1.3
EXV control methods for Step Loading Compressors......................................................................95
Chapter - 23. EXV Control SSH, SSH2 ................................................................................................96
23.1. Fast Suction Superheat (Fast SSH) ..........................................................................................................96
23.2. Fast Suction Superheat 2 (Fast SSH2) .....................................................................................................96
23.3. Selecting Fast SSH or Fast SSH2 in MCS-Config.....................................................................................96
23.4. Circuit Base ...............................................................................................................................................96
23.4.1 Selecting the ‘EXV Control’ tab you are prompted with the following:..............................................97
23.4.2 Selection Options..............................................................................................................................97
23.4.3 Compressor EXV Results.................................................................................................................98
23.4.4 MCS EXV Factory Default Set Point.................................................................................................99
23.4.4.1. Fast SSH2, Suction Superheat, Plate HX............................................................................99
23.4.4.2. Fast SSH2, Suction Superheat, DX Coil..............................................................................99
23.4.4.3. Fast SSH, Suction Superheat, DX Barrel.............................................................................99
23.4.4.4. Fast SSH2, Discharge Superheat, DX Barrel.......................................................................99
23.4.4.5. Fast SSH, Suction Superheat, DX Barrel...........................................................................100
23.4.4.6. Suct Spht, Suction Superheat, DX Barrel...........................................................................100
23.5. Set Point Descriptions (Fast SSH & Fast SSH2)......................................................................................100
23.5.1 Set Point Adjustments.....................................................................................................................102
23.5.2 Low Suction Multiplier-SP 13 .........................................................................................................102
23.5.2.1. Low Superheat Adjustment-SP 15 .....................................................................................102
23.5.2.2. EXV Startup Time-SP 20 ...................................................................................................102
23.5.2.3. EXV Compressor Start Delay-SP 20 .................................................................................102
23.5.2.4. EXV Target & EXV Fast Zone-SP 9 ...................................................................................102
23.6. Fast SSH States ......................................................................................................................................103
23.6.1 FAST SSH2 State Format...............................................................................................................103
Chapter - 24. General Introduction to EXV PID ...........................................................................104
24.1. MCS PID REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................................104
24.2. Calculations for the adjustment to EXV valve...........................................................................................104
24.3. EXV PID Firmware ..................................................................................................................................104
24.4. MCS PID REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................................105
24.5. Selecting PID in MCS-CONFIG................................................................................................................105
24.6. Circuit Base..............................................................................................................................................105
24.7. Selecting the ‘EXV Control’ tab you are prompted with the following:......................................................106
24.8. Selection Options.....................................................................................................................................106
24.9. Compressor EXV Results.........................................................................................................................107
24.10. Set Point Descriptions (PID).....................................................................................................................107
24.11. PID Example Setpoint Defaults................................................................................................................109
24.12. Logic to Determine which K Multipliers to Use.........................................................................................110
24.12.1.1. Switching to Fast K multipliers is based on:.......................................................................110
24.12.1.2. Switching to Slow K multipliers is based on: .....................................................................110
24.12.1 Rate of Change - Moving too Fast..................................................................................................111
24.12.2 Rate of Change - Moving Slow Enough..........................................................................................111
24.13. MCS-Connect Evaporator EXV PID Status..............................................................................................112
24.14. Allowing an Adjustments to the EXV Valve...............................................................................................112
Chapter - 25. EXV Level Control using PID ...................................................................................113
25.1. Setting up EXV Level Control...................................................................................................................113
25.1.1 Setting up EXV Level Control – User Defined................................................................................113
25.1.2 Circuit Base Setup..........................................................................................................................115
25.1.3 Setup using EXV CONTROL WIZARD...........................................................................................115
25.1.4 Low Discharge Superheat EXV Target Adjust Logic.......................................................................116
25.1.4.1. The Low Discharge Superheat logic:..................................................................................116
Chapter - 26. Analog Output Control using PID ..........................................................................118
Chapter - 27. Hardware & Software support information ......................................................120
27.1. OEM Factory Checkout Procedure...........................................................................................................120
27.2. Hardware Trouble Shooting......................................................................................................................120
27.3. The MCS Trouble Shooting Quick Reference Sheet................................................................................120

7
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 28. MODBUS RTU ...................................................................................................................123

28.1.Setup the Modbus from MCS-Config’s Magnum Setup Screen(see below):............................................123
28.2.From MCS-Connect’s Service Window RS485 tab(see below):...............................................................124
28.3.From MCS-Magnum LCD/Keypad(see below):........................................................................................124
28.4.In MCS-CONFIG you can see & print a list of the Modbus Registers (see below):..................................125
Chapter - 29. BMS Communication Protocols ..............................................................................126
29.1. MCS-Magnum to BMS Connections ........................................................................................................126
29.2. Sensor Input Points..................................................................................................................................127
29.3. Relay Output Points..................................................................................................................................128
29.4. Setpoints...................................................................................................................................................129
29.5. Chiller/Compressor States........................................................................................................................129
29.6. Other Points..............................................................................................................................................130
29.7. Network inputs to MCS-Magnum..............................................................................................................132
Chapter - 30. REFR Unit and Compressor State Chart ............................................................134
30.8.1 BACNET OVER IP PROTOCOL.....................................................................................................135
30.8.2 ETHERNET NETWORK PROTOCOL............................................................................................135
29.7.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL...........................................................................................................136
29.7.2 MODBUS TCP/IP PROTOCOL.......................................................................................................136
29.8. PROTOCOLS USING MCS-BMS-GATEWAY..........................................................................................136
Chapter - 31. NETWORK PROTOCOLS ..............................................................................................137
31.1. Protocols MCS controllers support:..........................................................................................................137
31.2. MCS-MAGNUM USING RS-485..............................................................................................................138
31.3. Wiring Multiple MCS Controllers...............................................................................................................139
31.4. MCS-MAGNUM USING ETHERNET.......................................................................................................140
31.5. EXAMPLE NETWORK.............................................................................................................................141
31.5.1 Standalone MCS-Magnum.............................................................................................................141
31.5.2 MULTIPLE MCS-MAGNUM ENCLOSURES..................................................................................142
31.6. MULTIPLE MCS-MAGNUM BMS RS485 WIRING DIAGRAM................................................................143
Chapter - 32. Set Point Definitions .....................................................................................................144
32.1. Setpoint Types..........................................................................................................................................145
32.1.1 SETPOINT......................................................................................................................................145
32.1.2 LOCKOUT.......................................................................................................................................145
32.1.3 ALARM...........................................................................................................................................145
32.1.4 Time................................................................................................................................................145
32.1.5 Target..............................................................................................................................................145
32.1.6 Delay...............................................................................................................................................145
32.2. Window/Safety extension ........................................................................................................................146
32.2.1 Time and seconds to ignore for setpoints.......................................................................................146
32.3. Set points for MAG REFR V17 Software .................................................................................................147
Chapter - 33. Magnum Alarms and Safeties ..................................................................................164
33.1. Introduction...............................................................................................................................................164
33.2. Information only Alarms............................................................................................................................164
33.2.1 System Generated Alarms..............................................................................................................164
33.2.2 Alarms As A Result Of Individual Action..........................................................................................164
33.2.3 Alarms Generated By The Control Algorithm..................................................................................164
33.3. Magnum System Alarms ..........................................................................................................................165
33.3.1 Alarms Are Generated By The Magnum Control Algorithm:...........................................................165
33.3.1.1. Configuration Problem Alarms............................................................................................165
33.3.1.2. Mcs Local Network Problem Alarms...................................................................................165
33.3.1.3. Key Sensors Problem Alarms ............................................................................................165
33.3.1.4. EMERGENCY STOP Alarm................................................................................................165
33.4. Set Point Safety Alarms............................................................................................................................165
33.4.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................165
33.4.2 Sensor Inputs used In Conjunction with Magnum Set Point Safeties:............................................166
33.4.3 Set Point Safeties...........................................................................................................................166

8
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 1. Purpose of the REFR software

The purpose of the REFR software is to provide refrigeration that requires meeting stringent temperature require-
ments. This includes compressor control and provides defrost capabilities when needed.

1.1. Compressor Control

All of safeties and proactive steps that have been developed by MCS in compressor control are included.
Compressors supported include fixed step compressors with or without loaders/unloaders or variable speed
capabilities and screw compressors.

1.2. Defrost
This is a procedure, performed periodically to maintain the systems operating efficiency by removing any ice
build-up in the evaporators. A number of defrost methods are supported, refer to documentation on the following
pages.
The type that best suits the installation is selected via the MCS-CONFIG program.

9
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 2. Introduction to the Magnum

Software
REFRIG V17–This software supports all types of compressors except centrifugals. It supports the configuration
type118 Chiller V17 CFG. If this software is loaded into a Magnum with a different type of configuration file, an
invalid configuration type message will be generated.

About the Magnum

The Magnum controller is a microprocessor-based control system designed to provide complete control of many
different types of compressors of both fixed and variable capacity, as well as many additional features. Supported
control options include multiple liquid line solenoids, electronic expansion valves (EXVs), liquid injection, economizers,
hot gas bypass, variable frequency drives for compressors (VFDs), digital scrolls, and many more.
Applications vary from control of a single compressor to complex multiple compressor systems.
In all applications, however, safety and operating efficiency is of primary importance.
The controller interface is made to be informative and meaningful, with built-in logic to prevent unsafe conditions
from occurring. This helps reduce or even completely eliminate nuisance alarms.

Magnum V17 Software Control Point Capacity

„„ Circuits (compressors) up to 20
„„ Steps per Compressor up to 4
„„ Relay Outputs up to 80
„„ Analog Outputs up to 28
„„ Sensor Inputs up to 112
„„ Setpoints 255
„„ Alarms 100

Magnum Hardware Supported by Magnum V17 Software

The following MCS boards can be connected together through the MCS-I/O communications terminal block:
„„ MCS-Magnum (115/230 or 24vac) - 12 sensor inputs, 10 relay outputs, 4 analog outputs, 4 digital outputs
„„ MCS-RO10 (115/230 or 24vac) - 10 relay outputs
„„ MCS-SI16-AO4 (115/230 or 24vac) - 16 sensors and 4 analog outputs
Effective 3rd quarter 2019 (+12 system)
„„ MCS-Magnum-N-12 (12vac system) 12 sensor inputs, 10 relay outputs, 4 analog outputs, 4 digital outputs
„„ MCS-IO-BASE - 16 sensors, 4 analog outputs and 10 relay outputs
Add MCS-IO-EXT - 32 sensors total, 8 analog outputs total and 20 relay outputs total, same footprint
„„ MCS-RO-BASE - 10 relay outputs
Add MCS-RO-EXT - 20 relay outputs total, same footprint
„„ MCS-SI-BASE - 16 sensors, 4 analog outputs
Add MCS-SI-EXT - 32 sensors total, 8 analog outputs total, same footprint

The versatility of the Magnum offers the user much flexibility in configuring the controls in an
economical way. The limitation is not the number of boards but the total number of set points.

10
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

MCS-MAGNUM HARDWARE
REV. 9.1
 MCS-MAGNUM hardware has been modified and its new revision number is - 9.1

 Hardware modification - Ethernet PHY chip was replaced due to obsolescent of the old
Ethernet PHY chip by the manufacturer.

 NEW ETHERNET PHY CHIP REQUIRES NEW FIRMWARE TO FUNCTION.

FOLLOWING FIRMWARE VERSIONS (OR GREATER) ARE REQUIRED FOR

MAGNUM HARDWARE VERSION 9.1

V7: V17:
HVAC 07.03-V HVAC 17.26-A or greater
CENT 07.03-V CENT 17.26-A or greater
REFR 07.03-V REFR
RTUM 17.26-A or greater
V9: PAO 17.26-A or greater
HVAC 09.14-P ACU 17.26-A or greater
CENT 09.14-P
REFR 09.14-P
RTUM 09.14-P
PAO 09.14-P
ACU 09.14-P

V16:
HVAC 16.11-G
CENT 16.11-G
REFR 16.11-G
RTUM 16.11-G
PAO 16.11-G
ACU 16.11-G

11
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 3. MCS-MAGNUM-N and Expansion Boards

3.1. MCS-Magnum Revision 9.1

MCS-MAGNUM-N
115-230vac-Selectable Power
Keypad 10 Relay Outputs Power
Display Input

Selectable
Power

4 Analog Outputs

Reset Button

4 Digital Outputs

12 Sensor Inputs
Power Green LED Light Communications

Controller Specifications Input Power (Standard).. 115 or 230vac ±10% 50/60Hz

@ 77°F (25°C) ambient, 20VA max
Dimensions.................. 12.0”w, 8.0”h, 2.0”d
(Voltage is field selectable)
Mounting Holes............ Mounts on a backplane using
MCS-I/O Comm Port... 1 @ 38,400 baud
eight #6 sheet metal screws
RS-485 Comm Port..... 1 @ 19,200 baud
Operating Temperature.-40°F to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C)
Ethernet....................... 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
Storage Temperature.... -40°F to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C)
Real Time Clock.......... Battery backup
Microprocessor............ Zilog eZ80 Acclaim! @ 50mhz
Power Detection.......... Automatic power fail reset
Sensor Inputs (SI)........ 12 inputs 0-5vdc (10-bit A/D)
Digital Inputs................ 4 inputs 0 or 5vdc only
Relay Outputs (RO)..... 10 outputs 6.3amps @ 230vac Options
Analog Outputs (AO)... 4 outputs 0-10vdc -24............................... 24vac input power ±10%
Printed Circuit Board... Six layer with separate power ..................................... 50/60Hz @ 77°F (25°C) ambient
and ground planes

12
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

3.2. MCS-SI16-A04- Version 1.3

The MCS-SI16-AO4 provides a flexible and cost effective way to allow sensor input and analog output
expansion for MCS MAGNUM and MicroMag controllers
Input Power (Standard) ..... 115 or 230vac ±10% 50/60Hz
Optional 24vac input power ±10% 50/60Hz

Sensor Inputs 1 through 8

Power Input Selectable Power

Address Jumper
Spare Fuse

Sensor Inputs 9 through 16 Reset Button Communications

Analog Outputs

3.3. MCS-RO10 - Version 1.2

The MCS-RO10 provides a flexible and cost effective way to allow relay output expansion for MCS-MAGNUM
and 1MicroMag controllers.
Input Power (Standard) ..... 115 or 230vac ±10% 50/60Hz
Optional 24vac input power ±10% 50/60Hz

Relay Outputs 1 through 5 Power Input Selectable Power

Address Jumper
Spare Fuse

Relay Outputs 6 through 10 Reset Button Communications

13
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

3.4. MCS-Magnum-N-12 Revision 9.2

Firmware Version required - see previous section
Input Power (Standard) +12vdc power in board from 95 - 265vac switching power supply

Keypad Display
10 Relay Outputs 12vdc Power
Input

4 Analog Outputs

Reset Button

4 Digital Outputs

Communications
Power Green LED Light 12 Sensor Inputs

3.4.1 Optional Single Output Power Supply

100W Single Output Power Supply

Size: (L X W X H) (Inches):
6.3 x 3.8 x 1.5 inches
12Volts @ 8.5Amps

Power Supply is based on number of expansion boards that are being used in the system.

14
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

3.5. MCS-IO-BASE and MCS-IO-EXT

The MCS-IO-BASE provides a flexible and cost effective way to allow relay output, sensor input and analog
output expansion for MCS MAGNUM-N-12.
Using a Single Output Power Supply the MCS-IO can be used with 115-230 or 24 volt MCS-MAGNUM-N or
MicroMag systems.
Using the stackable MCS-IO-EXT you can double the number of inputs and outputs in the same footprint in
your enclosure or mounted to a backplane.
Photo below shows MCS-IO-BASE and MCS-IO-EXT mounted in a stackable array.

MCS-IO-BASE and MCS-IO-EXT

Dimensions....................................... 12.0”l, 5.5”w, 2.50”h

Mounting..................................................Mounts on a backplane using six #6 sheet metal screws
Operating Temperature..................... -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Operating Humidity ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 0-95% Non-Condensing
Storage Temperature........................ -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Sensor Inputs.................................... 16 0-5vdc on base - 32 total with MCS-IO-EXT
Analog Outputs................................. 4 outputs 0-10vdc on base - 8 total with MCS-IO-EXT
Relay Outputs................................... 10 outputs 5amps @ 230VAC on base - 20 total with MCS-IO-EXT
Printed Circuit Board......................... Four layer with separate power and ground planes
Input Power (Standard)..................... 12VDC Regulated power supply
MCS-I/O Comm Port......................... 1 @ 38,400 Baud
Power Detection................................ Automatic Power Fail Reset

15
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Theory for settings one MCS-IO-BASE plus extension boards

1. Address settings for installing MCS-IO-BASE and MCS-IO-EXT expansion boards:

0
9 1

23
78
4 56

MCS-IO-EXT
MCS-IO-Base - Set to #1
Mount a MCS-IO-EXT
address automatically
is assigned #2
2. Adding MCS-RO-BASE, MCS-RO-EXT
0
9 1

23
78
4 56

MCS-RO-EXT
MCS-RO-Base - Set to #3
Mount a MCS-RO-EXT
address automatically
is assigned #4

3. Adding MCS-SI-BASE, MCS-SI-EXT

0
9 1
23
78

4 56

MCS-SI-Base - Set to #3
MCS-SI-EXT
Mount a MCS-SI-EXT
address automatically
is assigned #4

SEE NEXT PAGE - ADDING A SECOND MCS-IO-BASE

16
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Theory for settings two MCS-IO-BASE boards plus extension board

1. Address settings for installing MCS-IO-BASE and MCS-IO-EXT expansion boards:

0
9 1

23
78
4 56

MCS-IO-EXT
MCS-IO-Base - Set to #1
Mount a MCS-IO-EXT
address automatically
is assigned #2
MCS-IO-BASE #1

2. Adding second MCS-IO-BASE

0
9 1

23
78
4 56

MCS-IO-Base - Set to #3

MCS-IO-BASE #2

17
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

3.6. MCS-RO-BASE and MCS-RO-EXT

The MCS-RO-BASE provides a flexible and cost effective way to allow relay output expansion for MCS
MAGNUM-N-12.
Using a Single Output Power Supply the MCS-RO can be used with 115-230 or 24 volt MCS-MAGNUM-N or
MicroMag systems.
Using the stackable MCS-RO-EXT you can double the number of inputs and outputs in the same footprint in
your enclosure or mounted to a backplane.

MCS-RO-BASE and MCS-RO-EXT

Dimensions........................................9.5”l, 4.00”w, 2.50”h

MCS-RO-BASE..................................Mounts on a backplane using four #6 sheet metal screws
MCS-RO-EXT....................................Mounts on top of the MCS-RO-BASE by 4 nylon standoffs and a stacker
header (included on MCS-RO-BASE)
Operating Temperature......................-40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Operating Humidit...............................0-95% Non-Condensing
Storage Temperature.........................-40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Microprocessor..................................Microchip PIC16F883 @ 8mhz
Relay Outputs (RO)...........................10 outputs 5amps @ 230VAC on bsse - 20 total with MCS-RO-EXT
Printed Circuit Board..........................Four layer with separate power and ground planes
Input Power (Standard.......................12VDC input power ±10% @ 77°F (25°C) ambient, 12VA max
MCS-I/0 Comm Port...........................1 @ 38,400 Baud
Power Detection.................................Automatic power fail reset

18
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

3.7. MCS-SI-BASE and MCS-SI-EXT

The MCS-SI-BASE provides a flexible and cost effective way to allow sensor input expansion for MCS
MAGNUM-N-12.
Using a Single Output Power Supply the MCS-SI can be used with 115-230 or 24 volt MCS-MAGNUM-N or
MicroMag systems.
Using the stackable MCS-SI-EXT you can double the number of inputs and outputs in the same footprint in
your enclosure or mounted to a backplane.

MCS-SI-BASE and MCS-SI-EXT

Dimensions....................................... 8.7”l, x 2.50”w, x 2.50”h

MCS-SI-BASE........................................ Mounts on a backplane using four #6 sheet metal screws
MCS-SI-EXT........................................... Mounts on top of the MCS-SI-BASE by 4 nylon standoffs and stacker
headers (included on MCS-SI-BASE)
Operating Temperature..................... -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Operating Humidity...............................0-95% Non-Condensing
Storage Temperature........................ -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Sensor Inputs.................................... 16 inputs 0-5vdc on base - 32 total with MCS-SI-EXT
Analog Outputs ................................ 8 outputs 0-10vdc on base - 16 total with MCS-SI-EXT
Printed Circuit Board......................... Four layer with separate power and ground planes
Input Power....................................... Powered by MCS-SI-BASE Power
Power Detection................................ Automatic Power Fail - Reset on MCS-SI-BASE

19
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 4. Network Connection–MCS-485

The next few pages show recommended network setups for communication to your controller using products from MCS.

4.1. MCS 485 Network

The MCS 485 Network can support up to 20 Magnums and their associated I/O boards. Access to this network can be
remotely through a 14.4K Baud modem. When using the dialup connection through a modem there is no degradation in
the performance of the network.
Each Magnum in the network must be assigned a unique address in the configuration file. This address will be the key
in establishing communications with the appropriate Magnum system. It can be viewed or changed from the LCD / key-
pad of the unit with Factory authorization.
RS485 transmissions should not exceed 1 mile without a repeater.

MAGNUM MAGNUM MAGNUM

ADDRESS #1 ADDRESS #2 ADDRESS #3

RS-485

MCS-USB-RS485 CABLE

USB PORT

PC with
Windows & MCS-CONNECT
NNECT

20
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 5. Network Connection–Ethernet

5.1. ETHERNET
5.1.1 RJ45 using a Crossover Ethernet Cable
When connecting directly through the 10 MBPS Ethernet port on the Magnum from a PC it is necessary to
use a crossover Ethernet cable.

MAGNUM MAGNUM MAGNUM

ADDRESS #1 ADDRESS #2 ADDRESS #3

Ethernet
Port

MCS-Ethernet
Switch

Ethernet Network
etwork
Windows & MCS-CONNECT
S-CONNECT

MCS-Ethernet-Cable

21
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 6. Network Connection–Remote

6.1. Remote using Ethernet
When connecting directly through the 10 MBPS Ethernet port on the Magnum from a PC it is necessary to
use a crossover Ethernet cable to the MCS-WIRELESS MODEM.

MAGNUM MAGNUM MAGNUM

ADDRESS #1 ADDRESS #2 ADDRESS #3

able
tC
erne
Eth
Cr
os
so
ve
rE
the
rne
tC
ab
le

MCS-WIRELESS MODEM is shipped from the factory

with the IP address configured for you.
Instructions on how to setup your PC to communicate
with the MCS-WIRELESS MODEM will be included.

22
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 7. PC Software for the Magnum

MCS-Config provides the configuration file (.cfg), which 7.1. Requirements for PC Software
includes the input/output points list, Setpoints, circuit in-
To install and run the program we suggest the following
formation, etc., for all versions of software. This program
system requirements:
is designed to assist and make the task of building the
configuration file as simple as possible. A manual cre-
ated in a PDF format is available on our web site: www. Minimum System Required to Run Program
MCScontrols.com, or available in other formats upon
• PC with a Pentium-class processor
request.
• Windows 7 or later operating system or
MCS-Connect provides both local and remote commu-
nications to the Magnum independent of software type. • Linux operating system
Local communications can be either through an RS485 • Minimum 1GB of RAM
or Ethernet connection. This program displays the sta-
tus of the controller, and changes can be made to the • Minimum 4GB Drive
system with proper authorization. Configuration files • 14.4k baud modem or higher for remote
can be transmitted to or received from a Magnum unit.
Communications
The Magnum automatically performs history logging and
this program allows the data to be presented in a useful • 1280 x 800 pixel or higher display
graph form.

MCS-CONFIG
SETUP SCREEN

23
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 8. Authorization Function

8.1. Authorization Function
The authorization code is a special four-character code that enables access to the Magnum controller.
The code may consist of any valid alpha/numeric characters if the system is being accessed through
MCS-Connect, however, the code must be numeric with values between 1 and 8 if it is to be entered through
the Keypad/Display. Each Magnum can have up to 10 different authorization codes, with four levels of
authorization which provide differing levels of functionality. The authorization code and the associated level
cannot be viewed or changed through the Keypad/Display or MCS-Connect, but only when the configura-
tion file is opened in MCS-Config. The authorization codes should be protected and remain confidential, or
unauthorized personnel may gain access to the system and perhaps cause irreparable damage.

From the Keypad/Display the following changes can be made based upon the authorization level:

FUNCTION VIEW USER SERVICE SUPERVISOR FACTORY ADMIN

Sensor offsets NO NO YES YES YES YES
Sensor diagnostics NO NO YES YES YES YES
Clear alarm history NO NO NO NO NO YES
Clear point information NO NO NO NO NO YES
Date and time set NO YES YES YES YES YES
Day of week set NO YES YES YES YES YES
Change No Flow Lockout or shut down NO NO NO NO YES YES
Change rotate Yes or No NO NO NO NO YES YES
Change Manual/Auto settings NO NO NO YES YES YES
Change setpoint values NO * * * YES YES
Change operating schedules NO YES YES YES YES YES
Change holiday dates NO YES YES YES YES YES
Lockout Reset NO ** ** ** YES YES
*** Change RS485 network settings NO NO YES YES YES YES
Change Ethernet network settings NO NO YES YES YES YES
Adjust Keypad/Display contrast YES YES YES YES YES YES

* Setpoints may have individual authorization levels; you must have the proper authorization to view or edit
them.
**See the Setup screen of the configuration for authorization level(s) that are allowed unlimited resets per
day. Authorization levels below ‘Auth Level Bypass’ are allowed only a limited number of resets. Authori-
zation levels at and above ‘Auth Level Bypass’ are allowed unlimited lockout resets.
***Firmware Version 17.62M, ‘Change RS485 network settings - SERVICE or greater.’
To get authorized through the Keypad/Display do the following:

1. Press ‘Menu’
2. Using  , , or  keys, move cursor to ‘Passwords’
3. Press  key.
4. Enter 4 digit password and press 

24
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

To get authorized through MCS-Connect do the following:

1. Click on desired Magnum in the Site Information screen.

2. Click button.

3. Enter the 4 digit code into the pop-up box and click ok (or press the enter key).

4. Depending on the authorization level, the button will change to one of the following displays, indicating if
the code was accepted or not.

View Only User Service Factory Supervisor

25
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 9. Standard Control Options

The following options are specified in the MCS-Config program when building the configuration. These options are
used to personalize the system to meet the individual control requirements.

9.1. General Options

„„ Control method can be based upon the control zone strategy or upon a voltage input that indicates
the number of stages to be on.
„„ The control temperature can specify either the return or leaving sensor.
„„ Specify if the anti recycle timer should start when the compressor is turned on or turned off. (All circuits)
„„ Number of circuits, maximum of eight.
„„ Number of evaporators, maximum of six per compressor.
„„ Alarm RO, this point will be turned on whenever an alarm is generated.
„„ REFR OK, Turned off when in alarm.
„„ Specify auto rotation for circuits.

9.2. Variable Capacity Control Method

9.2.1 Screw Compressor with slide piston

This option is specified in MCS-Config by selecting the compressor type in the Compressor Information
Panel under the MAGNUM screen.
As stated in the previous section, the control strategy is designed to modulate the system capacity to maintain
the control sensor reading within the specified control zone. The system capacity will be based upon the
number of compressors that are Wanted On. When the first, or an additional compressor, is turned on the
system capacity will be set to the calculated value. For the first compressor this will be the value of Setpoint
#31 “MIN FLA %”. When additional compressors are brought on, their capacity is calculated to provide the
same percentage of capacity prior to the change. The Magnum will adjust the required capacity between the
calculated and the maximum value an as specified in Setpoint #30 “MAX FLA %”. All compressors that are on
will be adjusted together to meet the system capacity.
When the maximum capacity value of the currently operating compressors has been reached, an additional
compressor, if available, will be Wanted On. The number of compressors Wanted On will be increased by
one and the system capacity will be set to the calculated value to maintain the same capacity as before the
change and the sequence will begin again. Once all available compressors are on, their maximum will be
100% regardless of the value in Setpoint #30 “MAX FLA %”.
When the minimum calculated value has been reached, a compressor will be turned off. This will occur when
the reduced number of compressors can achieve the same capacity at 90%. The number of compressors
Wanted On will be decreased by one and the system capacity will be set to 90% and the sequence will begin
again.
The compressor slide control is based upon the amps drawn by that compressor. For example, if Setpoint #31
“MIN FLA %” is set to 30%, that means 30% of the calculated full load amperage for that compressor.
Screw compressors with slide pistons that are turned on can either be loading (load solenoids are pulsed),
unloading (unload solenoids are pulsed), or in a hold state (no action is taken). The state of each compressor
reflects this action.

26
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

9.2.1.1. Force Digital Compressor Speed

Firmware Ver Refrig 17.26E7 (or greater) - This new feature allows the config to define a separator min allowed
speed for compressor. This feature is design to be used with tandem compressors. So when only the vfd compressor is
running the user can define a higher min speed than the capacity control logic allows. This feature is designed to
force the compressor to run at fast speed to insure proper oil return.
In order to use this new logic you must make setpoint #31 “Min Spd%” a “TARGET” type and put in the Low Zone
column the min speed value you want for running the digital compressor when only the digital compressor is
running on the suction group(see below).

9.2.2 Compressor with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

This option is specified in MCS-Config by selecting the Analog Output for the VFD in the “Compr Speed or
Modulate Hot Gas AO” cell in the Circuit Base screen.

The Magnum will control the compressor speed in the same matter as the compressor slide. The same
Setpoints will be used. This allows a fixed staged compressor’s capacity to be varied. See previous section for
Setpoints associated with variable capacity control logic.

9.2.3 Example of a system with 3 variable Step Compressors

(Example below assumes compressor 1 is the current lead compressor.)
STAGE 1
Compressor 1’s startup procedure has begun. Once on, the capacity will be adjusted from the minimum to the
maximum. All other compressors will be off. The steps Wanted On / Actual On will be 1 / 1.

STAGE 2
Compressor 2’s startup procedure has begun. Once on, the system capacity will be changed to the calculated
% and compressor 1 will be unloaded until it matches the calculated system capacity. Both compressors will
be varied from the calculated to the maximum. All other compressors will be off. The steps Wanted On / Actual
On will be 2 / 2. If the system capacity has been reduced to 45%, or the calculated % (whichever is larger)
and less capacity is needed, a compressor will be turned off and the system capacity will be set to the 90% or
the maximum and the system will return to Stage 1.
STAGE 3
Compressor 3’s startup procedure has begun. Once on, the system capacity will be changed to the calculated
% and compressors 1 and 2 will be unloaded until they equal the required capacity. All compressors will be
varied from the calculated to 100%. The steps Wanted On / Actual On will be 3 / 3. If the system capacity has
been reduced to 60%, and less capacity is needed, a compressor will be turned off and the system capacity
will be set 90% and the system will return to Stage 2.

9.2.4 Compressor Types

The compressor type is selected from a drop down list in the Compressor Information panel on the MAGNUM
Refrig screen.
„„ Type of compressors supported:
„„ Reciprocating with oil, � Reciprocating with out oil,
27
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

„„ Screw with oil, � Scroll or VFD Comp,

„„ Hitachi Screw, � Bitzer Screw CompHartford Screw
„„ Hardford Screw Comp, � Hall 85/95 Ton Screw
„„ Carlyle Screw � Hanbell Screw
„„ Centrifugal � Mitsubishi
„„ TurboCor � Trane Screw
„„ Three compressor steps can be supported. Compressor plus two additional steps of unloaders. Note,
compressor safeties relate to a circuit. If multiple compressors are on a circuit and a safety trips all
compressor on that circuit will be turned off. If hot gas bypass refer to Hot Gas Bypass Option.
„„ Specify that part winding, two RO points will be used with fixed step compressors, the first RO will be
turned on with the second RO being turn on the number of seconds later that is specified in set point
#62. (By circuit) If not part winding, only allocate one RO point for the compressor.
„„ Pump down, the compressor will be pumped down only when the compressor is being turned off.
Note, when the compressor is started the liquid line solenoid is not opened until the suction pressure
reaches the value that is contained in the pump down set point. A liquid line solenoid is required. (All
circuits)
9.2.5 Condenser Options
„„ Number of condensing stages.
„„ Type of condenser:
„„ None,
„„ RO Step Common (all compressors monitored for discharge pressure),
„„ RO Step Combined, circuits 1 & 2 and circuits 3 & 4 will share a condenser (compressor on
related circuits monitored for discharge pressure),
„„ All of the RO Step type condenser can have a variable speed fan per circuit,
„„ Modulating Common. This is usually used to control a water condenser with a value that will be
modulated depending on the rate of change of the discharge pressure
„„ RO Step Shared, selected circuits will share a condenser (compressor on related circuits monitored
for discharge pressure),

9.3. Target Reset (only if temperature control)

This option is only available if the control on zone (temperature) has been selected.
Target Reset is a 0 to 5 volts dc sensor input; Display Type is TRGTRST, to the Magnum microprocessor.
The Target Reset follows the following rules using set point #21, MAX TRG RESET:
1. If the input is 2.5 volts dc the Target Reset is zero.
2. At 0 volts dc the Target Reset is a negative value equal to the set point value.
3. At 5.00 volts dc the Target Reset is a positive value equal to the value in the set point.
4. For values in between 0 – 2.5 and 2.5 – 5.0 the Target Reset is a plus or minus value which is proportional to
the sensor input voltage.

9.4. Oil Differential Calculation

For all other software the calculation is OIL PRESSURE minus SUCTION PRESSURE. This provides the flexibility
of using oil pressure if available or if not, discharge pressure can be used in place of the oil pressure. This is set
up in the circuit information section of MCS-Config by pointing the oil pressure sensor to the discharge pressure

9.5. On/Off Switches

„„ The following digital input switches can be associated with the system, their action will affect the
chiller package or an individual circuit, then action will only affect that circuit:
„„ Flow switch, if off the system has lost flow. The system wills either lock out, if NO FLOW set point is
active, or shut down, if NO FLOW set point is inactive.

28
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

„„ Pump down switch, if on and the compressor is off, will not start the compressor. If the compressor is
on, the system moves to the pump down state to begin the process of turning off the compressor(s) in
normal steps.
„„ Run/Stop, if off the system will not run. This is usually wired to a RUN/STOP switch that is manually
positioned. If the system is running, the system moves all circuits (compressor) to off in normal steps.
„„ Network Run/Stop, if off the system will not run. This input is provided by another system that resides
on the network. It functions in the same matter as the Run/Stop switch.
„„ Emergency Stop switch, if on, the system will be shut down immediately and will remain disabled until
the switch is off.

9.6. Low Suction Unloading & Holding

Set point #168, UNLOAD DELAY, will delay the unloading.

This option is activated when the set point #70, LO SUCT UNLD, is active. The purpose of this option is to take
corrective action prior to a safety being tripped. When the suction pressure is below the value calculated by
adding the value of this set point to the value of the LOW SUCTION set point for the time specified, the system
will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take the following action:

„„ For a fixed step compressor, the system will turn off one step of capacity associated with that com-
pressor until that circuit is in an UNLOADED state, which all steps except one are unloaded. The
circuit (compressor) state will be LO SUCT HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity
control indicates that another step is to be unloaded or if after 5 minutes the suction pressure has
turned to normal.
„„ For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the suction
pressure rises above the calculated value. During this time the circuit (compressor) state is LO SUCT
UNLOAD. Once this pressure has been reached, the circuit (compressor) state will be LO SUCT
HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates that less capacity is
needed or if after 5 minutes the suction pressure has turned to normal.
Normal pressure is the value calculated by adding the value of the LO SUCT RELD set point #71 to the value of
the LOW SUCTION set point #69.

9.7. High Discharge Pressure Unloading & Holding

Set point #168, UNLOAD DELAY, will delay the unloading.

This option is activated when the set point #74, HI DISC UNLD, is active. The purpose of this option is to take
corrective action prior to a safety being tripped. When the discharge pressure is above the value calculated by
subtracting the value of this set point from the value of the HI DISCH PSI set point for the time specified, the
system will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take the following action:

„„ For a fixed step compressor, the system will turn off one step of capacity associated with that
compressor until that circuit is in an UNLOADED state, that is all steps except one are unloaded. The
circuit (compressor) state will be HI DISC HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity
control indicates that another step is to be unloaded or if after 5 minutes the discharge pressure has
turned to normal.
„„ For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the discharge
pressure drops below the calculated value. During this time the circuit (compressor) state is HI DISC
UNLOAD. Once this pressure has been reached, the circuit (compressor) state will be HI DISC
HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates that less capacity is
needed or if after 5 minutes the discharge pressure has turned to normal.
Normal pressure is the value calculated by subtracting the value of the HI DISC RELD set point #75 from the
value of the HI DISC PSI set point #73.

9.8. High Discharge Temperature Unloading & Holding

Set point #168, UNLOAD DELAY, will delay the unloading.

29
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

This option is activated when the set point #80, HI DISC UNLD, is active. The purpose of this option is to take
corrective action prior to a safety being tripped. When the discharge temperature is above the value calculated
by subtracting the value of this set point from the value of the HI DISCH TMP set point for the time specified, the
system will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take the following action:

„„ For a fixed step compressor, the system will turn off one step of capacity associated with that
compressor until that circuit is in an UNLOADED state, that is all steps except one are unloaded. The
circuit (compressor) state will be HI DISC HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity
control indicates that another step is to be unloaded or if after 5 minutes the discharge temperature
has turned to normal.
„„ For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the discharge
temperature drops below the calculated value. During this time the circuit (compressor) state is HI
DISC UNLOAD. Once this temperature has been reached, the circuit (compressor) state will be HI
DISC HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates that less capacity
is needed or if after 5 minutes the discharge temperature has turned to normal.
Normal pressure is the value calculated by subtracting the value of the DIS TMPRELD set point #81 from the
value of the HI DISC TMP set point #79.

9.9. High Ampere Unloading & Holding

Set point #168, UNLOAD DELAY, will delay the unloading.

This option is activated when the set point #67, HI AMPS %, is active. The purpose of this option is to take correc-
tive action prior to a safety being tripped. When the amp draw is within one-half of the calculated HI AMP safety
value, the system will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take the fol-
lowing action:

• For a fixed step compressor, the system will turn off one step of capacity associated with that compressor until
that circuit is in an UNLOADED state, that all steps except one are unloaded. The circuit (compressor) state will
be HI AMP HOLD. The circuit will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates that another step is to
be unloaded or if after 5 minutes the amp draw has turned to normal.

9.10. Control Power Relay –No Stop

This option provides the capability of interrupting the power supply to the compressors in the system. A relay
output, referred to as the control relay, must be wired so that when it is off no power reaches the compressors.
This is a safety measure that will insure that the compressors are off then the system calls for them to be off.
The relay output must be indicated in the MCS-Config program and set point #97, NO STOP, must be active. The
system will continually monitor the amp draw of compressors that the system has in an off state. The system
will calculate the minimum amp draw by multiplying the FLA for that compressor times the percentage value
in the NO STOP set point. If the amp draw is greater than this value for the time specified; the system will turn
the control relay off, generate a NO STOP alarm and place the system in a lockout state. This provides an additional
level of protection.

9.11. Part Wind or Star Delta Starter

Either a part winding or star delta type of compressor starter is supported. This option is specified in the MCS-
Config program and will require two successive relay output points. When this option is specified, set point #65,
STARTER DLAY, must contain the delay in seconds before the second relay output is turned on. This delay is
normally 1 second for part winding or 5 seconds for a star delta starter. With this option, when a compressor
is to be turned on, the first relay output is turned on and the system will wait the time specified in set point #65
before the second relay output is turned on.

30
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

9.12. English or Metric sensor readings

The system supports English, Metric, or a combination sensor readings, this is specified in the MCS-Config
program. All sensor values and all software-coded offsets are automatically converted into the option selected
and displayed with the appropriate character. The following table contains the display character:
NOTE: Set point values are NOT automatically adjusted. Their values must be set up in MCS-Config to reflect
either English or Metric values. Their display character will be automatically adjusted.

SENSOR READING ENGLISH METRIC METRIC

CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER
Temperature F C C
Pressure – Gage Reading P B P
Pressure – Absolute Reading p b p
Humidity % % %
Digital or Switch
Amp or CT A A A
Voltage V V V
Refrigeration Level % % %

9.13. Compressor Auto Rotation

The auto rotation option is selected by setting the value in set point #92, LEAD COMP to zero. If this value is
not zero, it will contain the number of the lead circuit (compressor) and auto rotation is disabled. Note this set
point can be manually changed to force a different compressor as the lead compressor or to enable auto rotation.

When this option is enabled, the system will rotate the compressors based upon the value in set point # 93.

CMP ROTATION
If the value set point #93 is zero, rotation will occur with every complete capacity cycle and the next compres-
sor will be selected as the lead compressor.
92 LEAD COMP Enables the user to specify the lead compressor. The value of this setpoint will indicate
the lead compressor. If zero, then auto rotation is enabled.
If the ‘Time (sec)’ field is non-zero the compressor with the least amount of run time will
become the lead compressor upon rotation.
93 COMP ROTATION Specifies the number of days between rotations (setpoint #92 must be set to zero to en-
able auto rotation). If zero, then rotation will occur with every cycle.

If the value set point # 93 is zero, rotation will occur with every complete capacity cycle and the next compressor
will be selected as the lead compressor.

Else, the value is the number of days between rotations. At midnight the system will check if it is time to rotate
compressors. If yes, the system will check the run hours on each compressor and select the one with the least
amount of run hours to be the lead compressor.

If set point # 93 is set up as an ALARM type of set point, a compressor rotation message will be generated each
time a compressor is rotated.

31
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

9.14. Expanded Compressor Rotation to Check for Maximum Run Time

In the Compressor Information panel of the Magnum HVAC screen in MCS-Config, there is a check box to
select how compressors are to be rotated, based either on Run Time or First On/First Off.

9.15. Run Hour Lockout

In MCS CONFIG, in the Setup screen, select the option Run Hour Lockout Required. If enabled,
then enter the number compressor run hours that must pass before the run hour lockout is trig-
gered.

Run Hour Lockout- At midnight if any compressor has reached a set number of run hours, the unit will be
disabled until an authorized service call is performed.
Function 2: (Compressor lockout based on run time hours)
If this option has been enabled, at midnight if any single compressor exceeds the number of run
hours specified, the system will disable all compressors (circuits) and change the unit state to MAX-
IMUM RUN TIME. This test will only be made a midnight when new day logic is being executed. In
this state the Magnum will not enable normal operations and the only screen that will be available
is the Passwords. If the Magnum is reset the chiller state will be MAXIMUM RUN TIME not UNIT
IN POWER UP. Once the system state is MAXIMUM RUN TIME the system can be accessed from
MCS-Connect but the system will not accept changes to the Relay Output states.

9.16. Compressor Anti-Cycle Logic

When a compressor is to be turned off, the Magnum software will make a calculation to determine the amount
of time that the compressor will remain in an anti-cycle state. This calculation is based upon how long the
compressor has been on and setpoints #59 “ACYC OFF->ON” and #60 “ACYC ON->ON”.

If the value of setpoint #60 minus the amount of time that the compressor has been on is greater than the value
in setpoint #59, the compressor will remain in the anti-cycle state for the period of time specified in setpoint #60.
Else the anti-cycle timer will be set to the value in setpoint #59.

For example:
#59 (ANTI-CYC OFF) = 300 seconds
#60 (ANTI-CYC ON) = 600 seconds
If the compressor had been running for 3 minutes (180 seconds)
600 – 180 = 420 this is greater than setpoint #59; therefore, the anti-cycle timer will be set to 600 seconds, the
value of setpoint #63.
If the compressor had been running for 12 minutes (720 seconds)
600 – 720 = -120 this is less than setpoint #59; therefore, the anti-cycle timer will be set to 300 seconds, the
value of setpoint #59.
If the controller loses power, the length of time that the system was down will be taken into consideration when
determining whether the compressor should be in an anti-cycle state and for how long.

32
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

9.17. Warning & Alarm Relay Outputs

Warning Relay Output will be turned on whenever the system generates a warning type of message. These
messages are:

„„ LOW REFR TEMP UNLOAD

„„ LOW SUCT PSI UNLOAD
„„ HIGH DISC TEMP UNLOAD
„„ LOW SUCT RELOAD
„„ LOW DISC RELOAD
„„ CIRCUIT IS IN A SAFETY STATE
The system will continue to run and no safeties have been tripped.

Warning Relay Output will also be turned on whenever a circuit is placed in a safety state.

Alarm Relay Output will be turned off whenever the system generates an alarm type of message. This indicates
that a safety or lockout condition has occurred.

9.18. Operating Schedules

Two operating schedules per each day of the week and 8 holidays are supported. Each schedule contains a
start and end time, if the time and day of the system is with in these limits the schedule is true and the system
will be allowed to run. If not, the system will be off due to schedule.

9.19. Modification to adjust approach values

New set point #152 is required. To activate the adjustment to all approach set points (119. 122, 125 &127) this
set point must be active. Its value is the maximum adjustment that will be made to the approach set points.

The adjustment will be made proportional to the positioning of the wanted on of the slide. If the slide is mi- point
between its minimal and maximum, then the adjustment will be one half of the value in set point #89.

The following table is the result of testing this change: Set point #152 = 10.0. Range is 60 (100.0 – 40.0)
Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted
Values Values Values Values Values Values
Voltage 0.3 .7 1.9 2.1 5.0
% Wanted 40 50 83 89 100
% Of range 0 16 71 81 100
Set PT #119 19.0 19.0 17.7 11.8 10.9 9.0
Set PT #122 20.0 20.0 18.2 12.8 11.9 10.0
Set PT #125 14.0 14.0 12.2 6.8 5.9 4.0
Set PT #127 19.0 19.0 17.2 11.8 10.9 9.0

33
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 10. Magnum Control Zone

10.1. Control Method Option
This option is selected in the MCS configuration program:

This control strategy is based upon developing a control zone and then to step the compressor(s) through their
stages to maintain the control sensor reading within this zone. To accomplish this, the system will constantly
monitor the control value, its rate of change and position in relationship to the control zone and make adjustments
accordingly.

The strategy of a fixed step system, reciprocating compressor, and a variable (slide) step system, screw compressor
or a reciprocating compressor with an inverter, are slightly different. The variable step system allows for infinite
variations of capacity while the fixed step system does not.

This option is active in all software and is specified in the MCS-Config program.

10.2. Common Definitions

10.2.1 Target
The control target is specified in set point #1. This will be the base of developing the control zone.

10.2.2 Control Zone

The control zone is developed by adding the set points for the control target (set point #1) and the dead band + (set point
#2) to obtain the upper limit. The lower limit is obtained by subtracting the dead band - (set point #3) set point from the
control target (set point #1).

Setpoint
S #3 Low
wer Deadband
d=1
47
7
Temperature

46
6 Upper Lim
mit
Control Zon
ne + 1
45
5 Target Control Zone
Control Zon
ne - 1
44
4 Lower Lim
mit

43
3

Once the control zone has been established, the system will attempt to keep the control sensor reading with in
this range.

34
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

10.2.3 Control Sensor

This is the sensor that has been specified in the MCS-Config program as providing the control value reading. It
will normally be either the entering or leaving temperature or the suction pressure. The set points must be adjust-
ed according to the type of control measurement selected.

10.2.4 Control Input Rate of Change

The Rate of Change is how rap[idly the control value changes over a period of time. If the control value is increasing
the rate will be positive, if decreasing the rate will be a negative value. How quickly the input is changing, its direction
and its distance from the control zone will all be used to determine how the Magnum will respond.

10.2.5 Step Delay and Sensitivity

The system will not attempt to take action until the Step Delay counts down to zero. Set point 26 contains the
initial value. The speed that the counter will decrement by is based upon the rate of change and the sensitivity that
has been specified in Set point #26. The purpose of the sensitivity value is to limit how quickly the Magnum reacts
to changes indicated by the control sensor. The lower the value of the Set point,, the faster the Magnum will react to
changes of the control sensor.

35
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 11. Magnum Voltage SI Control Method

This option is selected in the MCS Configuration program.

An alternate control strategy is based on a variable voltage input to the Magnum board. This control strategy is based
upon developing a series of cut in (turn on) and cut out (turn off) values for each capacity stage (step) in the system.
When a cut in value has been reached or exceeded and the delay time between stages (steps) has been satisfied, the
Magnum will turn on the next stage (step). Conversely, when a cut out value has been reached and the delay time
between stages (steps) has been satisfied, the Magnum will turn off a stage (step) that was turned on.

11.1. Number of steps supported:

REFR software supports 24 stages of capacity, set points 205 through 229 are used with this option.

11.2. Common Definitions

11.2.1 Targets, Stage Cut In Values
The control targets, stage cut in values, for up to 24 steps of capacity are specified in set points 206 through 229.

11.2.2 Stage Cut Out Values

The stage cut out values for each step of capacity is calculated by subtracting set point 205 from the individual
step cut in value.

11.2.2.1. Step Delay

The step delay is contained in set point 26. This is the minimum time between changes in capacity.

11.2.2.2. Controlling Sensor

This is the sensor that has been specified in the MCS-Config program as providing the control value. It must be a
voltage sensor type. The voltage value is provided by an external system.

36
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 12. REFR Defrost

12.1. Defrost cycle initialization:
A defrost cycle can be initiated in the following ways:
1. By the approach set point temperature and time being satisfied,
2. If the compressor accumulated run time exceeding the value in setpoint #145 (or setpoints #120, #123, #126
high zone).
3. By the Manual Defrost Switch being on. Manual Defrost Switch if it exists must be setup in the Circuits SI grid
under the MAG REFR button.

The system evaporator temperature must be set up in MCS-Config under the MAG REFR button in the Evaporator
Information section, cell EVAP Temp SI:

4. Setpoint #118 ‘TARGET TYPE’ - if setpoint #118 is configured as a “Target” type, then setpoint #118 high
zone column is used as the ambient disable temperature for rotating coil defrost. Otherwise if setpoint #118 is
not configured at “Target” type the old logic of using setpoint #118 value aa the ambient disable point for rotating
coil defrost is used.

5. Set the manual defrost time delay based on the enter temp, high return temp less defrost time required.
If setpoint #120 is setup as “Target” type then manual defrost time delay is based on the enter temp compared
to setpoint #118, 121, and 124 and uses the values in the high zone column from setpoint #120, 123, or 126
as the defrost time delay.

37
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

12.2. Approach type setup

If the system is in dehumidification mode, then the approach set up will be based upon the dehumidify values.
Approach Temperature = set point #127
Defrost Duration = set point #128

When in dehumidification, if the approach value satisfies the approach setpoints, the logic will turn off LLS #1 and
Turn on LLS #2. There, the logic will monitor the approach for the 2nd LLS. Once the 2nd LLS’s approach value
meets the defrost setpoint requirements, a defrost cycle will be initiated.

If not in dehumidification mode, the defrost approach temperature and defrost duration is established by comparing
the systemDefrost Durationtemperature
evaporator = set
to point #120 #118, #121 and #124.
set points

If the system
systemevaporator
evaporatortemperature
temperature is input
greater than #124,
sensor DEF LOW
is greater TEMPDEF
than #121, but less
MED than #121,then
TEMP, DEFthe
MED
approach set
TEMP, then the approach set up will be based
up will be based upon the high temperature values. upon the medium temperature values.
Approach Temperature = set point #122
Approach Temperature = set point #119
Defrost Duration = set point #123
Defrost Duration = set point #120
If the system evaporator temperature is greater than #124, DEF LOW TEMP but less than #121, DEF MED
If not inthen
TEMP, dehumidification
the approachmode,
set up the defrost
will be basedapproach
upon thetemperature and defrost
medium temperature duration is established by comparing
values.
the system evaporator temperature to
Approach Temperature = set point #122set points #118, #121 and #124.
Defrost Duration = set point #123
If the system evaporator temperature is greater than #124, DEF LOW TEMP but less than #121, DEF MED TEMP,
then
If the the approach
system set up
evaporator will be based
temperature upon
is less the
than medium
#124, DEF temperature
LOW TEMP, values.
then the approach set up will be
Approach the low temperature
based uponTemperature values.
= set point #122
Approach Temperature = set point #125
Defrost Duration = set point #123
Defrost Duration = set point #126
If the system evaporator temperature is less than #124, DEF LOW TEMP, then the approach set up will be based
After a defrost cycle, the pre defrost approach values will remain for the time specified in set point #131 then
upon the low temperature values.
they will be reestablished according to the evaporator temp sensor input value.
Approach Temperature = set point #125
If the evaporator
Defrost temp sensor
Duration = setinput value
point #126reads greater than setpoint #118, defrost will be disabled.

Thesecycle,
After a defrost valuesthe
are displayed
pre in both thevalues
defrost approach MCS-Connect program
will remain and on
for the time the Magnum
specified screen
in set point under
#131 status.
then they will be reestab-
lished according to the evaporator temp sensor input value.
MCS-Connect
If the evaporator program
temp sensor under
input thereads
value Status tab: than setpoint #118, defrost will be disabled.
greater
These values are displayed in both the MCS-Connect program and on the Magnum screen under status.
MCS-Connect program under the Status tab:

Defrost setup for approach is displayed in column “Def. Approach/Def. Time’.

Defrost setup for approach is displayed in column “Def. Approach/Def. Time’.

Magnum under the Status

Magnum under option under
the Status the Main
option Menu,
under scrollMenu,
the Main to anyscroll
of thetocircuit
any ofscreens:
the circuit screens:

09:55 CMP #(x) +5.0v HH:MM CIRCUIT CTL VOLTAGE

CMP OFF/READY CURRENT CONTROL STATE
000:00:42 TIME IN CURRENT STATE
SST SSH SCT DSH SAT.SUCT. SUCT SHEAT SAT.COND. DISC HEAT
38 16.9 97 79.2 TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP
APP/TME 20.0/00:03:00 UNIT’S defrost approach (repeated for each circuit)
PG↑ PG↓ PAGE UP PAGE DN

NOTE:
NOTE:The
Theapproach setpoint
approach set point and
and time
time (duration)
(duration) will bewill be displayed
displayed for eachfor each circuit.
circuit.
11.1.2. Approach type based circuit evaporator temperature
38
The actual circuit approach temperature is the calculated as follows:
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

12.2.1 Approach type based circuit evaporator temperature

The actual circuit approach temperature is the calculated as follows:
If an Evaporator Suction Pressure has been specified, this value will be converted into temperature according to
the refrigerants PT Chart. This value is subtracted from the systems return temperature sensors value. This will
be the approach value for that evaporator

The evaporator suction temperature will be the evaporator suction pressure converted to temperature.

If the evaporator suction pressure sensor has not been specified then the evaporator suction temperature will
be the circuit suction pressure plus the value of set point #203, SAT EVAP DIFF which is then converted to
temperature..

This value is displayed for each circuit in MCS-Connect under the Status Tab in the column “Evap.
If theApproach/Time”.
evaporator suction pressure sensor has not been specified then the Circuit Suction Pressures value will be
converted into temperature according to the refrigerants PT Chart. This value is subtracted from the systems
return temperature sensors value. This will be the approach value for that evaporator.

For circuit 1) the 12.4F is the calculated circuit evaporator temperature and time of 00:02:00 is the time that
this temperature must be greater than the Defrost Approach temperature. This time is based upon the value of
This value is displayed
set point #137, DEFfor each
APPRcircuit
TIME.inWhen
MCS-Connect under the
the compressor Status Tab
is running and in
thethe column “Evap.
temperature Approach/Time”.
is greater than the
For circuit 1)defrost
the 12.4F is the calculated circuit evaporator temperature and time of 00:02:00 is the time
approach temperature this counter will be decremented. If the temperature is less then it will that
bethis tempera-
reset to
ture must be greater than the Defrost
the value in set point #137. Approach temperature. This time is based upon the value of set point #137, DEF APPR
TIME. When the compressor is running and the temperature is greater than the defrost approach temperature this counter will
be decremented. If the temperature is less then it will be reset to the value in set point #137.
This value is display locally on the Magnum LCD under “Approach”.
This value is display locally on the Magnum LCD under “Approach”.

09:55 DEFROST #(X) +5.0V HH:MM DEFROST INFORMATION CTL VOLTAGE

FroceDef(118) 01:58:23
EVAP Approach Delay Time when next forced defrost is scheduled, will decrement
41.1 50.0 3:00 Evap pressure Approach pressure Delay for approach
EVSat EVSht E Lead PSI PSI Counter decrementing
18.1 87.4 1 Evap Sat. Evap SHEAT Evap Lead
TEMP TEMP #
PG↑ PG↓ PAGE UP PAGE DN

11.2. Defrost Ready Indicator

MAG REFR software will turn on a relay output when the system is getting ready to enter a defrost cycle. This
must be setup in the cell “Defrost Slave” Indicator in the Evaporator Information section under the MAG REFR
button. If not in defrost this relay output will be off.

12
39
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

12.3. Defrost Ready Indicator

MAG REFR software will turn on a relay output when the system is getting ready to enter a defrost cycle. This must be setup in
the cell “Defrost Slave” Indicator in the Evaporator Information section under the MAG REFR button. If not in defrost this relay
output will be off.

12.4. Defrost Indicator

MAG REFR software will turn on a relay output when the system is in a defrost cycle. This must be setup in the cell
“Defrost Fan Off” in the Evaporator Information section under the MAG REFR button. If not in defrost this relay output
will be off.

12.5. Defrost Indicator setup

These indicators must be setup in the Evaporator Information Section under the MAG REFR in the MCS-Config
program.

40
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

12.6. Defrost Types supported:

REFR firmware supports several different types of defrost:
• None
• Time Off
• Reverse Cycle
• Electric
• Hot Gas Standard (all coils defrost at once)
• Hot Gas On The Fly (One Coil is defrosted at a time)
• Air Defrost
• Rotating Coil, with Reheat

Defrost Types are selected in the Evaporator Information Section under the MAG REFR in the MCS-Config
program. If AIR Defrost Type is YES, then the Standard Defrost Type selected will be used as backup.Defrost -
None
No defrost is performed. The defrost approach will indicate NO DEF. One liquid line solenoid is required no other defrost relay
output points are required.

12.7. Defrost - Time Off

The Time OFF defrost type functions exactly like electric defrost except there is no electric defrost relay to be turned on.

12.8. Defrost - Reverse Cycle

The Reverse Cycle defrost type is specified for a heat pump type of compressor.
The following table shows the RO status and the circuit states during defrost cycles.

DEF-START
Normal PUMP DOWN DEFROST COILS PUMP DOWN DRIP DOWN
CMP
Comp ON ON ON ON (StPt #166) ON OFF
LLS #1 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
LLS #2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
REV VALVE OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

The DEF-PUMP DOWN state can be terminated for the following reasons:
• Time in state exceeds the value of set point #141.
• Suction pressure decreases by more than the value of set point #142

The DEFROST COILS state can be terminated for the following reasons:
• Time in state exceeds the time indicated by set point #120 if high temperature, set point #123 if
medium temperature, set point #126 if low temperature, or set point #128 if in dehumidify mode.
• Evaporator temperature is equal to or greater than value of set point #143.
• Discharge pressure is equal to or less than value of set point #144.

12.9. Defrost - Electric

This type of defrost requires the circuit to consist of one or more evaporators with one liquid line and electric heat
relay per circuit. When a defrost cycle is required, the system will turn off the compressor. The circuit states will
indicate which evaporator is in a defrost mode. The electric heat relay will be turned on when the state is in
DEFROST COILS.
Following table shows the status of the circuit RO’s when in various defrost states.

41
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Normal PUMP DOWN DEFROST COILS

Comp ON ON OFF
LLS #1 ON OFF OFF
LLS #2 ON OFF OFF
ELEC DEFROST OFF OFF ON
The DEFROST COILS state can be terminated for the following reasons:
• Time in state exceeds the time indicated by set point #120 if high temperature, set point #123 if
medium temperature, set point #126 if low temperature, or set point #128 if in dehumidify mode.
• Evaporator temperature is equal to or greater than value of set point #143.
12.10. Defrost - Hot Gas - Conventional (set point #117 = Active)
This type of defrost requires the circuit to consist of two separate evaporators with a liquid line and a hot gas
solenoid for each. A defrost cycle will defrost both evaporators at the same time. When a compressor requires a
defrost cycle, that compressor will defrost and all other compressors will be checked if their accumulated run time
is greater than the value in set point #130 they will also enter a defrost cycle. If not, the compressor will be turned
off until all defrost cycles have been completed. The circuit states will indicate which evaporator is in a defrost
mode.
Following table shows the status of the circuit RO’s when in various defrost states. The compressor states are
not shown. When a defrost cycle begins, the circuit states will move from left to right as indicated below until both
evaporators have been defrosted and then the circuit will return to a normal state.

Normal DEF-START CMP PUMP DOWN DEFROST COILS PUMP DOWN DRIP DOWN

Comp ON ON ON ON ON OFF
LLS #1 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
LLS #2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Hot Gas Main OFF OFF OFF ON (StPt #135) OFF OFF
Hot Gas Def 1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Hot Gas Def 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Hot Gas Bleed OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

The DEF-PUMP DOWN state can be terminated for the following reasons:
• Time in state exceeds the value of set point #141.
• Suction pressure is equal to or less than value of set point #142.

The DEFROST COILS state can be terminated for the following reasons:
• Time in state exceeds the time indicated by set point #120 if high temperature, or set point #123
if medium temperature, or set point #126 if low temperature or set point #128 if in dehumidify
mode.
• Evaporator temperature is equal to or greater than value of set point #143.
• Discharge pressure is equal to or less than value of set point #144.

12.11. Defrost - Hot Gas on the Fly (set point #117 = Inactive)
This type of defrost requires the circuit to consist of two separate evaporators with a liquid line and a hot gas sole-
noid for each. When a defrost cycle is required, the circuit will defrost one evaporator at a time. The circuit states
will indicate which evaporator is in a defrost mode.

42
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Following table shows the status of the circuit RO’s when in various defrost states. The compressor states are
not shown. When a defrost cycle begins, the circuit states will move from left to right as indicated below until both
evaporators have been defrosted and then the circuit will return to a normal state.

Normal DEF EVAP #1 DRIP DOWN #1 DEF EVAP #2 DRIP DOWN #2 NORMAL

Comp ON ON ON ON ON ON
LLS #1 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
LLS #2 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
HOT GAS MAIN OFF ON (StPt #135) OFF ON (StPt#135) OFF OFF
HOT GAS DEF 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
HOT GAS DEF 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
HOT GAS BLEED OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

The DEFROST COILS state can be terminated for the following reasons:
• Time in state exceeds the time indicated by set point #120 if high temperature, set point #123 if
medium temperature, or set point #126 if low temperature.
• Evaporator temperature is equal to or greater than value of set point #143.
• Discharge pressure is equal to or less than value of set point #144.

12.12. Rotating Compressor Air Defrost Selection:

The Rotating Compressor Air Defrost option selection is made in the Evaporator Information section under the
MAG REFR button. Selecting YES in the cell labeled “Only Use AIR Defrost Type” activates this option. Other
types of defrost are available as a backup, if specified in this cell. The option to look at a digital input exists that,
when on, will disable Air Defrost and only use the backup defrost type. This option will use evaporator approach to
initiate defrost, and rotate through running/non running compressors using times and approach values defined in
setpoints #236 through #246.

12.12.1 Defrost function:

The system will support a normal defrost cycle based upon approach, and use specified backup defrost if needed.
The goal is to defrost the evaporators based solely on time off. This is accomplished by rotating the compressors.
A system with 4 compressors will turn on the number of compressors required by the staging logic. If the logic
calls for 3 of the 4 compressors to run, the defrost logic will monitor the approach of each running circuit. Once
a circuits approach meets the calculated air defrost approach value, for greater than the air defrost trigger time,
the circuit will enter the “Def – Air Normal” state. During this time, a Non-Running compressor will be brought on.
The compressor requiring defrost will continue to be ran, along with the recently started compressor, for the value
in setpoint #245. The purpose of this is to allow the recently started compressor time to get to capacity. Once this
time elapses, the compressor calling for defrost is cycled OFF for the amount of time in the calculated Air Defrost
setpoint.

43
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Once this time expires, the compressor will enter the “Off /Ready” state. At this instant, the next compressor in
the sequence will be placed into the “Def – Air Normal” state. The compressor that just finished it’s defrost cycle,
will be started and will run together for the time in setpoint #245. Once this time expires, the compressor slated
for defrost will be cycled OFF.
This procedure will continue for ALL compressors on the unit.
If a Backup Defrost option was selected, the logic will continue to monitor evap approach for running compres-
sors, if any approach values rise above the calculated backup defrost setpoints (Setpoints #118 through #126),
then a backup defrost will be initiated.

12.12.2 Defrost is initiated

Defrost cycles are initiated based on evaporator approach.
Air defrost uses setpoint #236 through #246 to determine the condition, approach value, and time in defrost for
the unit. If a backup defrost is set for an air defrost unit, the logic uses the standard defrost setpoints for the defrost
values. It is important, that the trigger delay for the backup defrost (Setpoint #137) always be a lesser value than
the trigger delay for the Air Defrost (Setpoint #246).
Backup defrost, if selected, uses setpoints #118 through #126 to determine the condition, approach value, and
time in defrost for the unit.
If a digital input is selected, when this input is “ON” Air Defrost will be disabled. The logic will only compare the
evaporator approach to setpoints #118 through #126 and use the backup defrost method selected.

12.13. Defrost - Multiple Evaporator/Reheat

12.13.1 Purpose of Multiple Evaporator/Reheat:
Provides an option to build units with multiple evaporators and reheat solenoids in place of liquid line solenoids.
The evaporators provide cooling control while the reheat solenoids will provide defrost capabilities.
12.13.2 Multiple Evaporator/ Reheat (normal) Selection:
12.13.3 Compressor Info window:
• Compressor Type; Hanbell Screw (any variable capacity compressor).
12.13.4 Evaporator Info window:
• Standard Defrost Types; Electric.
• Use AIR Defrost as Primary; No.
12.13.5 Circuit Base:
• Type of LLS; LLS only.
• 2nd LLS; No.
• Number of EVAP/REHT; number of evaporators (maximum of 6).
• Max EVAP/REHT ON; not used at this time.
• Are There Reheat Relays; YES indicates that there are reheat relays.
• Allow Reheat Relays; index of sensor input that indicates whether reheat is required, ON al-
lows reheat relays to be turned on if specified.
• Reheat Voltage SI; index of sensor input that provides a voltage indicating number of reheat
required. Refer to set points #248 through #253.
12.13.6 Relay output sequence for a variable compressor with 4 EVAP/REHT:
• COMP (no split winding)
• LOAD ER
• UNLOADER
• EVAP 1
• EVAP 2
• EVAP 3
• EVAP 4
• REHEAT 1
• REHEAT 2
• REHEAT 3
• REHEAT 4
44
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

12.13.7 Relationship of evaporators and reheat:

• If reheat relays are selected, the number of reheat relays is the same as the number of evaporators.
• Reheat relays are tied to the corresponding evaporator (reheat 1 is tied to evaporator 1, etc.).
• If the corresponding evaporator is ON then the reheat is OFF
• If the compressor is running and not in dehumidification mode and the return (EVAP temp) tem-
perature is above the HIGH DEFROST TEMPERATURE then all evaporator relays will be ON and
all reheat relays will be OFF.
If the compressor is running and not in dehumidification mode and the return (EVAP temp) temper-
ature is less than or equal to the HIGH DEFROST TEMPERATURE then one less than the number
of evaporator relays will be ON. The evaporator relays can be rotated based upon set point #134,
this will enable a reheat relay to be turned ON.
If system is in dehumidification mode and the compressor is running; then only one half of the
evaporator relays will be turned ON The evaporator relays can be rotated based upon set point
#134, this will enable reheat relays to be turned ON. This will force rotation of the reheat relays if
any are ON.
• If the unit’s state is running (not forced off) and the compressor is OFF then all evaporator relays
will be off and the reheat relays can be turned ON if needed. Reheat relays can be turned ON with
the compressor OFF.
If the unit state is forced off, RUN/STOP off, EMGENCY STOP is on etc., then all compressor,
evaporators and reheat relays will be off.

12.13.8 Set points that support this selection:

• #134, EVAP rotation; if this set point is active and its value is greater than zero then the evaporators
will be rotated when the number of evaporator relays that are ON is less than the number available.
The value which is expressed in minutes is the time between rotations.

• #247, Reheat offset OFF, subtracted from the reheat stage on value, to determine when a heater
will be turned off.

• #248 -253, REHT STAGE #; voltage value: will enable reheat from 1 through 6 (these function like
the STAGE # ON set points.

12.13.9 Defrost; Electric type with multiple evaporator/reheat relays:

Standard defrost set points must be setup. The unit will develop the unit approach and when the circuit meets the
approach requirement a defrost cycle will be initialized. Defrost set up and states are similar to the Electric defrost
type. All compressors will enter the defrost cycle.

Defrost states when a circuit is running:

• Unit state & circuit state will be DEF START COMP; in this state the compressor and all evapora-
tors will be ON. All other relays will be OFF. Circuit will remain in this state for Time (SEC) value of
set point #138.To eliminate this state set Time (SEC) value to zero.
• Unit state will be DEFROST COILS and the circuit state will be DEF PUMP DOWN. In this state
the compressor will be on and all other relays will be off. Circuit will remain in this state until either the
discharge pressure has reached the pump down value or the time has exceeded the time value.
• Unit state will be DEFROST COILS and the circuit state will be DEFROST COILS. In this state all
reheat relays will be on and all other relays will be off, the reheat solenoids are providing the heat
for the defrost cycle and the sensor input allowing reheat and the number are ignore. Circuit will
remain in this state until the defrost time has been reached or the evaporator temperature is equal
to or greater than the value of set point # 143.
• Unit state will be DEFROST COILS and the circuit state will be DRIP DOWN. In this state all circuit
relays will be off. The circuit will remain in this state for time in the value cell of set point #132.
• System will return to normal operation.

45
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Defrost states when a circuit is NOT running:

• The compressor is off; therefore, the DEF PUMP DOWN state will be skipped.

• Unit state will be DEFROST COILS and the circuit state will be DEFROST COILS. In this state all
reheat relays will be on and all other relays will be off, the reheat solenoids are providing the heat
for the defrost cycle and the sensor input allowing reheat and the number are ignore. Circuit will
remain in this state until the defrost time has been reached or the evaporator temperature is equal
to or greater than the value of set point # 143

• Unit state will be DEFROST COILS and the circuit state will be DRIP DOWN. In this state all circuit
relays will be off. The circuit will remain in this state for time in the value cell of set point #132.

• System will return to normal operation.

12.14. Unit Operating with the Evaporator/Reheat Selection

Unit set up:
• Two variable drive compressors
• Four evaporator and reheat relays per circuit

12.14.1 Unit is in normal mode (not dehumidification) & circuit is on

• Compressors staging is based upon staging voltage input.

• If the return (EVAP temp) temperature is above the HIGH DEFROST TEMPERATURE then all
evaporator relays will be ON and all reheat relays will be OFF.

• If the return (EVAP temp) temperature is less than or equal to the HIGH DEFROST TEMPERA-
TURE then one less than the number of evaporator relays will be ON. The evaporator relays can be
rotated based upon set point #134, this will enable a reheat relay to be turned ON.

12.14.2 1.3.2 Unit is in dehumidification mode & circuit is on

• All compressors are staged together; the voltage input will be varied between the first cut in, set
point #206 minus setpoint #205, and the set point with maximum voltage. In our example with 2
circuits that would be set point #208. To avoid peak power issues the second, next, compressor will
be turned on once the delay has been counted down. The compressor will remain on until the volt-
age is less than value of setpoint #206 – Setpoint #205.

• If compressor is on then only one half of the evaporator relays are on others will be off.

• If set point #134 is active and its value is greater than zero; then the evaporator relays will
be rotated based upon the value of this set point. Value is expressed in minutes.
If the sensor allowing reheat is on and the voltage sensor indicating the number of reheat relays
that can be turned will allow up to one half reheat relays to be turned on. If the evaporator relays
are rotated, the reheat relays will also be rotated.

12.14.3 Unit is a normal mode & circuit is off

If the sensor allowing reheat is on and the voltage sensor indicating the number of reheat relays that can be turned will
allow the reheat relays to be turned on. No rotation of reheat relays will occur.

12.14.4 Unit is a NOT in a normal mode (RUN/STOP, Emergency Stop etc.)

All circuit relays will be off.

46
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 13. Dehumidify Function

This function is setup by selecting a sensor input in the cell Dehumidification Enable in the Evaporator Information
section under the MAG REFR button.

MAG REFR software will turn on a relay output when the system is in the dehumidification mode. This must be setup
in the cell “Dehumidify Indicator” in the Evaporator Information section under the MAG REFR button. If not in dehu-
midification mode this relay output will be off.
When the Dehumidification Enable sensor is on, the approach temperature and time will be changed to the values in
set point #127, DEF DEH APPR for temperature, and set point #128, DEF DEH TIME for time. When is indicator is
on, the system will provide only half of its cooling capacity.
When in dehumidification, if the approach value satisfies the approach setpoints, the logic will turn off LLS #1 and
Turn on LLS #2. There, the logic will monitor the approach for the 2nd LLS. Once the 2nd LLS’s approach value meets
the defrost setpoint requirements, a defrost cycle will be initiated.

47
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 14. Common Definitions

14.1. How a Defrost Cycle can be initiated
A defrost cycle can be initiated by the approach set point temperature and time being satisfied, by the time in setpoint #145
expiring, or by the Manual Defrost Switch being on. Manual Defrost Switch if it exists must be setup in the Circuits grid under
the MAG REFR button.

14.1.1 Approach Set point Temperature & Time (Air Defrost)

The evaporator temperature sensor input (must be setup as the Entering Temperature in the Evaporator Information section
under the MAG REFR button in the MCS-Config program) determines which approach values will be used. The ap-
proach values will be recalculated after a defrost cycle, once the time in set point #131 has been met.
If this temperature is greater than set point #236, Air Defrost High Temp, then no air defrost is required. Approach will indi-
cate NO DEF.
If the temperature is less than set point #236 (Air Defrost High Temp) but greater than set point #239 ( Air Defrost
Medium Temp), the approach set point temperature will be set point #237 (Air Defrost High Approach) and the time will be
set point #238 (Air Defrost High Time).
If the temperature is less than set point #239 (Air Defrost Medium Temp) but greater than set point #122 (Air Defrost Low
Temp), the approach set point temperature will be set point #240 (Air Defrost Medium Approach) and the time will be set
point #241 (Air Defrost Medium Time).
If the temperature is less than set point #242 (Air Defrost Low Temp) the approach set point temperature
will be set point #243 (Air Defrost Low Approach) and the time will be set point #244(Air Defrost
Low Time).
If the temperature is less than setpoint #242 minus the value in its Low Zone, the conditions are too
cold to use Air Defrost, and it will be disabled. Backup Defrost, if present, will only be allowed.

14.1.2 Approach Set point Temperature & Time (Standard Defrost)

The evaporator temperature sensor input (must be setup as the Entering Temperature in the Evaporator Information section
under the MAG REFR button in the MCS-Config program) determines which approach values will be used.
The approach values will be recalculated after a defrost cycle, once the time in set point #131 has been met.

If this temperature is greater than set point #118, DEF HI TEMP, then no defrost is required. Approach will indicate
NO DEF.

If the temperature is less than set point #118 but greater than set point #121, DEF MED TEMP; the approach set point tem-
perature will be set point #119, DEF HI APPR and the time will be set point #120, DEF HI TIME.

If the temperature is less than set point #121 greater than set point #122, DEF LOW TEMP; the approach setpoint tem-
perature will be set point #122, DEF MED APPR and the time will be set point #123, DEF MED TIME.

If the temperature is less than set point #124, DEF LOW TEMP; the approach set point temperature will be set point #125,
DEF LOW APPR and the time will be set point #126, DEF LOW TIME.

14.1.3 Approach Actual Temperature & Time

The actual circuit approach temperature is the calculated as follows:
If an evaporator suction pressure sensor has been specified in the Circuit SI grid

48
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

The evaporator suction temperature will be the evaporator suction pressure converted to temperature.
If the evaporator suction pressure sensor has not been specified then the evaporator suction temperature will be the circuit
suction pressure plus the value of set point #203, SAT EVAP DIFF which is then converted to temperature..
This value is displayed for each circuit in MCS-Connect under the Status Tab in the column “Evap. Approach/Time”.

14.1.4 Defrost Fan Relay

MAG REFR software will turn on a relay output when the system is getting ready to enter a defrost cycle. This must be setup
in the cell Defrost Ready Indicator in the Evaporator Information section under the MAG REFR button. If not in defrost this
relay output will be off.

14.1.5 Defrost Slave

MAG REFR software will turn on a relay output when the system is in a defrost cycle. This must be setup in the cell Defrost
Indicator in the Evaporator Information section under the MAG REFR button. If not in defrost this relay output will be off.

49
 10. Magnum
MCS-REFRIG MANUALDisplays
13. Magnum Displays
13. 10.1.
Magnum Displays
Menu Key
Chapter - 15. Magnum Displays
13.1. Menu Key
Pressing the ‘Menu’ key provides the following: The display shows options available.
13.1. Menu Key
15.1. Menu Key the ‘Menu’ key provides the following: The display shows options available.
Pressing
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
Pressing the ‘Menu’ key provides the following: The display shows options available.
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL
09:56 Main Menu DISPLAY HH:MM Screen Title DESCRIPTION
-Status -Setpoints -Control Status Display -Active set pts Display
-Outputs -Serv Tools
09:56 Main Menu -Relay/Analog
HH:MM Display
Screen Title -Service Tools Display
-Inputs
-Status -Lckout RST
-Setpoints
09:56 Main Menu -Sensor
-Control
HH:MM Input Display
Status Display
Screen Title -Lockout Reset
-Active set ptsDisplay
Display
-Alarms
-Outputs
-Status -Lckout
-Serv ALM
Tools
-Setpoints -Alarm Display
-Relay/Analog
-Control StatusDisplay
Display -Lockout
-Service Alarm
Tools
-Active set Display
ptsDisplay
Display
-Graphs
-Inputs
-Outputs -Passwords
-Lckout RST
-Serv Tools -Graphing
-Sensor Display
Input Display
-Relay/Analog Display -Password
-Lockout Display
-Service Reset
Tools Display
Display
Help
-Alarms
-Inputs -Lckout
-Lckout ALM
RST Help
-Alarm
-SensorDisplay
Input Display -Lockout
-Lockout Alarm
Reset Display
Display
-Graphs
-Alarms -Passwords
-Lckout ALM -Graphing Display
-Alarm Display -Password Display
-Lockout Alarm Display
Help
-Graphs -Passwords Help
-Graphing Display -Password Display
Help Help

10.2. Status Display – Chiller (Default at Power Up)

15.2. Status
13.2. Display – Chiller
Status Display (Default
– Chiller at Power
(Default Up)Up)
at Power
The CURRENT STATE OF THE PACKAGE.
13.2. Status Display – Chiller (Default at Power Up)
The display shows the current capacity of the package and how long we have been at this level. By
Thepressing
CURRENT the STATE
PG OROF PGTHE
 youPACKAGE.
will get additional information on each circuit.
TheThe display shows
CURRENT STATEthe
OFcurrent capacity of the package and how long we have been at this level. By
THE PACKAGE.
The display
pressing
ACTUAL the shows
PG↑ OR
DISPLAY thePG
current
↓ you capacity of the package
will get additional and
informationhow long circuit.
on each
DESCRIPTION we have been at this level. By
pressing the PG↑ OR PG↓ you will get additional information on each circuit.
09:55 Unit DISPLAY
ACTUAL +5.0v HH:MM CHILLER UNIT
DESCRIPTION CTL VOLTAGE
UNITACTUAL
IS UNLOADED
DISPLAY CURRENT DESCRIPTION
CONTROL STATE
09:55 025:42;33
Unit +5.0v HH:MM TIME INCHILLER
CURRENTUNIT
STATE CTL VOLTAGE
WTD
09:55ACT
UNIT FLA%
IS DLY
UNLOADED
Unit ROC
+5.0v WANTED
HH:MM ACTUAL WANTED%
CURRENTCHILLER
CONTROLUNITDELAY
STATE CTLSLOPE
VOLTAGE
0 0UNIT 40%
IS UNLOADED0.0
025:42;33180 #STEPS #STEPS
TIME INACTUAL%
CURRENT NEXT
STATE
CURRENT CONTROL STATE CHG DIRECTION
WTDCTL ACT
ON VOLTAGE
FLA% DLY+5.0V
025:42;33 ROC WANTED INDICATES
ACTUAL CONTROL
TIME IN WANTED%ON STATE
CURRENT VOLTAGE
DELAY OR TEMP
SLOPE
0
WTD 0
ACT PG 180
40%
FLA% PG
DLY 0.0 
ROC #STEPS
WANTED #STEPS
ACTUAL PAGE UP
ACTUAL%
WANTED% NEXT CHG
DELAY PAGE DN
DIRECTION
SLOPE
0CTL ON 0 VOLTAGE
40% 180+5.0V0.0 #STEPS INDICATES
#STEPS CONTROL
ACTUAL%ON VOLTAGE
NEXT CHGOR TEMP
DIRECTION
PG↑
CTL ON VOLTAGE PG↓
+5.0V PAGE UP ON VOLTAGE OR TEMP
INDICATES CONTROL PAGE DN
PG↑ PG↓ PAGE UP PAGE DN

10.3. Status
15.3. Status DisplayDisplay – Circuit
– Circuit (x) (x)
13.3. Status Display – Circuit (x)
The CURRENT STATE OF A CIRCUIT.
13.3. The
Status Display – Circuit (x)
display shows the current capacity of circuit (x) and how long we have been at this level. By
Thepressing
CURRENT PG youOF
the STATE willAgo back to the Chiller state display OR PG you will get additional
CIRCUIT.
The displayon
Theinformation
CURRENT shows
STATE the current capacity of circuit (x) and how long we have been at this level. By
this circuit. CIRCUIT.
OF A
The display
pressing the shows
PG↑ you thewill
current capacity
go back to theof circuitstate
Chiller (x) and howOR
display longPG
we↓ have been
you will get at this level. By
additional
information
ACTUAL theonPG
pressingDISPLAY ↑ you
this will go back to the Chiller state display
circuit. OR PG↓ you will get additional
DESCRIPTION
information on this circuit.
09:56 ACTUAL
CMP #(x) DISPLAY+5.0v HH:MM DESCRIPTION
CIRCUIT CTL VOLTAGE
CMPACTUAL
OFF/READYDISPLAY CURRENT DESCRIPTION
CONTROL STATE
09:56 000:00;30
CMP #(x) +5.0v HH:MM TIME IN CURRENT
CIRCUIT STATE CTL VOLTAGE
SUCT
09:56 DISC
CMP CMP OPD
OFF/READY
#(x) MOTOR
+5.0v SUCTION
HH:MM DISCHARGE OIL DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT CONTROL
CIRCUIT STATE CTL MOTOR
VOLTAGE
66P 190P 134P
000:00;30
CMP OFF/READY 0% PRESSURE PRESSURE
TIME IN CURRENT
CURRENT PRESSURE
CONTROL STATE
STATE AMP %
55F
SUCT 177F
DISC ----
OPD
000:00;30 OK
MOTOR TEMPERATURE
SUCTION TEMPERATURE
DISCHARGE ----
OIL DIFFERENTIAL
TIME IN CURRENT STATE STATUS
MOTOR
66P
SUCT DISCPG 134P
190P OPD 0%
PG
MOTOR PRESSURE
SUCTION PAGE OIL
PRESSURE
DISCHARGE UP PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PAGEAMPDN%
MOTOR
55F
66P 177F
190P ----
134P OK
0% TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE ----
PRESSURE STATUS
AMP %
55F 177F PG↑ ---- OK↓
PG TEMPERATURE PAGE UP ----
TEMPERATURE PAGE DN
STATUS
PG↑ PG↓ PAGE UP PAGE DN

09:55 CMP #(x) +5.0v HH:MM CIRCUIT CTL VOLTAGE

CMP OFF/READY CURRENT CONTROL STATE
000:00:42 TIME IN CURRENT STATE
SST SSH SCT DSH SAT.SUCT. SUCT SHEAT SAT.COND. DISC HEAT
38 16.9 97 79.2 TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP
09:55 CMP
PG#(x) +5.0v
PG HH:MM CIRCUIT
PAGE UP CTLPAGE
VOLTAGE
DN
25
09:55 CMP CMP
OFF/READY
#(x) +5.0v HH:MM CURRENT CONTROL
CIRCUIT STATE CTL VOLTAGE
000:00:42
CMP OFF/READY TIME IN CURRENT
CURRENT CONTROL STATE
STATE
25 SST SSH000:00:42
SCT DSH SAT.SUCT. SUCT
TIMESHEAT
IN CURRENTSAT.COND.
STATE DISC HEAT
38
SST 16.9
SSH 97
SCT 79.2
DSH TEMP 50
SAT.SUCT. TEMP
SUCT SHEAT TEMP
SAT.COND. TEMP
DISC HEAT
38 16.9 97 79.2 TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP
PG↑ PG↓ PAGE UP PAGE DN
 09:55 DEFROST #(X) +5.0V HH:MM DEFROST INFORMATION CTL VOLTAGE
Nxt Air Defr 01:58:23
EVAP Trigger#(X) +5.0VDelay Time when next air defrost is scheduled, will decrement
09:55 DEFROST HH:MM DEFROST
Evap pressure INFORMATION
Trigger pressure Delay CTLfor
VOLTAGE
trigger
09:55
41.1
Nxt AirDEFROST
50.0 #(X) +5.0V
Defr 01:58:23 3:00 HH:MM DEFROST INFORMATION CTLdecrementing
VOLTAGE
MCS-REFRIG Nxt Air
MANUAL
EVSat Defr
EVSht 01:58:23
E Lead Time
PSIwhen next air defrost is
PSIscheduled, will
Counterdecrement
EVAP
EVAP
Trigger
Trigger
Delay
Delay Time
Evapwhen
Evap Sat.next air
pressure defrost
Evap ispressure
SHEAT
Trigger scheduled, will
EvapDelay
Leaddecrement
for trigger
18.1
41.1 87.4
50.0 1
3:00 Evap pressure Trigger pressure Delay for trigger
41.1 50.0 3:00 PSITEMP TEMP PSI #
Counter decrementing
EVSat EVShtPG E Lead PG PSI Sat. PSI PAGE Counter
EVSat
18.1 EVSht
87.4 E Lead
1 Evap Evap SHEAT UP
Evap Lead decrementing PAGE DN
Evap Sat. Evap SHEAT Evap Lead
By18.1
pressing the
87.4 PG
PG↑ you will
1 go back to the
PG↓ previous
TEMP
TEMP display OR
TEMP
TEMP PG you will
#get information on the
↑ circuit information
PG↓ PAGE UP# PAGE DN
next circuit. AfterPGall is displayed pressing the PG PAGE will return
UP the user to the chiller
PAGE display.
DN

09:55 DEFROST
By pressing#(X) the+5.0V
PG you will go HH:MM
back to the DEFROST INFORMATION
previous display OR PG you willCTL get VOLTAGE
information on the
Nxt Air Defr 01:58:23
EVAP next
Triggercircuit. After all
Delay circuit Time when
information is next air
displayed defrost
pressingis scheduled,
the PG  willwill decrement
return the user to the chiller
pressing the PG
Bydisplay. ↑ you will go Evap
back to the previous
pressure OR PG↓ youDelay
display pressure
Trigger will getfor
information
triggeron the
41.1 By pressing the PG↑ you will go back
50.0 3:00
PSI to the previous displayPSI OR PG↓ you will getdecrementing
Counter information on the
EVSat next circuit. After
EVSht all circuit information
E Lead is displayed pressing the PG↓ will return the user to the chiller
next circuit. After 1all circuit information is displayed
Evap Sat. SHEATthe PGEvap
pressing
Evap ↓ will return
Lead the user to the chiller
18.1 display.
87.4
display.
PG↑ PG↓
TEMP TEMP #
10.4. Outputs PAGE UP PAGE DN

13.4.Selecting
13.4. Outputs
Outputs the ‘Outputs’ option provides the following:
15.4. Outputs
By
Selectingpressing
ACTUAL
Selecting the PG
the ‘Outputs’
DISPLAY
the ‘Outputs’ ↑ youprovides
option
option will go back
provides to the previous display
the following:
the following: OR PG↓ you will get information on the
DESCRIPTION
Selecting thenext
‘Outputs’
circuit.option provides
After all the following:
circuit information is displayed pressing the PG↓ will return the user to the chiller
display. DISPLAY
ACTUAL DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
09:56 Outputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
Relays Status RO position & names Current status of RO
13.4.
09:56 Outputs
M-1 COMP1A
Outputs Lck Off  HH:MM
HH:MM
Screen Title
Screen
Left/Right Arrow
09:56
Relays Outputs Status
M-2 COMP1B  
Lck Off ROUsing Left/Right
position & names arrowTitle
allows
Current Left/Right
user to view
status of ROArrow
all data
Relays
M-3COMP1A
LOAD1 Status
LckOff
Off RO position & namesfor RO’sCurrent status of RO
displayed
M-1 Lck
M-1
M-2 COMP1A
M-4Selecting
COMP1B Lck
LckOff
UNLOAD the ‘Outputs’
Lck Off
Off option provides the following:
Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
M-2 COMP1B PGLck Using Left/Right
Switch to AO’s arrow allows
Page up user to viewPage
all down
data
Anlog
M-3 LOAD1 Lck Off
Off PG for RO’s displayed
for RO’s displayed
M-3 LOAD1
M-4 UNLOAD Lck Off
Lck Off
ACTUAL DISPLAY
M-4 UNLOAD Lck Off Switch to AO’s DESCRIPTION
Page up Page down
Anlog PG↑ PG↓ Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG↑ PG↓

09:56 Outputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Selecting the Page
Relays Down option providesROthe
Status following:& names
position Current status of RO
M-1 COMP1A Lck Off
M-2Selecting
Selecting COMP1B
the theDown
Page
ACTUAL PageLckDown
Offoption
option
DISPLAY provides
provides Using
the
the following: Left/RightDESCRIPTION
following: arrow allows user to view all data
M-3Selecting
LOAD1 the Page LckDown
Offoption provides the following: for RO’s displayed
M-4 UNLOAD Lck Off
ACTUALPG DISPLAY Switch DESCRIPTION
Anlog
09:56 ACTUAL ↑
DISPLAY
Outputs  ↓
PG HH:MM to AO’s DESCRIPTION PageTitle
Screen up PageArrow
Left/Right down
Relays Status RO position & names Current status of RO
M-5 FAN1Outputs
09:56 On  HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
09:56
M-6 FAN2Outputs Status On  HH:MM
ROUsing Left/Right
position Screen
& names arrowTitle
allows
Current Left/Right
user to view
status Arrow
all
of RO data
Relays RO position & namesfor RO’sCurrent status of RO
Relays
M-7 FAN3
M-5 FAN1 Status
On
On displayed
M-5
M-8FAN1
M-6 FAN4
FAN2 On
On
On Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
M-6 Selecting the PageOn Down option provides the following:
Using
Switch Left/Right
to AO’s arrow allows
Page up user to viewPage
all down
data
M-7 FAN2
FAN3 On for RO’s displayed
for RO’s displayed
M-7 FAN3
Anlog
M-8 FAN4 PG  On
On PG 
M-8 FAN4ACTUAL DISPLAY On Switch to AO’s Page up
DESCRIPTION Page down
Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG↑ PG↓
Anlog PG↑ PG↓
09:56 Outputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
Relays
Selecting the Page Status
Down option provides theRO position & names
following: Current status of RO
Selecting the Page Down option
M-5 FAN1 On
provides the following:
M-6 FAN2 On Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
M-7 FAN3 ACTUAL DISPLAY On for RO’s displayed
DESCRIPTION
M-8Selecting
FAN4 the Page Down On option provides the following:
Selecting the Page Down option providesSwitchthe following:
to AO’s Page up Page down
09:56 Outputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
AnlogACTUALPG
Relays ↑ Status PG↓
DISPLAY RO position & names DESCRIPTION Current status of RO
M-9 FAN5 ACTUAL DISPLAY On DESCRIPTION
M-10 ALARM Off Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
26 09:56 Outputs   HH:MM Screen
for RO’sTitle Left/Right Arrow
displayed
09:56   HH:MM Screen Title
Current Left/Right Arrow
26 Relays Outputs Status RO position & names
RO position & names
status of RO
Current status of RO
Relays
M-9 FAN5 Status
On Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog
M-9
M-10 FAN5
ALARM PG On Off PG Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
M-10 ALARM
Selecting the Page Using Left/Right
OffDown option provides the following: arrow allows
for RO’s displayeduser to view all data
for RO’s displayed
Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
ACTUAL DISPLAY Switch to AO’s Page up
DESCRIPTION Page down

26 09:56 Outputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Relays Status RO position & names Current status of RO
M-9 FAN5 On
M-10 ALARM Off Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
for RO’s displayed
Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
51
 10.5. Inputs
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL
Selecting
10.5. the ‘Inputs’ option provides the following:
Inputs
10.5. Inputs
10.5. ACTUAL
InputsDISPLAY DESCRIPTION
15.5. Inputs
Selecting the ‘Inputs’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Inputs’ option provides the following:
SelectingSelecting the option
the ‘Inputs’ ‘Inputs’provides
option provides the following:
the following:
09:56 Inputs
ACTUAL DISPLAY   HH:MM Screen Title
DESCRIPTION Left/Right Arrow
Sensor ACTUALValue DISPLAY SI position & names DESCRIPTION
Current status of SI
M-1 SUCT1 ACTUAL 66.0P DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
M-2 DISC1 Inputs121.3P  
09:56 Using
HH:MM Left/Right arrowScreenallows
Titleuser to view all Arrow
Left/Right data
09:56
M-3 AMPS1 Inputs 0.0A
Sensor  
Value
HH:MM for
SI position & names Screen
SI’s TitleCurrent Left/Right
displayed status of SIArrow
M-4Sensor
SUCTTMP1 Value
  SI position & names
HH:MM Screen Title Current Left/Right
status of SIArrow
09:56
M-1 SUCT1Inputs 52.3F
66.0P
M-1 SUCT1
Sensor
M-2 DISC1 PG  66.0P
Value
121.3PPG SI position
Using & names
Left/Right Page
arrow up Current
allows userstatus
to Page
of
view down
SI
all data
M-2
M-1 DISC1 121.3P Using Left/Right for arrow allows user to view all data
M-3 SUCT1
AMPS1 66.0P
0.0A SI’s displayed
M-3
M-2 AMPS1
M-4 DISC1
SUCTTMP1 0.0A
121.3P
52.3F Using Left/Right for arrowSI’s displayed
allows user to view all data
M-4 AMPS1
M-3 SUCTTMP1 52.3F
0.0A for SI’s
Page displayed
up Page down
PG PG Page up Page down
M-4 SUCTTMP1 PG 52.3F PG
PGPage Down
Selecting the 
PGoption provides the following: Page up Page down

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:
Selecting the Page Down option provides the
Selecting the Page Down option provides the following: following:
09:56 Selecting
Inputsthe Page Down
ACTUAL DISPLAY   option provides
HH:MM the following: Screen Title
DESCRIPTION Left/Right Arrow
Sensor ACTUAL DISPLAY Value SI position & names DESCRIPTION
Current status of SI
M-1 SUCT1 ACTUAL 44.0P Man
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
M-2 DISC1 Inputs
09:56 222.0P Man  Using Left/Right arrow
HH:MM Screenallows
Title user Left/Right
to view allArrow
data
09:56
M-3 AMPS1 Inputs98.0A
Sensor  
Man
Value
HH:MM
SI position & names Screen
for SI’s Title
Current Left/Right
displayed status of SI Arrow
M-4Sensor
SUCTTMP1 Value
  SI position & names
HH:MM Current Left/Right
Screen Title status of SI Arrow
09:56
M-1 SUCT1Inputs33.0F
44.0PMan
Man
M-1 SUCT1
Sensor
M-2 DISC1 44.0P Man
Value
222.0P Man Switch
SI to
Using AO’s
position & names
Left/Right Page
arrow up Current
allows status
user Page
of SI
to view downdata
all
M-2 DISC1 Using Left/Right forarrow allows user to view all data
Anlog
M-1 AMPS1 PG 222.0P
M-3 SUCT1 44.0P Man
98.0APG 
Man
Man SI’s displayed
M-3
M-2 AMPS1
M-4 DISC1
SUCTTMP1 222.0P98.0A Man
33.0F Man
Man Using Left/Right for SI’s
arrow displayed
allows user to view all data
M-4 AMPS1
M-3 SUCTTMP1 33.0F Man
98.0A Man Switch to AO’s forPage
SI’supdisplayed Page down
M-4 SUCTTMP1 PG 33.0F Man Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG
Anlog PG PG Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
AnlogSelecting the
PGPage DownPGoption provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Selecting
Selecting the Page thethe Page
Down Down
option option provides
provides the following:
the following:
Selecting Page Down option provides the following:
09:56 Selecting
Inputs the Page Down
  option provides
HH:MM the following: Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
ACTUAL DISPLAY SI position & names DESCRIPTION
Sensor ACTUAL Value
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION status of SI
Current
M-5 DISCTMP1 177.0F Man
M-6 MOTFLT1 ACTUAL DISPLAY
NO Man DESCRIPTION
Using Left/Right arrow allows user to view all data
09:56 Inputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
09:56
M-7Sensor Inputs NO
PUMPDWN1  
Man
Value
HH:MM
SI position & names Screen
for SI’s Title
Current Left/Right
displayed status of SIArrow
M-8Sensor
COMPOIL1
09:56 Value
200.0P
Inputs 
Man  SI position & names
HH:MM Current Left/Right
Screen Title status of SIArrow
M-5 DISCTMP1 177.0F Man
M-5 DISCTMP1
Sensor
M-6 MOTFLT1 177.0F
NO Man
ValueMan Switch to Left/Right
SIUsing AO’s & namesarrow
position Page up Current
allows status
user Page
of SI
to view downdata
all
M-6
Anlog MOTFLT1 NO
PG 177.0F Man
 Using Left/Right forarrow allows user to view all data
M-5
M-7 DISCTMP1
PUMPDWN1 NOPG
Man
Man SI’s displayed
M-7
M-6 PUMPDWN1
MOTFLT1
M-8 COMPOIL1 200.0P Man
NO
NO Man
Man Using Left/Right forarrowSI’s displayed
allows user to view all data
M-8 PUMPDWN1
M-7 COMPOIL1 200.0P Man
NO Man Switch to AO’s forPage
SI’sup
displayed Page down
M-8 COMPOIL1 PG200.0P Man Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG
Anlog PG PG Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG PG

SelectingSelecting
the Pagethe
Down
Pageoption
Down provides the following:
option provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:
Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:
09:56Selecting the Page Down
Inputs  option provides the following:
HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
ACTUAL DISPLAY
Sensor ACTUAL Value SI DESCRIPTION
position & names Current status of SI
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
M-9 ENT ACTUAL
LIQ 35.0F Man
DISPLAY
M-10LEV LIQ
09:56 Inputs 25.0F Man
  Using Left/Right DESCRIPTION
HH:MM arrow allows user to view all data
Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
09:56
Sensor Inputs88.0F
M-11AMBIENT  
Man
Value
HH:MM
SI position & names Screen
for SI’s Title
Current Left/Right
displayed status of SIArrow
Sensor
M-12FLOW
09:56 Value
ON
Inputs 35.0F 
Man  SI position & names
HH:MM Current Left/Right
Screen Title status of SIArrow
M-9 ENT LIQ Man
M-9 ENT LIQ
Sensor
M-10LEV LIQ 35.0F
Value
25.0F Man
Man Switch to Left/Right
SIUsing AO’s & namesarrow
position Page up Current
allows status
user Page
of SI
to view downdata
all
M-10LEV
Anlog LIQPG 35.0F
25.0F Man
 Using Left/Right forarrow allows user to view all data
M-9 ENT LIQ
M-11AMBIENT 88.0FPGMan
Man SI’s displayed
M-11AMBIENT
M-10LEV
M-12FLOWLIQ 88.0F
ON Man
25.0F Man
Man Using Left/Right forarrowSI’s displayed
allows user to view all data
M-12FLOW
M-11AMBIENT ON Man
88.0F Man Switch to AO’s for SI’s displayed
Page up Page down
M-12FLOW ON Man Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG PG
Anlog PG PG Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG PG

52
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL
Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:
Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:
Selecting
Selecting the PagetheDown
Page option
Down option provides the following:
ACTUAL DISPLAY provides the following: DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
09:56 Inputs   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
09:56
Sensor Inputs  
Value HH:MM Screen Title
SI position & names Left/Right
Current status of SIArrow
09:56
Sensor Inputs
M-13RUN/STOP  
Value
RUN Man HH:MM Screen
SI position & names Title Left/Right
Current status of SIArrow
Sensor
M-13RUN/STOP Value
RUN SI position
Using & names
Left/Right Current
arrow allows userstatus of all
to view SI data
M-14PHASLOSS NO Man
M-13RUN/STOP
M-14PHASLOSS RUN Man
NO Man Using Left/Right for
arrow allows
SI’s user to view all data
displayed
M-14PHASLOSS NO Man Using Left/Right for
arrow
SI’sallows user to view all data
displayed
Switch to AO’s for SI’s
Page updisplayed Page down
Anlog PG PG Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Switch to AO’s Page up Page down
Anlog PG PG
Anlog PG PG

15.6. 10.6. Alarms

Alarms
10.6. Alarms
10.6. Alarms
Selecting the ‘Alarms’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Alarms’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Alarms’ option provides the following:
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
09:56 ACTUAL
09:56 AlarmsDISPLAY
Alarms HH:MM
HH:MM
DESCRIPTION
Screen Title
Screen Title
09:56 Alarms
1 LOST RO COMM #2 HH:MM
1st
st Alarm # Screen Title
Alarm Title Unit Number
09:56
1 LOST
JULAlarms
RO04COMM12:09:16
#2 HH:MM
1st Alarm # Alarm Screen
Alarm
Date Title
Title
& Time of st
1st Unit Number
alarm
1 LOST
2 LOST RO04
JUL
RO COMM12:09:16
COMM #2
#1 1nd
2
st Alarm
nd Alarm #
# Alarm Alarm
Date Titleof
& Time
Alarm Title 1st Unit Number
alarm
Unit Number
JUL
2 LOST
JUL 04
RO04 12:09:16
COMM12:09:16
#1 2nd Alarm # Alarm
Alarm Date & Time
Alarm
Date & Time of
Titleof 1nd
2
st
nd alarm
Unit Number
alarm
2 LOST RO04
JUL COMM12:09:16
#1 2nd Alarm # Alarm Alarm
Date Titleof
& Time 2nd
nd Unit Number
alarm
JUL 04 12:09:16 Alarm Date & Time
Page up of 2 alarm Page down
PG PG
PG PG Page up Page down
PG PG Page up Page down

15.7. 10.7. Graphs

Graphs
10.7. Graphs
10.7. Graphs
Selecting the ‘Alarms’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Alarms’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Alarms’ option provides the following:
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
14:48 Graphs SUCT1 HH:MM Screen Title Sensor Name
14:48 Graphs SUCT1 HH:MM Screen Title Sensor Name
14:48
70 Graphs SUCT1 HH:MM
The graph has Screen
the lastTitle Sensor with
25 samples Name an appropriate
70 The graph
scale to has theitlast
allow to fit25 samples with an appropriate
on the display. Using the
70
65 The graph has theitlast 25 samples with an or
appropriate
65 scale
up/downto arrows
allow willto plot
fit on the display.
sensors before Using the
after.
65
60 scale to arrows
up/down allowSwitched
it to plot
will fit
to on the display.
sensors
RO’s before or
Switches Using the
toafter.
AO’s
60 up/down arrows will plot
Switched to RO’ssensors before or after.
Switches to AO’s
60 14:22:13
14:22:13 14:36:15 14:48:46
14:36:15 14:48:46 Switched to RO’s Switches to AO’s
14:22:13 RO
14:36:15 14:48:46AO
14:22:13 RO
14:36:15 14:48:46AO
RO AO
10.8. Set points
15.8. 10.8. Set points
Set points
10.8. Set points
Selecting the ‘Set points’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Set points’ option provides the following:
Selecting the ‘Set points’ option provides the following:
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
09:56 Setpoints
Name  
Value HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow
Name
1 LEV TARGET Value
27.0P The Level Target is the targeted value. The Control Zone + creates the top
Name
1 CTRL
2 LEV TARGET
ZONE+ Value
27.0P
0.5P The
of theLevel Target
control is The
zone. the targeted value.–creates
Control Zone The Control Zone +ofcreates
the bottom the top
the control
1 CTRL
2
3 LEV TARGET
ZONE+
ZONE- 27.0P
0.5P
0.0P The
of theLevel Target
control is The
zone. the targeted
Control value.–creates
Zone The Control
the Zone +ofcreates
bottom the the top
control
2 SUPERHT
CTRL ZONE-
ZONE+ 0.5P zone. The
of the control Superheat
zone. TheTarget is
Control the target
Zone value
–creates the
the system
bottom will
of themaintain.
control
3
9 CTRL TARG 0.0P
12.5F zone. The Superheat Target is the target value the system will maintain.
3 SUPERHT
9 CTRL ZONE-
TARG 0.0P
12.5F Use
zone.left/right arrows to Target
The Superheat see time andtarget
is the type. value the system will maintain.
PG
9 SUPERHT TARG PG
12.5F Use left/right arrows to see time and type.up
Page Page down
PG PG Use left/right arrows to see time and type.up
Page Page down
PG PG Page up Page down

53
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Selecting
Selectingthethe
Page Down
Page option
Down provides
option thethe
provides following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUALDISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56Setpoints
Setpoints    HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
ScreenTitleTitle Left/Right
Left/RightArrow Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value This set point defines the width of each control zone.
This set point defines the width of each control zone. EXVEXV load
loadadjustments
adjustments
1010SPRHT
SPRHTZONE+- 2.5F
1111EXV
ZONE+- 2.5F areare
made
madein response
in responseto to
a load
a loador or
unload
unload slide adjustment.
slide adjustment. EXVEXVfine
fine
EXVLOAD
LOADADJ
ADJ 0.5%
0.5% adjustments are made when in the 1 st
zone
st above or below the control
1212EXV
EXV FINEADJ
FINE ADJ 0.1%
0.1% adjustments are made when in the 1 zone above or below the control
1313EXV
EXVCOURSE
COURSE 0.5%
0.5% zone. The
zone. TheEXVEXVcourse adjustment
course adjustment is made
is madewhen
whenin the 2nd2zone
in the nd above
zone aboveor or
 
PGPG  
PGPG below the control zone. Use left/right arrows to see time and type.
below the control zone. Use left/right arrows to see time and type.
.. Page
Pageupup Page
Pagedown down

Selecting
Selectingthethe
Page Down
Page option
Down provides
option thethe
provides following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUALDISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56Setpoints
Setpoints    HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
ScreenTitleTitle Left/Right
Left/RightArrow Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value EXV Load Division: Max slide% – min slide% /
EXV Load Division: Max slide% – min slide% / Max Max vlv%
vlv%- min vlv%)
- min +1.+1.
vlv%)
1414EXV
EXVLOAD
LOADDIV 33
1515EXV
DIV Minimum valve position allowed when modulating the expansion
Minimum valve position allowed when modulating the expansion valve. valve.
EXVMIN
MIN% % 10.0%
10.0%
1616EXV
EXVMAX
MAX% % 50.0%
50.0%
Maximum
Maximum position allowed
position allowedwhen
whenmodulating thethe
modulating expansion
expansion valve.Low
valve. Low
1717LOLOSUPERHEAT
SUPERHEAT 2.0F
2.0F Superheat value before alarm is generated. Use
Superheat value before alarm is generated. Use left/right left/right arrows
arrowsto to
 
PGPG  
PGPG see time and type.
see time and type.
.. Page
Pageupup Page
Pagedowndown

Selecting
Selectingthethe
Page Down
Page option
Down provides
option thethe
provides following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUALDISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56Setpoints
Setpoints    HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
ScreenTitle
Title Left/Right
Left/RightArrow
Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value
1818LOSUCTPSIDLY
LOSUCTPSIDLY 30s
30s Delay in seconds
Delay in secondswhen
whenin Low
in LowSuction
SuctionPSI Opening.
PSI Opening.Delay
Delayin seconds
in seconds
1919EXV
EXVDELAY
DELAY 60s
60s between valve adjustments. Time in seconds to to
hold thethe
valve at at
thethe
start
2020EXV between valve adjustments. Time in seconds hold valve start
EXVSTRT
STRTTME
TME 5s5s %%setset
point when the compressor starts. Delay in seconds to power
point when the compressor starts. Delay in seconds to power up. up.
2323POWERUP
POWERUPDLAY 30s
DLAY
 
PGPG
30s
 
PGPG Use left/right
Use arrows
left/right to to
arrows see time
see and
time andtype.
type.
Page up
Page up Page
Pagedown down

Selecting
Selectingthethe
Page Down
Page option
Down provides
option thethe
provides following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUALDISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
09:56
09:56Setpoints
Setpoints    HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
ScreenTitle Title Left/Right
Left/RightArrow Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value This
Thisvalue
valueis used
is usedto to
adjust
adjustthethe
speed
speedof of
responding
responding to to
changes
changes in the
in the
2525STEP
STEPSENSIT
SENSIT 11 control
controlalgorithm.
algorithm. Time
Timedelay
delaybefore increasing
before increasing or or
decreasing
decreasingthethe
number
number
2626STEP
STEPDELAY
DELAY 300s
300s of of
refrigeration steps. Maximum negative Rate OfOf Change allowed before
2727MAX refrigeration steps. Maximum negative Rate Change allowed before
MAXROC-
ROC- -0.6P
-0.6P stopping
stopping thetheunit from
unit loading.
from loading.Maximum
Maximum positive
positiveRate
RateOfOf
Change
Change allowed
allowed
2828MAX ROC+ 0.6p
MAX ROC+
 
PGPG
0.6p
 
PGPG before
beforestopping
stopping thethe
unit from
unit fromunloading. Use
unloading. left/right
Use arrows
left/right to to
arrows see time
see time
andandtype.
type. Page
Pageupup Page
Pagedown down

Selecting
Selectingthethe
Page Down
Page option
Down provides
option thethe
provides following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUALDISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
09:56
09:56Setpoints    HH:MM Screen
Name
Setpoints
Value HH:MM ScreenTitleTitle Left/Right
Left/RightArrow Arrow
Name Value Number of seconds between the samples
Number of seconds between the samples used forused for calculating thethe
calculating actual
actual
2929ROC
ROCINTERVAL
INTERVAL 30s
30s Rate OfOf
Change. Maximum slide or or
speed allowed. Minimum slide or or
3030MAX Rate Change. Maximum slide speed allowed. Minimum slide
MAXSLIDE
SLIDE% % 100.0%
100.0% speed allowed. Maximum percentage adjustment change that can bebe
3131MIN
MINSLIDE
SLIDE% % 55.0% speed allowed. Maximum percentage adjustment change that can
55.0% made. Use 54
left/right arrows to see time and type.
3232MAX
MAXADJUST
ADJUST% % 5.0%
5.0% made. Use left/right arrows to see time and type.
 
PGPG  
PGPG
Page
Pageupup Page
Pagedown
down
 25STEP SENSIT 1 control algorithm. Time delay before increasing or decreasing the number
26STEP DELAY 300s of refrigeration steps. Maximum negative Rate Of Change allowed before
27MAX ROC- -0.6P stopping the unit from loading. Maximum positive Rate Of Change allowed
28MAX ROC+ 0.6p
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL PG PG before stopping the unit from unloading. Use left/right arrows to see time
and type. Page up Page down

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Number of seconds between the samples used for calculating the actual
29 ROC INTERVAL 30s Rate Of Change. Maximum slide or speed allowed. Minimum slide or
30 MAX SLIDE % 100.0%
31 MIN SLIDE % 55.0% speed allowed. Maximum percentage adjustment change that can be
32 MAX ADJUST % 5.0% made. Use left/right arrows to see time and type.
PG PG
Page up Page down

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Minimum percentage change that can be made. Allows control of the
33 MIN ADJUST % 2.0% adjustment made to slide wanted percentage. Upper dead band limit to
34 SLIDE SENSIT 1 stop pulsing the slide valve. Lower dead band limit to stop pulsing the slide
35 AMP DB HI 5.0A valve. Use left/right arrows to see time and type.
36 AMP DB LO 3.0A Page up Page down
PG PG

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Length of time to turn on the slide valve load solenoid. Length of time to
37 LOAD PULSE 3 turn on the slide valve unloader solenoid. When the discharge pressure is
38 UNLOAD PULSE 2 above this value; turns on the first stage of the condenser fans. When the
45 CND STG1 ON 200.0P discharge pressure drops below this value turns off the first stage of
46 CND STG1 OFF 170.0P
PG PG condenser fans. Use left/right arrows to see time and type.
Page up Page down

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Differential PSI to turn on the remaining stages of condenser fans.
47 CND DIFF ON 5.0P Differential PSI to turn off the remaining stages of condenser fans.
48 CND DIFF OFF 2.0P Condenser fan will remain on for at least the amount of minutes specified.
49 CND MIN RUN 1m The number of seconds between load or unload pulses. Use left/right
56 PULSE DELAY 4s
PG PG arrows to see time and type.
Page up Page down

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Anti cycle time delay (in seconds) based on when the compressor was
59 ACYC OFF->ON 60s turned off. Suction pressure value for turning off the compressor when in
61 PMP DWN OFF 30.0P the PUMP DOWN state. Maximum time delay (in seconds) that a
62 PMP DWN DLAY 20s compressor can remain in the PUMP DOWN state. Anti cycle time delay
63 ACYC ON->ON 120s
PG PG (in seconds) based on when the compressor was turned on. Use left/right
arrows to see time and type. Page up Page down

Selecting the Page Down option provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY 55 DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

 Name Value Anti cycle time delay (in seconds) based on when the compressor was
59 ACYC OFF->ON 60s turned off. Suction pressure value for turning off the compressor when in
61 PMP DWN OFF 30.0P the PUMP DOWN state. Maximum time delay (in seconds) that a
62 PMP DWN DLAY 20s compressor can remain in the PUMP DOWN state. Anti cycle time delay
63 ACYC ON->ON 120s
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL PG PG (in seconds) based on when the compressor was turned on. Use left/right
arrows to see time and type. Page up Page down

Selectingthe
Selecting thePage
PageDown
Downoption
option provides
provides thethe following:
following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Minimum compressor run time (in minutes) once turned on. Full Load
64 COMP MIN RUN 0m
65 FLA COMP#1 96.4A Amps for the compressor on circuit 1. Percentage of the FLA; it is used to
75 HI AMPS % 115.0% create the high amp draw limit. Percentage of the FLA: it is used to create
76 LO AMPS % 20.0% the low amp draw limit. Use left/right arrows to see time and type. .. .
PG PG . Page up Page down

Selecting
Selecting thethe Page
Page Down
Down option
option provides
provides thethe following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56 Setpoints
Setpoints   HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
Screen Title
Title Left/Right
Left/Right Arrow
Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value System
System checks
checks for for
lowlow suction
suction pressure
pressure for for
eacheach running
running compressor.
compressor.
77 77
LOWLOW SUCTION
SUCTION 20.0P
20.0P Value
Value to take
to take corrective
corrective action
action before
before a low
a low suction
suction pressure
pressure safety
safety occurs.
occurs.
78 78
LO LO SUCT
SUCT UNLD
UNLD 2.0P
2.0P Value
Value to increase
to increase to until
to until thethe compressor
compressor willwill return
return to normal
to normal control.
control.
79 79
LO LO SUCT RELD 4.0P
suction pressure thatthat is unsafe forfor each
SUCT RELD 4.0P System checks
80 80 UNSAFE
UNSAFE SUCT
SUCT 5.0P
5.0P System checks for for
lowlow
suction pressure is unsafe each
PGPG PGPG
running compressor. Use left/right arrows to see
running compressor. Use left/right arrows to see time and type. time and type.
PagePage up up PagePagedowndown

Selecting
Selecting thethe Page
Page Down
Down option
option provides
provides thethe following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56 Setpoints
Setpoints   HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
Screen Title
Title Left/Right
Left/Right Arrow
Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value High
High discharge
discharge pressure
pressure condition
condition for for
eacheach running
running compressor.
compressor. Value
Value to to
81 81
HI HI DISC
DISC PSIPSI 350.0P
350.0P take
take corrective
corrective action
action before
before a high
a high discharge
discharge pressure
pressure safety
safety occurs.
occurs.
82 82
HI HI DISC
DISC UNLD
UNLD 10.0P
10.0P Value
Value to reload
to reload highhigh discharge
discharge pressure.
pressure. Low
Low discharge
discharge pressure
pressure
83 83
HI HI DISC
DISC RELD
RELD 30.0P
30.0P compared
compared to the
to the sensor
sensor reading
reading to this
to this value.
value. UseUse left/right
left/right arrows
arrows to see
to see
85 85
LO LO DISC
DISC PSIPSI 120.0P
120.0P time and type.
PGPG PGPG time and type.
PagePage up up Page
Page downdown

Selecting
Selecting thethe Page
Page Down
Down option
option provides
provides thethe following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56 Setpoints
Setpoints   HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
Screen Title
Title Left/Right
Left/Right Arrow
Arrow
Name
Name Value
Value High
High discharge
discharge temperature
temperature condition
condition for for
eacheach circuit
circuit thatthat
hashas at least
at least oneone
87 87
HI HI DISCH
DISCH TMPTMP 215.0F
215.0F step
step on.on. Value
Value to take
to take corrective
corrective action
action before
before a high
a high discharge
discharge
88 88
HI HI DISC
DISC UNLD
UNLD 2.0F
2.0F temperature
temperature safety
safety occurs.
occurs. Value
Value to reload
to reload highhigh discharge
discharge temperature.
temperature.
89 89
HI HI DISC RELD 5.0F
. .
DISC RELD 5.0F Low differential oil pressure compared to the calculated differential oil value
91 91
LOWLOW OIL
OIL DIFDIF 70.0P
70.0P Low differential oil pressure compared to the calculated differential oil value
PGPG PGPG UseUse left/right
left/right arrows
arrows to see
to see time
time andand type.
type.
Page
Page up up PagePage downdown

Selecting
Selecting
Selecting thethe
the Page
Page
Page Down
Down
Down option
option
option provides
provides
provides the
thethe following:
following:
following:

ACTUAL
ACTUAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION

09:56
09:56 Setpoints
Setpoints   HH:MM
HH:MM Screen
Screen Title
Title Left/Right
Left/Right ArrowArrow
Name
Name Value
Value System
System checks
checks for for
lowlow differential
differential oil pressure
oil pressure compared
compared to the
to the calculated
calculated
92 92 UNSAFE
UNSAFE OIL
OIL 20.0P
20.0P differential
differential oil pressure.
oil pressure. System
System checks
checks for for
highhigh motor
motor temperature
temperature
95 95 MOTOR
MOTOR FAULT
FAULT 0 0 compared
compared to the
to the sensor
sensor reading.
reading. Pressure
Pressure indicating
indicating a dirty
a dirty oil filter
oil filter
97 97 DirtyOilFltr
DirtyOilFltr 50.0P
50.0P (discharge
(discharge minus
minus thethe oil filter
oil filter pressure).
pressure). Time
Time (in (in seconds)
seconds) to hold
to hold before
before
101SAFETY
101SAFETY HOLD
HOLD 90s90s

trying to reload when avoiding a safety. Use left/right arrows
trying to reload when avoiding a safety. Use left/right arrows to see time to see time
PGPG PG 
PG
andand type.
type. PagePage up up Page Pagedown down

Selecting
Selecting thethe Page
Page Down
Down option
option provides
provides thethe 56
following:
following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

 92 UNSAFE OIL 20.0P differential oil pressure. System checks for high motor temperature
95 MOTOR FAULT 0 compared to the sensor reading. Pressure indicating a dirty oil filter
97 DirtyOilFltr 50.0P (discharge minus the oil filter pressure). Time (in seconds) to hold before
101SAFETY HOLD 90s
trying to reload when avoiding a safety. Use left/right arrows to see time
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL PG PG
and type. Page up Page down

Selecting
Selecting thethe Page
Page Down
Down optionprovides
option providesthe
thefollowing:
following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Setpoints   HH:MM Screen Title Left/Right Arrow

Name Value Identifies the lead compressor. Specifies the number of days between
103LEAD COMP 1 rotations. Temperature indicated for freeze protection. Starting % which the
104CMP ROTATION 7D valve will be opened to after the pump down state. Use left/right arrows to
111FREEZE 14.0F see time and type.
113EXV START1% 15.0% Page up Page down
PG PG

10.9. Service Tools

15.9. Service Tools
Selecting
Selecting the the ‘Service
‘Service Tools’
Tools’ option
option providesthe
provides thefollowing:
following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Serv Tools HH:MM Screen Title

1 Netwk Address 0 Highlight choice and press enter to access Sub Menu.
2 System Info 1.View network address press enter. 2.View system info
3 Time/Date (config name, company name, model name) press enter.
4 Display 3.To change the time or date press enter and use the
5 Clr Alarm Hist up/down arrows to adjust. 4.View display settings
Help (contrast, background, backlight) press enter. 5.To
clear the alarm history press enter and save.

Pressing the down arrow provides the following:

ACTUAL DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

09:56 Serv Tools HH:MM Screen Title
6 Clr Point Info Highlight choice and press enter to access Sub Menu.
7 Sensor Diagnostics 6.To clear the point information press enter and save.
7. View sensor values and voltages. Page Up/Down for
more sensors. Press the Back button to return to the
Help Service Tools Main Menu.

57
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 16. Control Status Display

16.1. From the MCS-Connect program

The status of both the CAPACITY CONTROL STATES and CIRCUIT CONTROL STATES can be viewed from
the MCS-Connect program by accessing the CONTROL STATUS key under status screen. The following will be
displayed:
Use your arrow keys to access all information (Active circuits will be displayed)

16.1.1 Information displayed:

Chiller information:
• CAPACITY CONTROL STATE - State of chiller
• TIME - time in that state, if the state is UNIT IN POWER UP time will decrement to zero
• STEPS WANTED - Number of steps wanted on
• ACTUAL - actual steps turned on
• STEP DELAY – value that is counted down. The sensitivity and where the control temperature
is in relationship to the control zone will determine the speed of the count down. When the value
decrements to zero, the system will determine if a change in the system’s capacity is required.
• Def. Approach/Def Time – defrost trigger is the value in of the associated approach set point, if
evaporator pressure is below this value the timer will begin to decrement. When it reaches 0, a
hot gas defrost will be required.
• RATE OF CHANGE – Rate of Change of control temperature, the speed at which the control
temperature is changing.
• Control On– this will indicated either VOLTAGE or TEMPERATURE.
• Wanted % – if a screw compressor the value will be the slide wanted.

Circuit information (all active circuits will be displayed):

• # - circuit number.
• STATE -compressor state.
• TIME - time in that state, if the state is CMP ANTICYCLE time will decrement to zero.
• PSI DIFF - Oil differential pressure. Oil differential pressure is calculated as follows:
Hitachi, Hartford, & Hanbell screw compressor:
Discharge minus Suction Pressure;

58
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Carlyle screw compressor:

Discharge minus Oil Pressure;
NOT a screw and Not a Bitzer screw compressor:
Oil minus Suction Pressure
All Others
Oil minus Discharge Pressure.
• Sat Evap – this is the saturation evaporation temperaturer.
• Evap Trigger / Time – this is the evaporation pressure / time will decrement when the evaporation
pressure is less than the trigger pressure value.
• EvapSuperheat – Calculated evaporation SUPERHEAT.
• FLA % – reflexes the amp draw of the compressor.
• Forced Delay (145) Defrost – this is the time remaining until the next defrost is forced to begin.
• LEAD - Yes indicates the lead compressor.
LLS State (status of the liquid line & tandem liquid line if they exist)
• LLS State- Status of the LLS.
• Time- Time in the state indicated.
Circuit SUPERHEAT– information (all active circuits will be displayed):
• Suction Temp – Circuit number and current valve of the Suction Temperature, if available.
• Saturated Suction– Calculated Suction Saturated Temperature, if available. The Suction Pressure is
converted into temperature based upon the type of refrigerant (R22, R134a, R407c, And R410a are
supported).
• Suction Superheat – Calculated Suction SUPERHEAT, only available if both the Suction Temperature
and the Suction Pressure are used. The calculation is Suction Temperature minus the Suction Saturated
Temperature.
• Disc Temp – Discharge Temperature, if available.
• Saturated Discharge– Calculated Discharge Saturated Temperature, if available. The
Discharge Pressure is converted into temperature based upon the type of refrigerant (R22, R134a, R407c,
And R410a are supported).
• Disc Superheat – Calculated Discharge SUPERHEAT, only available if both the Discharge Temperature
and the Discharge Pressure are used. The calculation is Discharge Temperature minus the Discharge
Saturated Temperature.
• Refr Type is –Indicates the type of refrigerant in the system.
• Defrost Min Delay (130) –when the circuit is not in defrost this timer will be decremented. It is the minimum
time between defrost cycles based upon set point #130

59
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 17. Magnum Control States

We should consider the Magnum controller as a state computer, that is, decisions are made based upon
set points, timers and sensor inputs, the controller moves from one state to another. The controller will
change states to ensure the proper functioning of the chiller package.

As we review the various states, we must remember that a chiller package consists of a number of dif-
ferent parts or functions: the compressors and their related items such as unloaders hot gas bypasses,
etc.; evaporator; and condensing functions. To control these functions the states will be divided into
three sections:

• Capacity Control States

• Circuit Control States
• Condenser Control States

This information can be viewed form the Magnum’s display, see section Magnum Displays or from MCS-
Connect, see section MCS-Connect Status.

60
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 18. Capacity Control States (number)

The Magnum controller is a state computer, that is, decisions are made based upon Set points, timers and Sensor
Inputs, the controller moves from on state to another. The controller will change states to ensure the proper functioning
of the chiller package.
As we review the various states, we must remember that a chiller package consists of a number of different parts or
functions: the compressors and their related items such as unloaders, hot gas bypasses, etc.; evaporator, and condens-
ing functions.
Both the Capacity Control States and Compressor Control States are displayed in the Status screens on the Keypad
Display. To view the state of the chiller, select the Status option from the menu on the Keypad. You can then view the
entire status by using the page up / down function keys. The information can also be accessed through MCS-Connect
under status screen by clicking on the CONTROL STATUS button.
Unit Control State (number)
Note: All User Logic points can now access the Unit Control State. The value accessed is the number listed in
parenthesis in the following headings.

18.1. UNIT IN POWER UP (0)

This state is entered when the Magnum is powered up or the system has been reset. The system will remain in
this state for the time specified in Set point #23 “POWER DELAY” or for 60 seconds if not active. In this state all
Relay Outputs are turned off. This time delay is to insure the microprocessor has stable power before starting the
algorithm.

18.2. POWER LOSS DELAY (1)

This state is entered when the Magnum has been powered off for greater than 2 hours. In this state all points
(RO’s) are turned off. The system will remain in this state for the time specified in set point #23, PWR OFF DLAY.

18.3. NO RUN- I/O LOST (2)

This state will be entered whenever the Magnum loses communications with any of the I/O boards that are con-
nected through the MCS I/O network. When this state is entered the Magnum will generate an MCS I/O offline
alarm, which identifies which I/O is offline and a lost I/O shutdown alarm which locks out the unit. Once locked
out, if there are ten consecutive successful I/O reads the Magnum will reset and attempt to run. When this occurs
a “LOST I/O RESTART” will be generated. Or, the lockout-reset key can be pressed to reset the Magnum, after
the lost I/O has been corrected. This will generate a “LOCKOUT RESET.” In this state all RO’s except ALARM are
turned OFF.

18.4. UNIT IN LOCKOUT (3)

This state is entered whenever a critical situation is encountered that could cause harm to the chiller package.
Items such as freeze protect and emergency stop will force the system into this state. Lockouts can be reset
without authorization from the keypad or MCS-Connect program; however if the lockout condition has not been
corrected, the system will again be forced into the LOCKOUT state. In this state, all RO’s except ALARM and OIL
HEATER (for screws with an oil pump) are turned OFF and placed in the “LOCKOUT” state. Note: If the Lockout
Reset is pressed more than the programmed allowable number of times in one day the unit cannot be reset during
the current day except through MCS-Connect and
A Factory authorization is requires. This number is selected from a drop down menu under the Setup Information button,
with a range of 2 to12.

61
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

18.5. UNIT IS OFF (4)

This state is entered when the system has finished a STARTUP, DISABLE, LOCKOUT, or NO RUN- I/O LOST
state. The chiller is now ready to move into an active state to meet the capacity required.

18.6. UNIT IS HOLDING (5)

This state is entered when one of three conditions exists:
1) The control sensor reading is being maintained with in the control zone.
2) Control sensor reading is above the control zone but the Rate of Change is less than the value in the
(MAX ROC-, #27) set point. This indicates that the temperature is decreasing toward the target at an ac-
ceptable speed. Therefore, no additional cooling is needed at this time.
3) The temperature is below the control zone but the Rate of Change is greater than the (MAX ROC+, #28)
set point. This indicates that the temperature is increasing toward the target. Therefore, no reduction in cooling
is needed at this time.
This state indicates that there is no need to add or subtract the cooling capacity of the chiller package. This state
will change as capacity requirement changes.

18.7. UNIT UNLOADING (6)

This state is entered when less capacity is required. Every second an adjustment is made to the step delay.
When the delay reaches zero, the counter ‘steps wanted’ on is decreased by 1.

18.8. UNIT IS LOADING (7)

This state is entered when more capacity is required. Every second an adjustment is made to the step delay.
When the delay reaches zero, the counter ‘steps wanted on’ is increased by 1.

18.9. CMP IN STARTU (8)

When a fixed step compressor with variable speed (VFD) capabilities is started this stage is entered. The Relay
Status for the compressor point must be setup with the ‘VFD Start %’ and the ‘VFD Start % Time’. If these fields
are not valid then this step is bypassed. The compressor will remain in this state for the time specified and the
associated analog output (VFD) will be set to the start %.

18.10. RUN/STOP SW OFF (9)

This state is entered when the run stop switch is off, in the stop position. When the chiller is in this state, the indi-
vidual compressor states if active are moved to the CMP IS OFF state through the normal states. One capacity
STEP will be moved per second.

18.11. SCHEDULED OFF (10)

This state is entered when the schedule is calling for the package to be off. When the chiller is in this state, the
individual circuit states if active are moved to the CMP IS OFF state through the normal states. One capacity STEP
will be moved per second.

18.12. OFF- NO FLOW(s) (11)

This state is entered when the evaporator flow switch is off. When the chiller is in this state, the individual circuit
states if active are moved to the CMP IS OFF state through the normal states. One capacity STEP will be moved
per second. If the NO FLOW Set point is active and set to Lockout the chiller will lockout on no flow.

62
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

18.13. NOT USED (12)

18.14. NOT USED (13)

18.15. NOT USED (14)

18.16. UNIT IS UNLOADED (15)

This state is entered when all of the systems available capacity steps are off. The package is providing no cooling
capacity, as none is required. The system is ready to react to cooling needs.

18.17. UNIT IS LOADED (16)

This state is entered when all of the systems available capacity steps are on. The package is providing the maxi-
mum amount of cooling capacity.

18.18. NOT USED (17)

18.19. NOT USED (18)

18.20. NOT USED (19)

18.21. DEF-STARTING CMP (20) (only used if not Air Normal Defrost)
This state is entered when a capacity steps has indicated a need for defrosting. The system will remain in this
state until the defrosting circuits discharge pressure is less than the value in set point #141, DEF Min PSI or the
time in this state is greater than the value in set point #142.

18.22. DEFROSTING COILS (21) (only used if not Air Normal Defrost)
This state is entered when the defrosting circuits discharge pressure is less than the value in set point #139, DEF
Min PSI. The system will remain in this state until the defrosting function has been completed.

18.23. LO TEMP UNLOAD (22)

The following two conditions can cause this state to be entered and the system to begin unloading this compressor:
1) The evaporator temperature is within 1.5F or .8C of the value of set point #95, FREEZE PROTECT.
2) The refrigerant temperature is less than the value of set point #155, LOW REFR TEMP and this set point is
active.

63
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

Chapter - 19. Circuit Control States (number)

Note: All User Logic points can now access the Unit Control State. The value accessed is the number listed in
parenthesis in the following headings.

The action of the circuit control states actually result in more, less or no change in the amount of cooling capac-
ity. The CAPACITY CONTROL STATES dictate how the individual circuits move within their states.

19.1. LOST IO LOCKED (0)

This state is entered when the Capacity Control State is NO RUN- I/O LOST. Resetting the lockout will move the
compressor to the CMP OFF/READY state.

19.2. CMP LOCKED OUT (1)

This state is entered when the Capacity Control State is in UNIT IN LOCKOUT or a safety trip has occurred for
this compressor (Examples of safety Set points include #69 “LOW SUCTION” and #79 “HI DISC PSI”). Lockouts
can be reset without authorization from the keypad or MCS-Connect program, however if the condition caus-
ing the lockout has not been corrected, the compressor will again be forced into the LOCKOUT State.

19.3. SWITCHED OFF (2)

This state is entered when the compressor is off due to the pump down switch being on or the compressor flow
switch being off. In this state the compressor and all related points, including the liquid line solenoid are off. The
compressor will not leave this state unless the pump down switch is turned off. If the pump down switch is turned
off, the compressor state will be changed to the CMP OFF/READY state.

19.4. UNLD & PMPDWN (3)

This state is entered whenever the pump down switch has been turned on or if this circuit is no longer wanted on.
The compressor is on and the liquid line solenoid is closed. This state is active until the suction pressure reaches
the value in the set point #62, PMP DWN OFF or the time has exceeded the value in the set point# 63, PMP DWN
DELY. The circuit will then move to the ANTICYC State.

19.5. CMP ANTICYCE (4)

This state is entered when the UNLD and PMPDWN state has been completed. The compressor will stay in this
state with all compressor points off for the period of time contained in set point #59 “ACYC OFF-> ON” or set point
#60 “ACYC ON -> ON”, whichever is longer. The compressor will then move to the OFF state. NOTE: “ACYC ON
-> ON” can be used to set the maximum number of compressor starts per hour.

19.6. CMP OFF/READY (5)

This state is entered when no capacity is required from this compressor, or the last state was CMP ANTICYCE,
LOST I/O LOCKED, or SWITCHED OFF. In this state the compressor is ready to provide capacity if needed. The
compressor will remain in this state for a minimum of 60 seconds.

19.7. NOT USED (6)

19.8. NOT USED (7)

64
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

19.9. CMP UNLOADED (8)

For infinite step compressors, this state is when the slide is fully unloaded (indicated by unloaded input or after the
unloader is pulsed 30 seconds with no change). For fixed step compressors, this state is when the compressor is
on and fully unloaded. In this state the compressor is supplying its minimum cooling capacity.

19.10. CMP UNLD STEP1 (9)

This state only applies for fixed step capacity compressors with a Hot Gas Bypass solenoid. In this state the Hot
Gas Bypass solenoid is off and all unloaders in the compressor are on.

19.11. CMP UNLD STEP2 (10)

This state only applies for fixed step compressors with two unloaders. This state occurs when the Hot Gas Bypass
solenoid, if present, is off, the first unloader solenoid is off, and the second unloader solenoid is on.

19.12. CMP IS HOLDING (11)

This state only applies for variable step compressors. In this state, the required refrigeration capacity of system
is being met; no movement of the slide valve is required.

19.13. CMP IS LOADING (12)

For variable step compressors, this state occurs when the load solenoid is being pulsed to increase the capacity
of the compressor. The duration of the pulse is specified in the set point #35 “LOAD PULSE” and the frequency of
the pulse is determined by set point #165 “PULSE DELAY”. The set point “PULSE DELAY” should be a value of
between 3 and 5 seconds to allow the amp sensor to reflect the change.

19.14. CMP IS UNLDING (13)

For variable step compressors, this state is when the unload solenoid is being pulsed to reduce the capacity of
the compressor. The duration of the pulse is specified in setpoint #36 “UNLOAD PULSE” and the frequency of
the pulse is determined by setpoint #165 “PULSE DELAY”. The setpoint “PULSE DELAY” should be a value of
between 3 and 5 seconds to allow the refrigerant to enter the chamber slowly enough to not cause oil foaming.
19.15. CMP IS RUNNING (14)
For fixed capacity compressors only, this state occurs when the compressor is fully loaded. In this state, the com-
pressor is providing the maximum amount of cooling capacity.

19.16. FAST UNLOADING (15)

For screw compressors only, this state is entered when the compressor is turned on. All load solenoids will be
turned off and all unload solenoids will be turned on to ensure the screw is fully unloaded. If an oil pump is includ-
ed in the system it will be turned on during this state. The system will remain in this state for 30-seconds, the state
will then be changed to HOLDING.

19.17. LO SUCT UNLOAD (16)

Refer to Set points #69 “LOW SUCTION”; #70 “LO SUCT UNLD”; and #71 “LO SUCT RELD”.
For variable step compressors only. The capacity is being unloaded due to low suction pressure. The compressor will
stay in this state until the suction pressure is above Setpoint #79 “LO SUCT RELD”. The system will then move to
the LO SUCT HOLD state.

65
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

19.18. LO SUCT HOLD (17)

Refer to setpoints #69 “LOW SUCTION”; #70 “LO SUCT UNLD”; and #71 “LO SUCT RELD”.
Fixed step compressors - This state is entered when a fully loaded compressor that has more than one step is un-
loading due to low suction pressure. One step of capacity is turned off. The compressor will remain in this state for
a minimum of five minutes before returning to the LOADED state if the low suction condition has been corrected.
Variable Step Compressors - Capacity is being held due to low suction pressure. Once the suction pressure re-
turns to a normal operating level the compressor will return to its normal running state.

19.19. HI DISC UNLOAD (18)

Refer to setpoints #73 ”HI DISC PSI”; #74 “HI DISC UNLD”; #75 “HI DISC RELD”; #79 “HI DISC TMP”; #80 “HI
DISC UNLD”; and #81 “HI DISC RELD”.
Fixed Step Compressors - This state is entered when a fully loaded compressor that has more than one step is
unloading due to high discharge pressure or temperature. One step of capacity will be turned off. The compressor will re-
main in this state for a minimum of five minutes before returning to the LOADED state if the high discharge condition
has been corrected.
Variable Step Compressors - Capacity is being held due to high discharge temperature or pressure. Once the
discharge returns to normal operating levels the compressor will return to its normal running state.

19.20. HI DISC HOLD (19)

Refer to Setpoints #73 ”HI DISC PSI”; #74 “HI DISC UNLD”; #75 “HI DISC RELD”; #79 “HI DISC TMP”; #880 “HI
DISC UNLD”; and #81 “HI DISC RELD”.
Fixed Step Compressors–This state is entered when a fully loaded compressor that has more than one step is
unloading due to high discharge pressure or temperature. One step of capacity will be turned off. The compressor will
remain in this state for a minimum of five minutes before returning to the LOADED state if the high discharge condi-
tion has been corrected.
Variable Step Compressors–Capacity is being held due to high discharge temperature or pressure. Once the dis-
charge returns to normal operating levels the compressor will return to its normal running state.

19.21. SAFETY TRIPPED (20)

This state is entered when a safety trips but a lockout is not to be generated. An alarm is generated but the
system will restart after the delay specified in the corresponding set point. If a second trip occurs within the time
specified in the set point, the circuit will be placed in the CMP LOCK EDOUT State.

19.22. NOT USED (21)

19.23. HI AMP UNLDING (22)

For variable step compressors this state is entered when the amp draw is greater than the respective FLA setpoint
plus half the value in setpoint #191, “HI AMPS”. This action is to prevent a high amps safety trip from occurring.
Once the amp draw has been reduced the system state will change to HI AMP HOLD.

19.24. HI AMP HOLD (23)

Not used with infinite step compressors. This state is entered when a fully loaded circuit, that has more than one
step, has encountered a dangerously high AMP draw. Refer to set points numbers 171 through 190 for FLA per
circuit and 191 HI AMPS %. In this state, one step of cooling capacity will be turned off. The circuit will remain
in this state for a minimum of five minutes before returning to the LOADED State if the dangerous condition has
been corrected

66
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

19.25. HI DIS TMP HLD (24)

Refer to setpoints #79 “HI DISC TMP”; #80 “HI DISC UNLD”; and #81 “HI DISC RELD”.
This state is entered when a fully loaded compressor that has more than one step encounters a high discharge
temperature. One step of capacity will be turned off. The compressor will then remain in this state for a minimum of five
minutes before returning to the LOADED state if the high discharge temperature has returned to normal.

19.26. NOT USED (25)

19.27. NOT USED (26)

19.28. HI WATER HOLD (27)

When the compressor is running and set point #78 “HI RETURN TEMP” is active, the Magnum will check for high
water temperature. If the control temperature is greater than set point #86 for the time specified the Magnum
will place the compressor in this state. The system will be unable to load when in this state.

19.29. DEFROST EVAP1 (28) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)
The circuit’s first evaporator is being defrosted. Refer to the section on circuit defrost and to the sequence of op-
erations for the various software versions.

19.30. DRIP DOWN #1 (29) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)
The circuit’s first evaporator has completed its defrost cycle and moisture is allowed to drip off the coils before
cooling begins. Refer to the section on circuit defrost and to the sequence of operations for the various software
versions.

19.31. DEFROSTR EVAP2 (30) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)
The circuit’s second evaporator is being defrosted. Refer to the section on circuit defrost and to the sequence of
operations for the various software versions.

19.32. DRIP DOWN #2 (31) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)
The circuit’s second evaporator has completed its defrost cycle and moisture is allowed to drip off the coils before
cooling begins. Refer to the section on circuit defrost and to the sequence of operations for the various software
versions.

19.33. DEF-START CMP (32) (not Rotating Coil Air Defrost Only)
Once one of the circuits is ready for defrost: The circuit that is ready to begin a defrost cycle it will then be placed
in the DEF-PUMP DOWN state. If the circuit is not ready for a defrost cycle it will be turned off.

19.34. DEF-PUMP DOWN (33)

This state is only used when the defrost type is either Electric or Time Off. In this state the compressor will be on
and the liquid line solenoid will be closed. The circuit will remain in this state until the suction pressure is less than
the value in set point #62 PMP DWN OFF or the time in set point #63, PMP DWN DELY has been exceeded. The
circuit will then be placed in the DEFROST COIL state.
In this state the compressor will be on and the liquid line solenoid will be closed. The circuit will remain in this
state until the suction pressure is less than the value in set point #142 DEF PDWN PSI or the time in set point
#141, DEF PDWN TIM has been exceeded. The circuit will then be placed in the DEFROST COIL state.

67
MCS-REFRIG MANUAL

19.35. DEFROST COILS (34)

This state is only used when the defrost type is either Electric or Time Off. In this state the compressor will be
off and the liquid line solenoid will be closed. If the defrost type is Electric, the electric defrost relay output will be
turned on. The circuit will remain in this state until evaporator temperature is greater than the value in set point
indicated by the approach temperature or the time has been exceeded. The circuit will then be placed in the DRIP
DOWN #1 state.
In this state the compressor will be off and the liquid line solenoid will be closed. The circuit will remain in this
state until evaporator temperature is greater than the value in set point indicated by the approach temperature
or the time has been exceeded or the discharge pressure is less than the value in set point #144, DEF TERMIN P.
If this is not the last circuit running, the circuit will be turned off. If it is the last circuit running, the circuit will remain
on and the system will return to normal operations.

19.36. DEF-AIR NORMAL (35)

This state is entered when the circuit entering defrost is in the time frame specified by setpoint #245.

19.37. NOT USED (36)

19.38. CMP OFF/D-DOWN (37)

This state is entered after the hot gas defrost cycle has been completed include the pump down period. The
system will remain in this state for time specified in set point #132, this will complete the defrosting cycle. The
state will then be changed to CMP OFF/READY.

19.39. CMP OFF/DefAIR (38) (only used if Air Defrost)

This state will be displayed for the compressor that has entered into an Air Defrost, after the time in setpoint #245
has expired.

19.40. DEFcmp&val OFF (39)

When the system is in a reverse cycle defrost, this state shuts off both the compressor and reversing valve for the
time in value of set point #165.

19.41. LO TEMP HOLD (40)

Reload from the “LO TMP UNLOAD” occurs when the evaporator temperature is 3.0° F (1.6C) above Setpoint
#95, FREEZE PROTECT and the refrigerant temperature sensor, if present, is greater than Setpoint #155 “LO
REF TMP” plus twice the value Setpoint #156 “LO REF TMP”. Until this temperature is reached the system will
remain in the LO TMP HOLD State.

19.42. HI TEMP UNLOAD (41)

The system will unload if Setpoint #107 “HP OVERHEAT” is active and the leaving temperature is greater than the
value in Setpoint #107 minus 1.5°F (.8°C). The compressor will then move to the HI TEMP HOLD state when the
temperature drops below the value in Setpoint #107 minus 3.0°F (1.6°C).

19.43. HI TEMP HOLD (42)

Refer to HI TEMP UNLOAD state. The compressor will state in this state until the temperature drops below Set-
point #107 minus 3.0°F (1.6°C) the compressor will return to a normal state.

68
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

Chapter - 20. Condenser Control Logic

Many condenser types are supported by the Magnum controller including individual condensers per circuit,
shared condensers between multiple circuits, and common condensers for all circuits. The type of condenser
plus the number of Relay Outputs needed are specified in MCS-Config.

New Condenser types

with firmware 17.62Y

The Magnum supports the following Condenser Types:

■■ No Condenser
No condenser specified.

■■ RO Step Common
The highest discharge pressure from any compressor on the system will be the controlling pressure.
■■ RO Step Individual
Each compressor will have one or more condenser Relay Outputs associated with it. The discharge pres-
sure on that compressor will be the control pressure for its own condenser.
■■ RO Step Combined
The highest discharge pressure from either of the compressors on the shared circuits will be the control-
ling pressure (circuits 1 and 2 are shared, circuits 3 and 4 are shared, circuits 5 and 6 are shared, and
circuits 7 and 8 are shared).
■■ Modulating Common
The highest discharge pressure from any compressor on the system will be the controlling pressure. The
Analog Output is modulated based on the Rate of Change of the controlling discharge pressure. It can
also be controlled on a selected sensor input.
■■ Modulating Step Common
This type of condenser has a common fan bank for the system. The control will be on the systems highest
discharge pressure. The Relay Outputs are also supported along with an Analog Output.
■■ Modulating Individual
Each compressor will have its own condenser Analog Outputs associated with it. The Analog Output for
each circuit is modulated based on its own discharge pressure Rate of Change. It can also be controlled
on a selected sensor input. You may also select Relay Outputs to be turned ON/OFF while modulating the
Analog Output.

69
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

■■ RO Shared
This type of condenser will take the highest discharge pressure of circuits 1 and 2, then 2 and 3, then 3
and 4, etc. to use as the control discharge pressure. This condenser type does not have the option to
bypass the startup compressor.
■■ Dual V8
This special type of condenser is a common control air condenser with two stages of fans plus a VFD
Fan. Control of the fan speed will be different depending on whether one or two stages are on. All
compressors are in the same fan bank with the highest discharge pressure being the control.
■■ Common VFD Fan with Bypass
Three consecutive Relay Outputs, an Analog Output, and a VFD fault indicator are required to control this
type of condenser. RO’s needed:
1) VFD LOAD–This relay will be ON indicating the fan can be used.
2) VFD BYPS–This relay will be OFF unless a VFD fault has occurred.
3) VFD ENAB–This relay will be ON unless a VFD fault has occurred.
During normal operation, VFD LOAD will be on, VFD BYPS will be off, and VFD ENAB will be on. The
fan will be modulated as required by the condenser or economizer logic. If a fault occurs, all relays will
be turned off and the VFD will be set to 0. The Magnum will wait for the time specified in Setpoint #90
“COND FAULT” before the fan will be run without VFD control if it is needed by the condenser logic
(economizer logic will not function in this condition). Once this time has passed and the condenser
logic calls for the fan, then VFD BYPS will be turned on thereby turning the fan on, however it will NOT be
modulated.
The Magnum can also support a variable speed fan for all three of the air type of condensers. Each
compressor can support a variable speed fan. The variable speed must be on the first Relay Output
associated with that compressor.
Note 1: The discharge temperature must be at least 117° F and the discharge superheat needs to be at
least 20° F to guarantee good oil separation.
Note 2: Condenser staging is critical if the Magnum is to function in different climates. The best option
for air-cooled chillers is to have each fan on its own contactor and a frequency drive on fan 1. This
configuration allows the most optimum control in all weather.
■■ Modulating Step Common
Similar to the Modulating Common type with the addition of relay outputs. The highest discharge pressure
from any compressor on the system will be the controlling pressure. The Analog Output is modulated
based on the Rate of Change of the controlling discharge pressure. It can also be controlled on a selected
sensor input. When the analog output reaches it maximum value and more cooling is required the next
relay will be turned on and the analog output value will be set to its minimum value.
■■ Evap Individual
Evaporative condensers are used to improve the condensers efficiency by spraying water over the
condensing coil from above while air is blown up through the coil from below. Each compressor will have
its own condenser Analog Outputs associated with it. The Analog Output for each circuit is modulated
based on its own discharge pressure Rate of Change. It can also be controlled on a selected sensor
input. You may also select Relay Outputs to be turned ON/OFF while modulating the Analog Output.
■■ Evap Common
Evaporative condensers are used to improve the condensers efficiency by spraying water over the
condensing coil from above while air is blown up through the coil from below .Similar to the Modulating
Common type with the addition of relay outputs. The highest discharge pressure from any compressor on
the system will be the controlling pressure. The Analog Output is modulated based on the Rate of Change
of the controlling discharge pressure. It can also be controlled on a selected sensor input. When the
analog output reaches it maximum value and more cooling is required the next relay will be turned on and
the analog output value will be set to its minimum value.

70
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

■■ RO Adaptive Bank– Air cooled Condenser Fan Control

Used to control the condenser fan relay outputs for a single compressor, multiple compressors on the same
refrigerant circuit, or a bank of condenser fans for multiple refrigerant circuits. If single compressor the
condenser fans are stage on/off based on the compressor discharge pressure. If multiple compressor or
refrigerant circuit, then the high discharge of the running compressors is used to stage condenser fans.
■■ RO Adaptive Common – Air Cooled Condenser Fan Control
Used to control the condenser fan relay outputs for all the refrigerant circuits on the unit. This control logic
finds the high discharge pressure on the running compressors and uses it to stage on/off the condenser
fan relays.
■■ PID MOD Individual
Required software:
Config version 18.01V or later
Connect version 18.31 or later
Firmware 17.62Y (all firmware except LWC MAG and CPM MAG)
Each compressor will have its own condenser Analog Outputs associated with it.
PID control will turn an analog output into a stand alone PID controlled output. This output will have a
controlling sensor that modulates the AO to a maintain target. This logic will run all the time.

■■ PID Step Common

Required software:
Config version 18.01V or later
Connect version 18.31 or later
Firmware 17.62Y (all firmware except LWC MAG and CPM MAG)
This type of condenser has a common fan bank for the system. The control will be on the systems highest
discharge pressure.
PID control will turn an analog output into a stand alone PID controlled output. This output will have a
controlling sensor that modulates the AO to a maintain target. This logic will run all the time.

20.1. Condenser Introduction

20.1.1 RO Step Condenser Cut In – Out Logic
The Cut In and Cut Out Logic setpoints are as follows:

Setpoint #40 “CND STG1 ON” - Condenser stage 1 Cut In (ON).

Setpoint #41 “CND STG1 OFF” - Condenser stage 1 Cut Out (OFF).
Setpoint #42 “CND DIFF ON“- Cut In differential for additional condenser stages for (ON).

Setpoint #43 “CND DIFF OFF” - Cut Out differential for additional condenser stages (OFF). Setpoint #44
“CND MIN RUN” - Minimum run time for a condenser stage

Condenser Relay Outputs will be turned on based upon the value in setpoint #40 “CND STG1 ON”. When
discharge pressure reaches this value, the first condenser Relay Output is turned on. If additional con-
denser outputs are present, they will be turned on when the pressure exceeds the cut in value plus the
value contained in setpoint #42 “CND DIFF ON“. When discharge pressure falls, the condenser outputs
will be turned off based upon the setpoint #41 “CND STG1 OFF” plus the value contained in setpoint #43
“CND DIFF OFF”. The first step will be turned off when discharge pressure falls below setpoint #41 “CND
STG1 OFF”.

Example:
Setpoint #40 “CND STG1 ON” = 200 psi
Setpoint #41 “CND STG1 OFF” = 170 psi
Setpoint #42 “CND DIFF ON” = 20 psi
Setpoint #43 “CND DIFF OFF” = 5 psi

71
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

COND FAN 1 ON at 200 psi (Discharge)

COND FAN 1 OFF at 170 psi
COND FAN 2 ON at 220 psi (200 + 20)
COND FAN 2 OFF at 175 psi (175 + 5)

COND FAN 3 ON at 240 psi (220 + 20)

COND FAN 3 OFF at 180 psi (175 + 5)

20.1.2 RO Step Condenser with Variable Speed Fan

The Setpoints for variable speed fan control are as follows:
Setpoint #54 “CND MIN SPD” - Minimum variable speed allowed.
Setpoint #55 “CND MAX SPD“ - Maximum variable speed allowed.
The purpose of the variable speed fan is to reduce the cycling of the fans by adjusting the speed of the vari-
able fan point. This control works in conjunction with the Cut In and Cut Out logic of each compressor. When
a fan is turned on, the speed of the variable point for that compressor is set to maximum allowed percentage.
As the discharge pressure falls, the fan speed is adjusted proportionally. When the minimum is reached the
fan will turn off.
20.1.2.1. Condenser Control
The Condenser Control logic is run with every pass of the algorithm.

20.1.2.2. Common Terms

Condenser Fan Bank:

Indicates which circuits share common condenser fans or are individually controlled.
Suction Group:
Indicates which circuits share a common suction line.
Control Condenser On:
(Disc PSI)–The Magnum will check for the compressor with the highest discharge and use that as the
controlling pressure.

20.1.2.3. Control Discharge Pressure Calculation

If control is based on discharge pressure, all types of condensers will operate in the following sequence. For
compressors within the same fan bank or suction group, the compressor with the highest discharge pressure
will be held as the control pressure, regardless if the compressors are running or not.
The newly started compressor will have the controlling discharge pressure even if it is not the highest value in
order for it to build pressure (startup mode is defined as the compressor has been on for less than 5 minutes
and its discharge pressure is less than the value of Setpoint #45 “CND STG1 ON” minus the value of Setpoint
#47 “CND DIFF ON”). However, this logic will be overruled if another compressor sharing the same condenser
approaches the high discharge safety (if discharge pressure rises above calculated value of Setpoint #81 “HI
DISC PSI” minus #83 “HI DISC RELOAD”)
If control is based on Other SI, the value of that sensor is always used as the control discharge pressure.

72
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

Control Condenser On:

„„ Disc PSI–The Magnum will check for the compressor with the highest discharge and use that as the
controlling pressure.
„„ Disc/Suct Ratio - Control logic will be the same as Disc PSI control except the ratio of the discharge
pressure to the suction pressure will be used as the control. Note changes to related set points will be
required.
„„ Diff PSI(Disc-Suct) -
HVAC FIRMWARE VERSION 17.34 and up
MCS-CONFIG VERSION 18.01G and up
MCS-CONNECT VERSION 18.20.06 and up
NEW LOGIC ADDED WITH THESE UPDATES

This logic will utilize the calculated differential pressure (Discharge Pressure/Suction Pressure) to
control the condenser.

73
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

All condenser setpoints will remain the same for both modulating and step control.
When Diff PSI is selected the below information will become editable in the config program.
Here you will be able to customize adjustments to the differential target based on discharge superheat
being low or high.
In this config example if discharge superheat falls below 20 degrees for 30 seconds then the differential target
will be increased by 5 psi. If 30 more seconds goes by and the discharge superheat has not increased above
20 degrees then we will do another increase of 5 psi to the target. The adjustments will continue all the way
up to a maximum of 40 psi defined by our “Max Adjustment Allowed” box. Once discharge superheat is
between the high and low settings the adjustment will hold where it’s currently at.

The logic works the same exact way when the discharge superheat rises above 40 degrees only we will
decrease the differential every 30 seconds by 5 psi all the way back down to a 0 psi adjustment. The adjust-
ments cannot go to a negative value.
MCS-CONNECT SCREEN ADJUSTMENT - Diff PSI(Disc-Suct
„„ Other SI - Control logic will be the same as Disc PSI control except the value of the sensor that is
specified will be used as the control. Note changes to related set points will be required. When this
option is selected a “Other Control Sensor” window will enable the sensor to be selected.

To use ‘Other SI’, the condenser type must be a ‘COMMON TYPE’

The Magnum will not check for the compressor with the highest discharge pressure but will always
use the value of the sensor that is selected as the control.

20.1.2.4. Condenser Reset

If Diff PSI(Disc-Suct) is selected as your condenser type in the MCS Config program
you’ll have a “Condenser Adjustment” box in your system status window through
MCS Connect. Here you will see the adjustments made to your condenser target
based on the discharge superheat. If you’re at least “Factory” authorized you can
double click the value in the condenser adjustment box, it will open a window as
you see in the example which will allow you to make changes to how the adjust-
ments are made.

If sensor is specified its value will be added to the condenser control set points #45, #46 and #50.

20.1.2.5. Condenser Low Ambient

When a compressor is started its discharge pressure will be used as the controlling pressure for five minutes,
enabling that compressor to build head pressure. However, if Setpoint #204 COND LOW AMB is active and
there is an ambient temperature sensor reading less than this Setpoint, then this compressor’s discharge
pressure will remain in control for an additional time as specified in the “Time (sec)” field.

74
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

20.1.2.6. Condenser Related Setpoints

The following are Condenser related Setpoints:

40 CND STG1 ON When the discharge pressure is above this value, turn on the first stage of the condenser
(Air cooled) fans.
‘Time (sec)’ field: (Applies to compressors with shared condensers) If non-zero, then the
compressor in startup state will not be in sole control of the condenser fans, it will control
off of highest discharge pressure. If zero, then compressor in startup will have sole
condenser control for 5 minutes. This option is selected in in the ‘Newly started Comp
Controls Common Fan Bank’ box in the ‘Condenser Information’ section under the MAG
V8 tab.
41 CND STG1 OFF If stage 1 of condenser capacity is on and the discharge pressure drops below this value,
(RO Type) then turn this stage off.
42 CND DIFF ON Differential pressure added to setpoint #45 to set the threshold at which each additional
(RO Type) stage of condenser capacity will turn on.
43 CND DIFF OFF Differential pressure added to setpoint #46 to set the threshold at which each additional
(RO Type) stage of condenser capacity will turn off.

CND DELAY If active, this is the time in seconds between adjustments to the water valve. If inactive,
(Modulating Type) then 30 seconds will be used as the delay.
DUAL PSI DELTA Minimum difference in pressure before the second stage of condenser capacity can be
(Dual V8) started.
44 CND MIN RUN Once a condenser stage has been turned on, it will remain on for at least the amount of
(Modulating Type) minutes specified in this setpoint.
DUAL TIME DELAY Time delay once the pressure difference in setpoint #48 has been reached before the
(Dual V8) second condenser stage can be started.
CND START % If active, then the value is the starting % for the AO when the RO that is tied to it turns
(Modulating Type) on. The value in the “Time (SEC)” cell is the AO starting stage. If no Relays are used
when CMP starts set value.
45 NOT USED
**
46 CND PSI TRGT This is the value that the fans will be modulated to. The High and Low zone cells contain
the respective values to form the deadband around the target.
47 CND ADJ DIV Control scaling of the amount the AO is adjusted. The larger the number, the smaller the
(Modulating Type) AO adjustment as the calculated adjustment will be divided by this value.
CND VFD MIN If there is a VFD associated with the condenser, this is the starting minimum speed.
‘Time (sec)’ field: This field contains the condenser stage that must be on before the VFD
is modulated.
48 CND MIN SPD Minimum AO % allowed.
(Modulating Type) If compressor is off, then check the “Time (SEC)” field:
If 0, then the AO % will be set to the value of this Setpoint. If 2 and the run/stop is set to
run, then set the AO % to 100%, else set the AO % to 0%. This option is se¬lected in the
“Default Valve Opening % when Comp. is OFF” box in the condenser information section
in the MAG HVAC screen.

49 CND ROC - (Modu- Maximum negative rate of change allowed. If the rate of change is less than this Set-
lating Type) point, then stop modulating the AO. The absolute value of this Setpoint also serves as
the maximum positive rate of change allowed. If the rate of change is greater than the
absolute value of this Setpoint, then stop modulating the AO.
50 CND MIN SPD Minimum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
(Modulating Type)
CND ADJ MULT Controls scaling of the amount the AO is adjusted. The larger the number the larger the
(Modulating Type) AO adjustment as the adjustment will be multiplied by this value.

75
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

51 CND MAX SPD Maximum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
(RO Type)
CND MIN ADJ The value in this Setpoint is the minimum % the AO will be modulated when a change is
(Modulating Type) made.
52 COND LOW AMB If active, standard condenser control on compressor startup logic will be bypassed when
the ambient temperature is below this value. Normal condenser control will apply, where
the compressor with the highest discharge pressure will control the condenser.
54 COND HI AMB If active, standard condenser control on compressor startup logic will be bypassed when
the ambient temperature is above this value. Normal condenser control will apply, where
the compressor with the highest discharge pressure will control the condenser.
55 COND FAULT If setpoint is active, and an alarm type, if a condenser fault occurs an alarm message will
be generated. If an lockout type, and a condenser fault occurs, then all compressors as-
sociated with this fault will be locked off.
For Common VFD Fan Condensers with Bypass: Time in seconds before the bypass
can be used when a fault has occurred.
56 COND PHASE If this set point is active and a digital input has been selected for the Condenser Phase
FAULT 1 Failure 1 when the compressor is on this digital input will be checked. If the digital input
is on for the Time specified for this set point, the circuit will enter a safety state and an
alarm will be generated indicating which circuit has the failure.
57 COND PHASE If this set point is active and a digital input has been selected for the Condenser Phase
FAULT 2 Failure 2 when the compressor is on this digital input will be checked. If the digital input
is on for the Time specified for this set point, the circuit will enter a safety state and an
alarm will be generated indicating which circuit has the failure.

20.2. CONDENSER TYPES

20.2.1 No Condenser
This option indicates there is no condenser associated with this unit.

20.2.2 RO Step Common

The RO Step Common of condenser has one bank of fans. Make sure that all compressors in the Circuit
Base point to the same common fan bank. The above example does not have a Fan Analog Output and there
are three stages of fans starting with CND FAN 1 relay. All stages must be consecutive Relay Outputs.
For example:

Setpoint # Name Value

40 CND STG1 ON 200.0P

76
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

41 CND STG2 OFF 170.0P

42 CND DIFF ON 15.0P
48 CND DIFF OFF 5.0P

Discharge control pressure is 200.0 P, CND FAN 1, first condenser stage will be turned on.
If control pressure is equal to or greater than 215.0 P then the second stage will be turned on. (200.0 + (15.0 *
1))
If control pressure is equal to or greater than 230.0 P then the third stage will be turned on. (200.0 + (15.0 *
2))
Discharge control pressure is above 230.0 P; all three condenser stages are on.

When the control pressure drops below 180.0P the third condenser stage will be turned off. (170.0 + (5.0 * 2))
When the control pressure drops below 175.0P the second condenser stage will be turned off. (170.0 + (5.0 *
1))
When the control pressure drops below 170.0P the first condenser stage will be turned off. (170.0)

Condenser Faults
This example has no condenser faults. If used, and any one of the digital inputs are ON for the time specified
in Setpoint #90 if active, then the unit will be locked out and an alarm message will be generated.

20.2.3 RO Step Common with a Fan AO and Condenser Faults

The above example is the same as the previous example with the addition of a Fan AO and two condenser
faults.
Fan AO Control (same for all types of air condenser control)
Two more Setpoints than the previous example are needed to control the speed of the fan:

Setpoint # Name Value

50 CND MIN SPD 20.0%
51 CND MAX SPD 100.0%

77
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

CND FAN 1 will be turned on when the control pressure is equal to or greater than 200.0, same as in previ-
ous example. At this point the Fan AO speed will be set to its maximum value, Setpoint #55. If the pressure
changes between 170.0 and 214.9 the fan speed will also be modulated proportionally between its maximum
and minimum settings. If the pressure is at 185.0 the fan speed will be set to 61.2%. If the pressure is at
190.0 the fan speed will increase to 75.0%. This will provide precision control in maintaining optimum dis-
charge pressure.

If the pressure increases to 215.0 the condenser’s second stage will be turned on and the fan speed will also
be at 100.0%. If the pressure changes between 175.0 and 229.9 the fan speed will also be modulated propor-
tionally between its maximum and minimum settings.

If the pressure increases to 230.0 the condenser’s third stage will be turned on and the fan speed will also be
at 100.0%. If the pressure changes between 180.0 and 229.9 the fan speed will also be modulated propor-
tionally between its maximum and minimum settings. If the pressure is at 230.0 and above the fan speed will
be at 100.0%.
As the pressure decreases toward the Cut Out point the fan speed will decrease toward its minimum setting.
Once a stage is turned off, the fan speed will be set to 100.0% and again it will be modulated based upon the
pressure.

Condenser Faults
This example has two condenser faults. They must be consecutive digital input types starting with FAN FLT
1. If either of these digital inputs are ON for the time specified in Setpoint #90 if active, then the unit will be
locked out and an alarm message will be generated.

20.2.4 RO Step Individual

The RO Step Individual has a bank of fans for each compressor. The number and location of the fan are
specified under the Circuit Base screen.

# of Cond ROs –Total number of Relay Outputs of each compressor, in this example there are 3. The number
of fans in each compressor does not have to be the same.
Starting Condenser RO – The starting condenser Relay Output. All the Relay Outputs specified for each cir-
cuit must follow consecutively to this point. In this example CND FAN 1 is the starting Relay Output for circuit
1 and the other 2 fans follow consecutively in the RO screen.

78
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

Condenser Fan AO–If a condenser fan AO was specified in this cell it would function as described in the
example in section 7.74.3.6 RO Step Common with a Fan AO and Condenser Faults. There is no condenser
fan AO in this example.
Starting Condenser Fault–If there were condenser faults specified in this cell they would function as de-
scribed in the example in section 7.74.3.6 RO Step Common with a Fan AO and Condenser Faults. There are
no condenser faults in this example.
# Cond Faults – Total number of Condenser Faults.
Cond Fan Bank – In this type of condenser all compressors should have a different fan bank.
Each compressor fan bank is controlled individually. The discharge pressure for each compressor is used to
control condenser logic.

20.2.5 RO Step Combined

The RO Step Combined has a bank of fans that are shared by two consecutive circuits. The number and
location of the fans are specified in the Circuit Base screen. This is similar to the RO Step Individual set up
except only every other compressor has a condenser fans associated with it.

Circuit 1 and 2 will share the same fan bank specified in the ‘Cond Fan Bank’ cell. Circuit 3 and 4 will also
share the same fan bank specified. The highest discharge pressure between the two compressors on each
respective circuit will be used as the control pressure for their fan bank.
Condenser Faults
If any of these digital inputs are ON for the time specified in Setpoint #90 if active, then both compressors
sharing that condenser will we will be locked out and an alarm message will be generated. This example has
no condenser faults.

20.2.6 Modulating
20.2.6.1. Modulating Common

79
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

This type of condenser uses water for condenser cooling. The AO Modulating Valve will modulate the cold wa-
ter valve based upon the system’s highest discharge pressure.
When the delay counts down to zero, an adjustment will be made based on the equation: (Control dis-
charge pressure – Setpoint #50) × Setpoint #54 ÷ Setpoint #51 = Adjustment Value.

When the control discharge pressure is greater than Setpoint #50 plus the value in the high zone: If
the control discharge pressure rate of change is dropping too fast (more than twice the value of Setpoint #53),
then close the valve by the calculated adjustment. If the control discharge pressure rate of change is drop-
ping too slowly (more than the value of Setpoint #53), then open the valve by the calculated adjustment. Else
make no adjustment.

When the control discharge pressure is less than Setpoint #50 minus the value in the low zone: If the
control discharge pressure rate of change is increasing too fast (more than twice the value of Setpoint #53)
and the control discharge pressure is greater than Setpoint #50 minus 20.0 psi (1.3 bar), then close the valve
by the calculated adjustment. If the control discharge pressure rate of change is increasing too slowly (more
than the value of Setpoint #53), then open the valve by the calculated adjustment. Else make no adjustment.
When the control discharge pressure is within the zone: If the control discharge pressure rate of change
is increasing more than the value of Setpoint #53, then close the valve by 1 percent. If the control discharge
pressure change is decreasing more than the value of Setpoint #53, then open the valve by 1 percent.
Modulating Condenser Type: If heat pump and the mode is HEAT (not in defrost) all condenser relays will
be turned on and the VFD set to 100% when compressor is turned on. If the control pressure is above the
control zone, the condenser will unload; if below the control zone the condenser will load else there will be no
change.

20.2.7 Modulating Step Common

When a RO is being used with an AO the AO will key off the RO turning on. The RO will turn on when the
discharge pressure enters the bottom of the CND HI/LO ZONE (Setpoint #193). At that time the AO will move
to its starting % (Setpoint #49). The AO will stay at its starting % until the discharge pressure gets outside the
top of the CND HI/LO ZONE (Setpoint #193). At that point the AO will modulate based on Setpoints #51, #53-
55. Now if there are 2 RO’s tied to the AO and the “AO Starting Stage” is 1 then once the AO gets to 100%
the 2nd RO will be turned on after a delay (value in the ”MIN VFD Opening“ cell for Setpoint #48) and the AO
will be set back to its minimum % (Setpoint #52) and then modulate as described above. Now if the pressure
begins to fall and goes below the CND HI/LO ZONE (Setpoint #193) the AO will modulate. Once the AO gets
to its minimum % (Setpoint #52) the 2nd RO will be turned off after a delay (value in the “MAX VFD Opening”
cell for Setpoint #48) and the AO will be set back to 100% and continue to modulate as needed.

If the “AO Starting Stage” is 2 then when the discharge pressure enters the bottom of the CND HI/LO ZONE
(Setpoint #193) the 1st RO (stage 1) will be turned on. The 2nd RO will turn on once the discharge pressure

80
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

gets outside the Heating Info CND HI/LO ZONE (Setpoint #193) and the delay has been met (value in the
“MIN VFD Opening cell” for Setpoint #48) at that time AO will be set to its starting % (Setpoint #49). If the dis-
charge falls below the CND HI/LO ZONE (Setpoint #193) the AO will begin to modulate. Once the AO reaches
its minimum % (Setpoint #52) it will turn off the associated RO after a delay (value in the “MAX VFD Open-
ing” cell for Setpoint #48). The 1st RO will remain on until the discharge pressure falls below the CND HI/LO
ZONE (Setpoint #193) and the delay has been met (value in the “MAX VFD Opening” cell for Setpoint #48).

20.2.8 Modulating Individual

This type of condenser uses water to provide cooling to the compressors. The AO Modulating Valve will mod-
ulate the cold water based upon this discharge pressure for each circuit. You may also select Relay Outputs
to be turned ON/OFF while modulating the Analog Output.
The individual condensers must be set up in the Circuit Base screen.
The control will be similar to the Modulating Common type, except that the discharge pressure for each circuit
will control its own condenser.

20.2.9 RO Step Shared

The RO Shared condenser has banks of fans that are shared between two consecutive circuits. The number
and location of the fans are specified under the Circuit Base screen. This is similar to the RO Step Individual
set up.
Circuits 1 and 2 will share the fan bank that is specified in the circuit 1 grid in the Circuit Base screen. The
highest discharge pressure of these two compressors will be used to control this bank of fans. Circuits 2 and
3 will share the fan bank that is specified in the circuit 2 grid in the Circuit Base screen. The highest discharge
pressure of these two compressors will be used to control this bank of fans. In a unit with three circuits, circuit
three will not have a fan bank associated with it. It shares circuit 2’s fan bank.

20.2.10 Dual V8
This is a special type of condenser. It is a common circuit control type with two stages of fans and VFD.
The control of the fan speed will be different depending on whether one or two stages are on. All circuits are
checked to calculate the control discharge pressure, and should be in the same fan bank.
If the control discharge pressure is less than Setpoint #45, then both condenser stages are off and the fan
speed is zero.
If the control discharge pressure is greater than Setpoint #45 and less than Setpoint #46 stage 1 will be on.
The fan speed will be equal the value of (Setpoint #55 minus Setpoint #54) divided by (Setpoint #46 minus
Setpoint #45) and then multiplied by (control discharge pressure minus Setpoint #46) plus Setpoint #54.
81
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

If the control discharge pressure increases while in stage 1 above the value of Setpoint #46 plus Setpoint #48
for the time contain in Setpoint #49 stage 2 will be entered. Both relays will be on and the fan speed will be
equal the value of (Setpoint #55 minus Setpoint #54) divided by Setpoint #46 and then multiplied by (control
discharge pressure minus Setpoint #46) plus Setpoint #54.
If the speed of the condenser fan is less than Setpoint #54 it will be set to that value or if the speed of the
condenser fan is greater than Setpoint #55 it will be set to that value.

20.2.11 Common VFD Fan w/Bypass

The Common VFD Fan with a Bypass type of condenser has one fan.
All circuits will use this fan; make sure that all circuits in the Circuit
Base point to the same common fan bank. The above setup shows
that there is one condenser stage. However this type requires the
following three consecutive Relay Outputs to be set up. For example:
This type of condenser requires one condenser fault. If the fault occurs then the VFD will be bypassed and the fan will run
at 100% if needed.

40 CND STG1 ON When the discharge pressure is above this value, turn on the first stage of the condenser fans.
(Air cooled) ‘Time (sec)’ field: (Applies to compressors with shared condensers) If non-zero, then the
compressor in startup state will not be in sole control of the condenser fans, it will control off
of highest discharge pressure. If zero, then compressor in startup will have sole condenser
control for 5 minutes. This option is selected in in the ‘Newly started Comp Controls Common
Fan Bank’ box in the ‘Condenser Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
41 CND STG1 OFF If stage 1 of condenser capacity is on and the discharge pressure drops below this value, then
(RO Type) turn this stage off.
42 CND DIFF ON Differential pressure added to setpoint #45 to set the threshold at which each additional stage
(RO Type) of condenser capacity will turn on.
43 CND MAX SPD (RO Maximum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
Type)
55 COND FAULT If setpoint is active, and an alarm type, if a condenser fault occurs an alarm message will be
generated. If an lockout type, and a condenser fault occurs, then all compressors associated
with this fault will be locked off.
For Common VFD Fan Condensers with Bypass: Time in seconds before the bypass can be
used when a fault has occurred.

Fan control when there is no fault:

The highest discharge pressure of all the compressors is the control value.
The first relay, VFD LOAD, is on and the second relay, VFD BYPASS, is off.
When the control discharge pressure is greater than the value of Setpoint #45, then the third relay (VFD ENABLE)
will be turned on and the VFD will be set to the value of Setpoint #55. If the control discharge pressure decreases
the VFD will be modulated between Setpoints #54 and #55 based upon the control discharge pressure.

82
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

Assume Setpoint values:

40 CND STG1 ON 250 psi

41 CND STG1 OFF 170 psi
48 CND MIN SPD 20%
51 CND MAX SPD 100%

When the discharge control pressure is greater than 250 psi the relay VFD ENABLE will be on and the VFD
on the fan will be set to 100%. If the discharge control pressure drops to 210, then the fan speed will be set to
60%. The discharge control pressure is half of its Cut In and Cut Out range (250 – 170 = 80 / 2 = 40= 170 =
210) therefore, the VFD will be positioned to half of its range (100 –20 = 80 / 2 = 40 + 20 = 60). The VFD will
continue to be modulated in this matter until the discharge control pressure drops below 170. Then the VFD
will be at 0% and relay VFD ENABLE will remain on. If the pressure goes above 170 the VFD will be modu-
lated. For example if the discharge control pressure goes to 190.0 the VFD will be set to 50%.
Fan control when a fault occurs:
If a fault occurs, an alarm message will be generated, relay VFD LOAD will Lock off, relay VFD ENABLE will
be off, the VFD speed will be set to 0% and the bypass, VFD BYPASS, will be enabled if needed after waiting
for 30 seconds, Setpoint #90. Once the fan bypass is enabled and the discharge control pressure goes above
250 psi the bypass will be turned on enabling the fan to run at 100% and it will remain on regardless of the
discharge control pressure.
If the fault resets itself, and is no longer on, the state of VFD LOAD will be set to AUTO, the VFD BYPASS
relay will be turned off and VFD will be enabled to control the fan speed if it is needed.

54 CND MIN SPD 20%

55 CND MAX SPD 100%
90 COND FAULT 30s

When the discharge control pressure is greater than 250 psi the relay VFD ENABLE will be on and the VFD
on the fan will be set to 100%. If the discharge control pressure drops to 210, then the fan speed will be set to
60%. The discharge control pressure is half of its Cut In and Cut Out range (250 – 170 = 80 / 2 = 40= 170 = 210)
therefore, the VFD will be positioned to half of its range (100 –20 = 80 / 2 = 40 + 20 = 60). The VFD will con-
tinue to be modulated in this matter until the discharge control pressure drops below 170. Then the VFD will
be at 0% and relay VFD ENABLE will remain on. If the pressure goes above 170 the VFD will be modulated.
For example if the discharge control pressure goes to 190.0 the VFD will be set to 50%.
Fan control when a fault occurs:
If a fault occurs, an alarm message will be generated, relay VFD LOAD will Lock off, relay VFD ENABLE will
be off, the VFD speed will be set to 0% and the bypass, VFD BYPASS, will be enabled if needed after waiting
for 30 seconds, Setpoint #90. Once the fan bypass is enabled and the discharge control pressure goes above
250 psi the bypass will be turned on enabling the fan to run at 100% and it will remain on regardless of the
discharge control pressure.
If the fault resets itself, and is no longer on, the state of VFD LOAD will be set to AUTO, the VFD BYPASS
relay will be turned off and VFD will be enabled to control the fan speed if it is needed.

83
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

20.2.12 Evaporative types of Condenser Control

Evaporative condensers are used to improve the condensers efficiency by spraying water over the condensing
coil from above while air is blown up through the coil from below.
Two types are support:

- Evap Individual Step, has the same control logic as Modulating Individual.
- Evap Common, has the same control logic as Modulating Common.
In addition to the standard control logic, the evaporative spraying water requires addition input.
Sump Temperature, this sensor will provide the temperature of the sump, area where the spray water is held.
Sump Level Indicator, if set point #249 and a digital input is specified, if it is continually on for the time
greater than the value of the safety time of set point #249 a Sump Low Level alarm will be generated and this
condenser will locked off. If the digital goes to an off state and the condenser is locked off, its state will be
changed to auto and the condenser will be available.
Sump Heater Relay, if this relay and sump temperature sensor is specified and set point #250 is active, this
relay will be turned on and off based upon the values of set point #250.

20.2.12.1. Viewing on MCS-CONNECT and MCS-MAGNUM LCD KEYPAD

20.2.12.1.1. MCS-Connect Display
New columns in the compressor section are being added to the control status window where the
adaptive offset values will be display.

84
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

20.2.12.1.2. MCS-MAGNUM LCD KEYPAD

The adaptive Offset value can be viewed on the MCS-Magnum LCD/Keypad by selecting the “Status” option
from the Menu screen. Once in the “Status” screens page down to the compressor 1st screen showing
Compressor state, state timer, Suct, Disch, OPD, and Motor values. Then press the right arrow button one
time to scroll over to view the AMPS. On the second line below the AMPS heading (not the first line below the
heading which displays the comp amps) the Adaptive Offset value is displayed.

20.2.13 PID MOD Individual

Each compressor will have its own condenser Analog Outputs associated with it. The Analog Output for each
circuit is modulated based on its own discharge pressure Rate of Change. It can also be controlled on a
selected sensor input. You may also select Relay Outputs to be turned ON/OFF while modulating the Analog
Output.
PID control will turn an analog output into a stand alone PID controlled output. This output will have a control-
ling sensor that modulates the AO to a maintain target. This logic will run all the time.

Setpoints used for PID Mod Individual and PID Step Common

40 CND STG1 ON When the discharge pressure is above this value, turn on the first stage of the
(Air cooled) condenser fans.
‘Time (sec)’ field: (Applies to compressors with shared condensers) If non-zero,
then the compressor in startup state will not be in sole control of the condenser
fans, it will control off of highest discharge pressure. If zero, then compressor in
startup will have sole condenser control for 5 minutes. This option is selected in
in the ‘Newly started Comp Controls Common Fan Bank’ box in the ‘Condenser
Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
PID MOD Individual If active, multiplier uses PID condenser control KP (Proportional). Setup as set-
PID Step Comm point.
41 CND STG1 OFF If stage 1 of condenser capacity is on and the discharge pressure drops below
(RO Type) this value, then turn this stage off.
PID MOD Individual If active, uses Multiplier for Ki adjustments (Integral Time Delay). Setup as set-
PID Step Common point
85
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

42 CND DIFF ON Differential pressure added to setpoint #45 to set the threshold at which each ad-
(RO Type) ditional stage of condenser capacity will turn on.
PID MOD Individual If active, uses Multiplier for Kd adjustments, (ROC Time Delay). Setup as Target.
PID Step Common
46 CND PSI TARG Target discharge pressure which the condenser valve will try to maintain by
(Modulating Type) modulating open or closed.
47 CND ADJ DIV Controls scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted (Usually 1). The larger the
(Modulating Type) number the smaller the valve adjustment as the adjustment will be divided by this
value.
CND VFD MIN If there is a VFD associated with the condenser, this is the starting minimum
speed.
‘Time (sec)’ field: This field contains the condenser stage that must be on before
the VFD is modulated.
48 CND MIN SPD Minimum valve opening percentage allowed.
(Modulating Type) If the compressor is off, then check the ‘Time (sec)’ field:
If 0, then set the VFD to the value of this setpoint. If 2 and the run/stop is set
to run, then set the VFD to 100%, else set the VFD to 0%. This option is selected
in in the ‘Default Valve Opening % when Comp. is OFF’ box in the ‘Condenser
Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
49 CND ROC- Maximum negative discharge pressure rate of change allowed. If the rate of
(Modulating Type) change is less than this setpoint, then stop opening the valve. The absolute value
of this setpoint also serves as the maximum positive rate of change allowed. If
the rate of change is greater than the absolute value of this setpoint, then stop
closing the valve.
50 CND MIN SPD Minimum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
(Modulating Type)
CND ADJ MULT Allows scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted. The larger the number the
(Modulating Type) larger the valve adjustment will be multiplied by this value.
51 CND MAX SPD Maximum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
(Modulating Type)

Circuit Base settings

20.2.14 PID Step Common

This type of condenser has a common fan bank for the system. The control will be on the systems highest
discharge pressure. The Relay Outputs are also supported along with an Analog Output.

86
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

PID control will turn an analog output into a stand alone PID controlled output. This output will have a control-
ling sensor that modulates the AO to a maintain target. This logic will run all the time.

20.3. PID CONTROL

• Control Target
SI, AO, or Setpoint used as the target the AO will try to maintain.
• AO
Min to Max value the AO can modulate between.
• Proportional(Kp)
Multiplier for Kp adjustments.
• Integral(Ki)
Multiplier and delay between Ki Adjustments.
• Derivative(Kd)
Multiplier and time in seconds interval to calculate Kd.
• Adjustment Limits
Min and Max adjustments allowed to the AO per adjustment, both negative and positive.
Under the Analog Outputs window in the MCS Connect software. You’ll find an AO PID tab that will show all of
the PID CONTROL AOs and all of the calculated adjustments being made to those Analog Outputs. Here you
will be able to see all three adjustments being made to the PID. This will assist you in any fine tuning required
for the given analog output.

87
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

Chapter - 21. User Logic

Magnum provides the user the ability to customize control logic and calculated values. This is done in MCS-
Config by defining a Sensor Input, Relay Output, or Analog Output as a User Logic type. This type of point can
be adjusted through MCS-Connect by double clicking on the name of a User Logic point (This requires factory
authorization) MCS-Connect identifies a user-defined Relay Output by following the name with (UL), a Sensor
Input’s Sensor Type cell has User Logic as the type and Analog Output’s Type cell has Linear CTRL.

21.1. Operands
Operands are the building blocks of the Magnum User Logic. An operand consists
of two parts: the top cell provides a drop down list to select the types and then a
drop down list to select the item within that type:

TYPE ITEM
Fixed Value Enter a fixed value with decimal place if required.
SI Select Sensor Input
AO Select Analog Output
RO Select Relay Output
Setpoints Select Setpoint, number is also display for ease of selection. All Setpoints are shown,
both active and inactive.
CLOCK Select system clock. The following can be selected: Hours, Minutes, Seconds, Day
of Month, Day of Week (1 = Sunday–7 = Saturday), Year (2 digits), and Month (1-12).
These are current values from the Magnum.
Unit Chiller The following can be selected: FLA %, Steps wanted, Steps ON, Steps available,
steps allowed on, % Load, STATE, Lead Compressor, Mode (cooling or heating), and
Ice Mode Done (if ice mode option selected).
Compressor #1– The following can be selected for any compressor: Compressor State, Suction
Compressor #20 Pressure, Discharge Pressure, Oil Pressure Differential, Motor Amps, Suction Tem-
perature, Discharge Temperature, Oil Temperature, Motor Temperature, EXV Value
Position, Oil Pressure, Refrigerant Temperature, Flow Indicator, Compressor Proof,
Compressor Speed, Oil Float, Refrigerant Level, Condenser Temperature #1, Con-
denser Temperature #2, Fla %, Saturated Suction Temperature, Suction Superheat,
Saturated Discharge Temperature, and Discharge Superheat.
Note all of the above may not exist for an individual configuration.

88
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

The value that is passed to the User Logic depends on the item selected. For example:
 A Relay Output’s value is 0 if it is off and a 1 if it is on.
 A Digital Input’s value is 0 if it is off and a 1 if it is on.
 An Analog Input and Analog Output value are the actual values as displayed, includes the decimal place.
 The unit, compressor, or loop state is a numeric value that will relate to the state names in this manual.
This value is show as the number in parenthesis following the state name.
21.2. Operators
The action cell is located between the operand cells.

The following actions can be selected from a drop down list this will determine the value of the sensor:

Display as: Action

None Second operand is not required.
+(DI OR) Add the value of the two operands if they are analog values; if digital then they will
be OR together. If digital and either operand is on the result will be 1 (ON).
- Operand 1 minus Operand 2.
*(DI AND) Operand 1 times Operand 2 if they are analog values; if digital then they will be
AND together. If digital and both operands are on the result will be 1 (ON) else the
result will be 0 (OFF).
/ Operand 1 divided by Operand 2
High Value Result will be the highest value between Operand 1 and Operand 2
Low Value Result will be the lowest value between Operand 1 and Operand 2
* NOT (DI only) Operand 1 times the opposite value of Operand 2, which must be a digital. If Op-
erand 2 is on value will be 1; therefore its opposite will be 0.
/ NOT (DI only) Operand 1 divided by the opposite value of Operand 2, which must be a digital. If
Operand 2 is on value will be 1; therefore its opposite will be 0.
>= Sensor value will be on (true) if Operand 1 is greater than or equal to Operand 2.
<= Sensor value will be on (true) if Operand 1 is less than or equal to Operand 2.
> NOT (DI only) Sensor value will be on (true) if Operand 1 is greater than the opposite of Oper-
and 2.
< NOT (DI only) Sensor value will be on (true) if Operand 1 is less than the opposite of Operand 2.
== Sensor value will be on (true) if Operand 1 is equal to Operand 2.
NOT = (DI only) Sensor value will be on (true) if the opposite of Operand 1 is equal to Operand 2.

89
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

21.3. User Sensor Input

Selecting the “User Logic” display in the Sensor Information screen of MCS-Connect sets up this type of
sensor. This type of sensor can be either an analog or digital sensor. This is a virtual input; the User Logic
sensor value is a calculated value instead of a hardwired external sensor.

First select the display type and then complete the selections. Note operand #1 and #2 are defined in the Oper-
ands section above and the Action Cell is defined in the drop down menu between.
The window below is from MCS-Config is configuring a User Logic type of sensor. It is a digit type of sensor (ON
or OFF) and it is only looking an Operand 1. If the RO Sump and Doors is ON then the value of this sensor will
be ON.

21.3.1 Examples of User Logic Sensor Inputs

The window below is from MCS-Config is configuring a User Logic type of sensor. If the Sump and Doors Relay
Output is ON, then this sensor will read ON.

90
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

The window below is from MCS-Config building a User Logic type of sensor. It is a pressure type of sensor
(display a value with 1 decimal place). The value of this sensor will be result of Operand 1 minus Operand 2.

21.4. User Relay Output

User Relay Outputs allow customized control of relays based on operand values. The User Relay Output can
calculate a value derived from two operands and combine the calculated value with a greater than and less than
conditions to turn a relay ON/OFF. The User relay is capable of delaying the relay ON condition before turning
the relay ON. Note this relay can be a virtual relay with nothing wired to it or an actual relay that controls an
outbound device.
In the above example the “Store Alarm Msg“ option has been enabled. When this relay goes from an OFF to an
ON state an alarm message will be generated with the name of this relay.

In this example, if either of the operands become true, then this relay will turn ON, an alarm message will be
generated, and the General alarm relay will also turn ON.

91
MCS-MAGNUM V17 - Condenser Control Logic

21.5. User Analog Output

Linear control for Analog Output allows the user to control an analog value based on feedback from a Sensor
Input or other operant control input value. The output can be set to control only when a relay is ON and fixed at
a given output when the relay is OFF. Linear Control will monitor the Control Input and adjust the Analog Output
based the minimum/maximum output values. Linear Control settings are adjustable through MCS-Connect with
Factory level authorization.
In the above example if relay ‘RUN’ is OFF, the value of this Analog Output will be zero. If ON, the value will be
calculated based on the Sensor Input ‘ChilWtrOut’. If ‘ChilWtrOut’s value is 40 (or less) then the Analog Output
will be set to 0%; If 60 (or above) then the Analog Output will be 100%. The output value will vary based on a
linear calculation between these two points.

92
MCS-MAGNUM-EXV

Chapter - 22. Electronic Expansion Valve Control Logic (EXV)

22.1. Electronic Expansion Valve Control Logic (EXV)

The function of the thermostatic expansion valve is to hold a constant evaporator superheat.
The EXV is set up in MCS-Config as follows:

For relay outputs for Type of Step w\ EXV:

‘EXV Start (when Lead)’ cell contains the EXV start percentage if this relay is the lead compressor.
‘EXV Load Adjust %’ cell contains the percentage of adjustment to the EXV when a step is added.
‘EXV Unld Adjust %’ cell contains the percentage of adjustment to the EXV when a step is deleted.

By clicking on the ‘Type of LLS’ cell under the Circuit Base screen, select either EXV&LLS or EXV Only for
EXV control.
By clicking on the ‘EXV Output cell under the Circuit Base screen, select the analog output for controlling this
circuits EXV.
By clicking on the ‘EXV Control’ cell under the Circuit Base screen, the option will cycle between Suction
Superheat, Discharge Superheat, and Refrigerant Level control. By assigning the 2nd EXV for each circuit in
the “Tandem EXV Circuit#” cell.

93
MCS-MAGNUM-EXV

22.1.1 EXV Control States

The EXV Control States show the status of the compressor’s expansion valve. If the compressor has an EXV
it will be displayed under the Status entry.

To view the EXV status through the Keypad LCD, select Status from the Main Menu and then page to the
EXV screen.
EXV States:

LOCKED OUT The compressor is in a Lockout state.

IS CLOSED The associated compressor is OFF and the valve is closed
PRE-PMPDWN The valve has been in a closed state and the system is now requiring the valve action.
IN STARTUP At startup the valve will remain in this state for the time in Setpoint #20. At that time the state will
be changed to holding, at this point the valve control logic will position the valve.
AT 100% This state will be entered when the valve opening reaches 100%.
IS HOLDING Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone and ROC is acceptable.
IS OPENING Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone but rising too fast, ROC less than 1.0.
IS CLOSING Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in the control zone and the rate of change is acceptable,
ROC greater than –0.5.
LOW SPRHT Refer to EXV Logic Chart, force a course valve adjustment.
OPENING 4x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is above control zone.
OPENING 2x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone but rising too fast, the ROC is greater
than 1.0.
LO PSI OPN Refer to EXV Logic Chart, state indicates that a low suction pressure condition exists. The suc-
tion pressure is less than Setpoint #77 “LOW SUCTION” plus twice the value of Setpoint #79
“LOW SUCT RELOAD” and the superheat is greater than Setpoint #9 “SUPERHT TRGT” plus
twice the value of Setpoint #10 “SPRHT ZONE+-“.
CLOSING 2x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in the control zone and the rate of change is acceptable,
the ROC is less than -0.5 and greater than -1.0.
CLOSING 4x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone but falling too fast, ROC less than -1.0.
HI LVL CLS This state indicates that a high refrigerant level. This state is entered if Setpoint #109 “HiRefLev-
el” is active and the superheat is greater than the value of this Setpoint.
IS MOP CLS Refer to EXV Logic Chart. Maximum operating pressure option is active and it is forcing the EXV
to close. In this state the EXV valve’s opening will be reduced.
IS MOP HLD Refer to EXV Logic Chart. Maximum operating pressure option is active and it is forcing the EXV
to hold.

94
MCS-MAGNUM-EXV

22.1.2 EXV Maximum Operating Pressure

Setpoint #199 “MOP TARG PSI” must be active if the suction pressure is to be checked for maximum operat-
ing pressure.
If the suction pressure is above the MOP control zone, then the EXV state will be changed to EXV IS
MOP CLS. The EXV valve opening will be closed by the value in Setpoint #201 with each adjustment. The
‘Time(sec)’ field of Setpoint #201 will be the delay between making adjustments to the EXV valves. The EXV
will remain in this state until the suction pressure drops below the top of the MOP control zone. At this point
the state will be changed to EXV IS MOP HOLD.
In the Compressor SI screen the active compressors information is to be completed as normal, while only the
Suction Pressure and Suction Temperature must be entered for the tandem EXV. The different suction tem-
perature provides separate control for the tandem EXV.

22.1.3 EXV control methods for Step Loading Compressors

Percentage per Step: (Requires Magnum Software HVAC 8.03L and MCS-Config 8.00W or higher)
To control the EXV based on a percentage per step for fixed step compressors, insert the relative load and
unload adjustment percentages in the respective fields in the Relay Output screen. The load and unload adjust-
ments will increase or decrease respectively based on a percentage of the current EXV position (not a fixed
value)
Here is an example of a Hanbell Screw compressor configured to load by fixed steps:

These columns are used for the

compressor when there are multiple
compressors on a single suction circuit,
however, values must be in these fields
for this logic to be in effect.

The logic will work as follows: When the compressor starts the EXV will go to the value in the ‘EXV Start
(when lead)’ column, in this example it is 25%. The EXV will then modulate normally according to the control-
ling superheat or refrigerant level, until the unit is ready to load another step of capacity. Assume the EXV has
stayed at 35% when the second step of capacity is ready to engage (turning off the Hot Gas Bypass). The
EXV adjustment will be 50% (the amount in the ‘EXV Load Adjust’ column of the current EXV position
‘EXV Load Adjust’ column (50%) × current EXV position (35%) = EXV adjustment (17.5%)
50% × 35% = 17.5%
Current EXV position (35%) + EXV adjustment (17.5%) = New EXV position (42.5%)
35% +17.5% = 42.5%
Therefore the final EXV valve position would be 42.5%
This same calculation will be repeated every time a new stage of capacity is turned on. Conversely, when
the unit is unloading, the EXV adjustment will be subtracted from the current EXV position for every step that
turns off. Assume the EXV is at 40% and the compressor is at 100% and is ready to unload a step (turning on
Unload 75% solenoid).
‘EXV Unld Adjust’ column (30%)× current EXV position (40%)= EXV adjustment (12%) 30% × 40% = 12%
Current EXV position (40%)–EXV adjustment (12%) = New EXV position (28%) 40%–12% = 28%
Therefore the final EXV valve position would be 28%
The values given in the example are only start points. You will need to adjust the values for your system.
The idea is to jump the EXV position so that the superheat would still be above the target slightly, and then
the EXV control logic would then adjust the value to achieve the target superheat. We do not want to open
the EXV valve too much when loading or close the valve too much when unloading so we do not cause low
superheat or liquid flooding to the compressor.
95
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

Chapter - 23. EXV Control SSH, SSH2

MCS has released two new superheat control systems in addition to its existing EXV Superheat Control Systems.

23.1. Fast Suction Superheat (Fast SSH)

Released with firmware 17.26-B.hex with the following objectives:
„„ Reduce the number of set points required. (SP 65 through 72 were eliminated)
„„ Provide only one control zone.
„„ Anytime the superheat moves outside this zone to recovery within two minutes or less.
Provide option to dynamically calculate the EXV starting position

23.2. Fast Suction Superheat 2 (Fast SSH2)

Released with firmware 17.37D1.hex with the following objectives:
„„ Provide MCS Default set points for all EXV controls types.
„„ Improve on self learning EXV Valve starting position.
„„ Add an extended SH ROC to allow finer decisions and reduce valve movement.
„„ Add explicit states for Fast SSH and Fast SSH2.

23.3. Selecting Fast SSH or Fast SSH2 in MCS-Config

In Fast SSH & Fast SSH2 only Set Points 9 through 20 are used to control the EXV valve. Select Type of
Control in Relay Output Information Screen. In the RO screen, from the drop down window in ‘Type’ you
select either ‘Step w \ EXV’ or ‘Screw w \ EXV’

23.4. Circuit Base

In the Circuit Base screen you need to select the Analog Output for the EXV.

96
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

Next in the Circuit Base screen you need to select ‘Fast SSH‘ or ‘Fast SSH2’ from the Evaporator EXV Control
section drop down menu.

With the release of Fast SSH2 MCS has released a new MCS-Config to support the new functions. The new
MCS-Config provides a new tab, ‘EXV Control’, where you define your system. This then allows MCS-Config
to provide MCS Default Set Point Values for you. The figure below shows the Current ‘Circuit Base’ tab and
the new ‘EXV Control’ tab.

If you enter data in the EXV portion of the Circuit Base tab or in the EXV Control tab it is carried through to the
other tab.

23.4.1 Selecting the ‘EXV Control’ tab you are prompted with the following:
Based on your selections will dictate the set points for compressor control. The subcooler set points are only
displayed if a subcooler id present.

23.4.2 Selection Options

Superheat Control Superheat Control Config Creation

based on ? method type ? or reset to MCS Defaults

Evaporator Type being Functions Effecting Superheat control.

controlled ? Some require set points to be active

97
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

NOTE: Once you have clicked on the boxes for your setup, be sure to click on ‘Set Values to Default’.

Selection
Option 

Compressor
EXV Results


This will set the values to the default for ‘Control Parameter, Heat Exchanger Type and the Control Method.
Make note that clicking in the ‘Target Modifier’ require that some set points must be active.

23.4.3 Compressor EXV Results

„„ Control on ‘Suction Superheat’

„„ Evaporator Type ‘Plate HX’
„„ Control Method ‘Fast SSH2’
„„ MCS Default ‘Selected’
„„ Degrees F or C are automatic

With this release of MCS-Config MCS has developed Default

Set Points for all EXV Types

98
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

23.4.4 MCS EXV Factory Default Set Point

23.4.4.1. Fast SSH2, Suction Superheat, Plate HX

23.4.4.2. Fast SSH2, Suction Superheat, DX Coil

23.4.4.3. Fast SSH, Suction Superheat, DX Barrel

(Samples of Fast SSH & Fast SSH2 most often used)

23.4.4.4. Fast SSH2, Discharge Superheat, DX Barrel

99
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

23.4.4.5. Fast SSH, Suction Superheat, DX Barrel

23.4.4.6. Suct Spht, Suction Superheat, DX Barrel

23.5. Set Point Descriptions (Fast SSH & Fast SSH2)

Fast SSH set points Available in MCS release 17.26-B and later
Fast SSH2 set points Available in MCS release 17.41 and later

SP # Name Description
9 EXV Target (Value Field) – This is the superheat target the system will make adjustments to the Electronic
Expansion Valve to maintain.

(Time Field) – In Fast SSH when in low suction psi this is the number of seconds the suction psi
must be increasing before the systems stops adjusting the valve.
(Time Field) - In Fast SSH2 it is the number of seconds to calculate the extended slope. When
in low suction, adjustments are stopped when the suction pressure slope is positive for
1 second.
10 EXV Fast Zone ((Value Field) – The system makes adjustments to the EXV Valve percentage to maintain
the superheat within this range.

(Time Field) – The Time Field is not used.

11 EXV Adjustment (Value Field) – The opening adjustment that is made to the EXV current valve % when
made when a the circuit changes to the loading state or the closing adjustment that is made when the
modulating circuit changes to the unloading state. When in the MOP hold state, only closing adjust-
compressor’s ments are allowed.
capacity changes
(Time Field) – When > zero it is used to increase the hold time.
12 Super Heat adjust (Value Field) – This value is used to multiply times the calculated value of superheat
multiplier target – current superheat target value. (The difference from where we want to be verses
where we are)

(Time Field) – The maximum different between two EXV’s on the same circuit allowed
once out of startup and under control.

100
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

13 Rate of Change (Value Field) - This value is used to multiply times the calculated value of current su-
adjust multiplier perheat – the superheat value one second ago. (The slope of the current superheat)

Time Field) – If set point type = ‘Time’ and Time Field is ≥ 2 and ≤ 100 this is the
adjustment multiplier for when the system is in Low Suction. It takes the base valve
adjustment of 0.5% and multiplies it with this value. Adjustments stop when the suc-
tion psi starts too increase. (See set point 9 time field for additional information.) If
the conditions are not met then a value of 0.5 is used. (Delay between adjustments is
specified in the value field of SP 17.)
14 Limit of Adjustment (Value Field) – In FSH this value limits the adjustment while the superheat is < then the
Fast Zone times two. In FSH2 this value is the maximum limit of the adjustment.

(Time Field) - In FSH this value is the limit of adjustment when the superheat > then
two times the Fast Zone. Remember in the value field of this set point you are typically
using a value of 0.2 to 0.5. In the time field a value of 7 is equivalent to 0.7.
(Time Field) - In FSH2 this field is not used.
15 Minimum EXV Valve (Value Field) – The minimum position of the valve. Usually 3%. Will need to be larger if
% hot gas is on system.

(Time Field) - The adjustment multiplier for when the system is in Low Superheat.
16 Maximum EXV Valve (Value Field) – The maximum position of the valve allowed. Usually 100%. Sometimes
% used if valve is oversized.

(Time Field) – Not Used

17 Low Superheat (Value Field) – If the superheat falls below this value and stays below for longer than
the number of seconds specified in the Time Field, of this set point, the system will enter
a safety, generate an alarm and shut off this compressor then restart if required. If this
specifies a lockout then it will follow the lockout rules. In FSH and FSH2 the system will
take corrective action to correct this potential problem.
(Time Field) – Timer for this set point as described.
18 Low Psi Delay (Value Field) – The value specifies the number of seconds between valve adjustments,
(for Low Suction) trying to correct this situation. Adjustments will continue until the slope
of the suction pressure starts to increase.

(Time Field) – This value specifies the number of seconds delay between adjustments,
(for Low Superheat) trying to correct this situation. Adjustments continue until the super-
heat is above the Value Field.
19 EXV Delay (Value field) – The value in this field id decremented by the difference between the absolute
value of the current superheat – superheat target. When the result reaches zero the FSH &
FSH2 make the current calculated adjustment to the current valve percentage.

(Time Field) – The value in the time field determines when control will begin when two EXV’s
are on the same circuit. This value times the value field in the fast zone plus the current tar-
get defines when control is taken, at startup. If this value is 10 and the value in the fast zone
is 2 and the target is 12 the result would be (10 * 2 + 12) = 32%. When both valves are ≤ this
% control is taken and then kept within the value specified in the time field of set point 12.
20 EXV Startup Time (Value Field) – EXV starting time in seconds. The following decisions are made on taking
control:
a). If the current superheat is > target + 5.0 ⁰ & State timer > Startup time / 2 Take
control.
b). If the current superheat is < target – Fast zone & State timer > Startup time / 2
Take Control.
c). If the Suct psi is < Low Suct SP + Low unload & State timer > Startup time / 2 Take
Control.
d). If the EXV startup time ≥ 90 & a) or b) is true adjust the valve start percentage

101
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

23.5.1 Set Point Adjustments

Fast SSH & Fast SSH2 Common adjustments
When using FSH or FSH2 you should not experience a low suction or low superheat alarm unless you are low
on refrigerant or have a mechanical problem. (If you bring on too much condenser that causes the head psi to
drop too quickly it will also pull the suction psi with it.) Set the multiplier of SP 13 ‘Time Field’ to a value high
enough to recover from a low suction.
23.5.2 Low Suction Multiplier-SP 13
‘Time Field’ is a multiplier for the change being made to adjust for a Low Suction condition. The MCS Default
is 2. If a low suction occurs and the system does not recover in time, an a low suction alarm occurs increase
SP 13 Time Field by 1.
If a low suction occurs and the system over corrects, (that is the EXV valve opens more than is required) then
reduce SP 13 Time Field by 1.
If an alarm occurs you can increase the multiplier and or decrease the time delay between adjustments. (Set
Point 18 Value Field)

23.5.2.1. Low Superheat Adjustment-SP 15

‘Time Field’ is a multiplier for the change being made to adjust for a Low Superheat condition. The MCS
Default is 2.
If a low superheat occurs and the system over corrects, (the EXV valve closes more than is required) then
reduce SP 15 Time Field by 1.
If an alarm occurs you can increase the multiplier and or decrease the time delay between adjustments. (Set
Point 18 Time Field)

23.5.2.2. EXV Startup Time-SP 20

‘Value Field’ specifies the maximum time the valve will remain in the EXV Startup State. If the value is less
than 90 seconds the Magnum will remain in this state for the entire time specified unless it reaches one of the
startup exit conditions covered in SP 20. It is not recommended to make this value less than 25 seconds.
If the value is ≥ 90 the Magnum will calculate a new valve opening percentage, if required. When setting a
value of 90, or greater it is recommended it be in increments of 9 for Fast SSH. For Fast SSH the Magnum
starts evaluating it’s position after 44% of its startup time has passed. In Fast SSH2 it starts evaluation after
50% of its startup time has passed.

23.5.2.3. EXV Compressor Start Delay-SP 20

‘Time Field’ specifies the number of seconds to delay starting the compressor to allow the valve to partially
open. MCS recommends 8 to 10 seconds and not more than 15 seconds. Remember this is part of the EXV
startup time.
23.5.2.4. EXV Target & EXV Fast Zone-SP 9
‘Value Field’ specifies the superheat target we want to achieve and SP 10 ‘Value Field’ specifies the Control
Zone we are maintaining. The table shows the MCS recommendations for both English and Metric.

Units English Metric

Range Low Standard High Low Standard High
Superheat 10.0 12.0 14.0 5.6 6.7 7.8
Fast Zone 1.6 2.0 3.0 0.9 1.1 1.7

102
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

23.6. Fast SSH States

Listed below shows the format of the states used.

EXV-AA-BB-CCCC

AA DESC. BB DESC CCCC DESC.

HD HOLDING >T GREATER TARG RcSm RATE OF CHANGE SMALL
OP OPENING <T LESS TARG RcLg RATE OF CHANGE LARGE
CL CLOSING Sh SUPERHEAT ShHi SUPERHEAT HIGH
ShSm SUPERHEAT SMALL
Rc=0 RATE OF CHANGE EQUALS ZERO
InDb IN DEAD BAND
InZn IN ZONE

23.6.1 FAST SSH2 State Format

Listed below shows the format of the states used.

EXV-AA-BB-CCCC

AA DESC. BB DESC CCCC DESC.

HD HOLDING >T GREATER TARG EsLo EXTENDED SLOPE LOW
OP OPENING <T LESS TARG EsHi EXTENDED SLOPE HIGH
CL CLOSING Es EXTENDED SLOPE 0 OR 1 EXTENDED SLOPE IS 0 OR 1
Sh SUPERHEAT =T SUPERHEAT EQUALS TARGET
ShHi SUPERHEAT HIGH
ShLo SUPERHEAT LOW
St=5 STATE TIMER EQUALS 5
RcSm RATE OF CHANGE SMALL
RcLg RATE OF CHANGE LARGE
Rc=0 RATE OF CHANGE EQUALS ZERO
InDb IN DEAD BAND
InZn IN ZONE

103
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

Chapter - 24. General Introduction to EXV PID

24.1. MCS PID REQUIREMENTS
• FIRMWARE 17.60E4 or greater
• MCS-CONNECT 18.26.11 or greater
• MCS-CONFIG 18.01N or greater
„„ An EXV PID controller uses information about: PRESENT, PAST and errors to adjust the Expansion Valve.
„„ EXV PID automatically applies accurate and responsive correction to a control function.

Change in Superheat = Current Superheat minus last Superheat from

P PROPORTIONAL (Kp)
1 second ago (Rate of Change)

Offset in Superheat = Current Superheat minus Target Superheat

I INTEGRAL (Ki)
(setpoint #9 value field)

Velocity of Superheat = Current Superheat minus the Superheat from

D DERIVATIVE (Kd)
x seconds ago (setpoint #9 time seconds value)

Change in Velocity = Current Kd minus the Kd from x seconds ago

A ACCELERATION (Ka)
(setpoint #9 time seconds value)

24.2. Calculations for the adjustment to EXV valve

MCS EXV PID algorithm uses two different sets of K multipliers to calculate adjustments to EXV on how far
the superheat is from the superheat target, (setpoint #9 value field).

SLOW
FAST multipliers
multipliers

PID
multipliers
setpoints

24.3. EXV PID Firmware

Uses information about: PRESENT, PAST and errors to adjust the Expansion Valve.
„„ Provides extremely fast reaction to changes in superheat caused in part by the following:
• High ambient chiller running in low ambient conditions.
• Condenser fans turning on or off creating large changes in discharge and suction pressure .
• Subcooling going temporarily negative and not having a solid column of liquid for short periods.
• Large subcooler / economizers coming on and off.
104
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

EXV PID Logic supports:

• Suction Superheat, Discharge Superheat, Evaporator Level and Condenser Level Control.
24.4. MCS PID REQUIREMENTS
• FIRMWARE 17.60E4 or greater
• MCS-CONNECT 18.26.11 or greater
• MCS-CONFIG 18.01N or greater
24.5. Selecting PID in MCS-CONFIG
In PID only setpoints 9 through 20 are used to control the EXV valve. If you select PID as your superheat EXV
control and you have a subcooler (an economizer injecting refrigerant into the compression chamber) you will
get PIP control on the EXV for the subcooler. The PID set points for the subcooler are 65 through 72. Select
Type of Control in Relay Output Information Screen. In the RO screen, from the drop down window in ‘Type’
you select either ‘Step w \ EXV’ or ‘Screw w \ EXV’.

24.6. Circuit Base

In the Circuit Base screen you need to select the Analog Output for the EXV.

Next in the Circuit Base screen you need to select ‘PIP SSH’ from the Evaporator EXV Control section drop
down menu.
NOTE: TANDEM 6 EXV PER CIRCUIT NOT SUPPORTED IN RTU AND CENTRIFUGAL FIRMWARE

The MAGNUM supports up to 6 tandem EXVs per circuit.

NOT AVAILABLE with RTU and Centrifugal firmware

105
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

With the release of Fast SSH2 AND PID MCS has released a new MCS-Config to support the new functions.
The new MCS-Config provides a new tab, ‘EXV Control’, where you define your system. This then allows
MCS-Config to provide MCS Default Set Point Values for you. The figure below shows the Current ‘Circuit
Base’ tab and the new ‘EXV Control’ tab.

If you enter data in the EXV portion of the Circuit Base tab or in the EXV Control tab it is carried
through to the other tab.

24.7. Selecting the ‘EXV Control’ tab you are prompted with the following:

Selection
Option 
(Evaporator and
condenser Level not
available with Fast
I or Fast II Control
Method)

Compressor
EXV Results


Based on your selections will dictate the set points for compressor control.

24.8. Selection Options

Superheat Control Superheat Control Config Creation

based on ? method type ? or reset to MCS Defaults

Evaporator Type being Functions Effecting Superheat control.

controlled ? Some require set points to be active

106
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

NOTE: Once you have clicked on the boxes for your setup, be sure to click on ‘Set Values to Default’.
This will set the values to the default for ‘Control Parameter, Heat Exchanger Type and the Control Method.
Make note that clicking in the ‘Target Modifier’ require that some set points must be active.

24.9. Compressor EXV Results

„„ Control on ‘Suction Superheat’

„„ Evaporator Type ‘Plate HX’
„„ Control Method ‘PID’
„„ MCS Default ‘Selected’
„„ Degrees F or C are automatic

24.10. Set Point Descriptions (PID)

Set points Available in MCS release 17.26-B and later

SP # Name Description
9 SPRHT TARGET If EXV control is based upon superheat, this is the Superheat target that the Magnum
or will control from.
LEVEL TARGET If EXV control is based upon refrigerant level, this is the refrigerant level target that the
Magnum will control from.
‘Low Zone’ if nonzero then develop control super heat based upon the lowest superheat
of any compressor that is on with in this suction group else use the superheat of this
compressor.
‘Time (sec)’ field: Seconds between samples used for calculating the Superheat Rate of
Change.
STAGE 7 CUT IN Stage 7 cut in, Setpoint value contains the voltage when this stage is turned on.
(Cut In/Out Control)
10 SPRHT ZONE +- The value in this setpoint is added and subtracted to setpoint #9 to determine the upper
and lower limits of the control zone respectively. Refer to section on EXV control.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If non-zero, skip ROC adjustment logic in the control zone.
STAGE 8 CUT IN Stage 8 cut in, Setpoint value contains the voltage when this stage is turned on.
(Cut In/Out Control)
11 EXV LOAD ADJ The opening adjustment that will be made to the EXV percentage when the circuit
changes to the Loading state or the closing adjustment that will be made when the cir-
cuit changes to the Unloading state. Refer to section on EXV control.
Note: In MOP hold state, only closing adjustments are allowed.

107
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

14 Limit of Adjustment (Value Field) – In FSH this value limits the adjustment while the superheat is < then the
Fast Zone times two. In FSH2 this value is the maximum limit of the adjustment.

(Time Field) - In FSH this value is the limit of adjustment when the superheat > then
two times the Fast Zone. Remember in the value field of this set point you are typically
using a value of 0.2 to 0.5. In the time field a value of 7 is equivalent to 0.7.
(Time Field) - In FSH2 this field is not used.
15 Minimum EXV Valve (Value Field) – The minimum position of the valve. Usually 3%. Will need to be larger if
% hot gas is on system.

(Time Field) - The adjustment multiplier for when the system is in Low Superheat.
16 Maximum EXV Valve (Value Field) – The maximum position of the valve allowed. Usually 100%. Sometimes
% used if valve is oversized.

(Time Field) – Not Used

17 Low Superheat (Value Field) – If the superheat falls below this value and stays below for longer than
the number of seconds specified in the Time Field, of this set point, the system will enter
a safety, generate an alarm and shut off this compressor then restart if required. If this
specifies a lockout then it will follow the lockout rules. In FSH and FSH2 the system will
take corrective action to correct this potential problem.
(Time Field) – Timer for this set point as described.
18 Low Psi Delay (Value Field) – The value specifies the number of seconds between valve adjustments,
(for Low Suction) trying to correct this situation. Adjustments will continue until the slope
of the suction pressure starts to increase.

(Time Field) – This value specifies the number of seconds delay between adjustments,
(for Low Superheat) trying to correct this situation. Adjustments continue until the super-
heat is above the Value Field.
19 EXV Delay (Value field) – The value in this field id decremented by the difference between the absolute
value of the current superheat – superheat target. When the result reaches zero the FSH &
FSH2 make the current calculated adjustment to the current valve percentage.

(Time Field) – The value in the time field determines when control will begin when two EXV’s
are on the same circuit. This value times the value field in the fast zone plus the current tar-
get defines when control is taken, at startup. If this value is 10 and the value in the fast zone
is 2 and the target is 12 the result would be (10 * 2 + 12) = 32%. When both valves are ≤ this
% control is taken and then kept within the value specified in the time field of set point 12.
20 EXV Startup Time (Value Field) – EXV starting time in seconds. The following decisions are made on taking
control:
a). If the current superheat is > target + 5.0 ⁰ & State timer > Startup time / 2 Take
control.
b). If the current superheat is < target – Fast zone & State timer > Startup time / 2
Take Control.
c). If the Suct psi is < Low Suct SP + Low unload & State timer > Startup time / 2 Take
Control.
d). If the EXV startup time ≥ 90 & a) or b) is true adjust the valve start percentage

108
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

24.11. PID Example Setpoint Defaults

Default Celsius values for Suction Superheat with DX Chiller Barrel.

# SEC WINDOW SAFETY HI LOW

SETPOINT VALUE TIME SETBACK TYPE
Ignore EXT EXT ZONE ZONE
9 SucSprHtTarg 6.5C 6S - - - 3.0C 2.7C 0.0C TARGET
10 Ki-IntegMult 0.20 0S - - - 2.20 -2.20 0.10 TARGET
12 Kp-PropMult 0.45 0S - - - 0.00 0.00 0.20 TARGET
13 Kd-DerrMult 0.15 0S - - - 0.20 -0.20 0.17 TARGET
14 Ka-AccMult .10 0S - - - 0.00 0.00 0.00 TARGET
15 ExvMinValve% 5.0% - - - - - - - SETPOINT
16 ExvMaxValve% 100 0S - - - 0.0% 0.0% 15.0% TARGET
17 LO SUPERHEAT 1.6F 120 S 15 300 60 - - - LOCKOUT
19 ExvKiDelay 15s - - - - - - - SETPOINT
20 ExvStartup 10s 5S - - - - - - TIME

Below setpoints are the default Fahrenheit values for Suction Superheat with DX Chiller Barrel.

SEC WINDOW SAFETY HI LOW SET-

# SETPOINT VALUE TIME TYPE
Ignore EXT EXT ZONE ZONE BACK
9 SucSprHtTarg 12.0F 6S - - - 4.0F 3.5F 0.0F TARGET
10 Ki-IntegMult 0.15 0S - - - 2.20 -2.20 0.10 TARGET
12 Kp-PropMult 0.30 0S - - - 0.00 0.00 0.20 TARGET
13 Kd-DerrMult 0.20 0S - - - 0.20 -0.20 0.17 TARGET
14 Ka-AccMult 0.10 0S - - - 0.00 0.00 0.00 TARGET
15 ExvMinValve% 5.0% - - - - - - - SETPOINT
16 ExvMaxValve% 100 0S - - - 0.0% 0.0% 15.0% TARGET
17 LO SUPERHEAT 3.5F 120 S 15 300 60 - - - LOCKOUT
19 ExvKiDelay 15s - - - - - - - SETPOINT
20 ExvStartup 10s 5S - - - - - - TIME

109
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

24.12. Logic to Determine which K Multipliers to Use

„„ Calculations are done every second
24.12.1.1. Switching to Fast K multipliers is based on:
a. Distance from target
1. If current superheat is greater than (setpoint #9 value field plus setpoint #9 high zone field x 2)
Setpoint Value Hi Zone Total
#9 SucSprHtTarg 12.0F + 4.0F x 2 = 20
EXV PID algorithm will use the fast multipliers (Setpoint Value Field)
2. If current superheat value is less than (setpoint #9 value field minus setpoint #9 high zone field)
Current Superheat
Setpoint HI Zone Total
Value
#9 SucSprHtTarg 12.0F - 4.0F = 8
EXV PID algorithm will use the fast multipliers (Setpoint Value Field)

FAST multipliers

Switching
24.12.1.2.to Switching
slow K multipliers
to Slow Kismultipliers
based on: is based on:
b. Distance from target
1. If current superheat is less than (setpoint #9 value field plus setpoint #9 low zone field) but above the
fast multiplier switch of 8 (12 - 4)
Setpoint Value LOW Zone Total
#9 SucSprHtTarg 12.0F + 3.5F = 15.5F
EXV PID algorithm will use the slow multipliers (Setback Value Field)

2. If current superheat is more than (setpoint #9 value field minus setpoint #9 low zone field) and
below the fast multiplier switch of 20 (12 + 4 x 2)
Setpoint Value LOW Zone Total
#9 SucSprHtTarg 12.0F - 3.5F = 8.5

EXV PID algorithm will use the slow multipliers (Setback Value Field)

SLOW multipliers

SLOW multipliers
110
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

24.12.1 Rate of Change - Moving too Fast

1. If current superheat ROC is greater than setpoint #13 (Kd) high zone and current superheat is above target

Current Superheat ROC Setpoint #13 High Zone Current Superheat

0.7 .20 16F
EXV PID algorithm will use the fast multipliers (Setpoint Value Field)

2. If current superheat ROC is greater than setpoint #13 (Kd) low zone and current superheat is below target
Current Superheat
Current Superheat ROC Setpoint #13 Low Zone
value
-0.3 -0.20 8
EXV PID algorithm will use the fast multipliers (Setpoint Value Field)

FAST
FAST multipliers multipliers
24.12.2 Rate of Change - Moving Slow Enough

If current superheat ROC is less than setpoint #13 (Kd) high zone and current superheat is above target
Current Superheat ROC Setpoint #13 High Zone Current Superheat
0.1 0.20 15F
EXV PID algorithm will use slow multipliers (Setback Field)

If current superheat ROC is less than setpoint #13 (Kd) low zone and current superheat is below target
Current Superheat ROC Setpoint #13 Low Zone Current Superheat
-0.1 -0.20 10
EXV PID algorithm will use slow multipliers (Setback Field)

SLOW multipliers

SLOW multipliers

111
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

24.13. MCS-Connect Evaporator EXV PID Status

Proportional Adjustment Acceleration Adjustment
(Current Superheat minus Superheat from last (Current Kd minus Kd from x seconds ago) Total Adjust
second) x Kp x Ka Adjustment made to current
Kp = setpoint #12/#67 value (fast) Ka = setpoint #14/#69 value (fast) EXV position
or setback value(slow) or setback value(slow)

Controlling parameter

Integral Adjustment
(Current Superheat minus Superheat
Target setpoint #9 value) x Ki Derivative Adjustment Current K multipliers
Ki = setpoint #10/#66 value(fast) or (Current Superheat minus being used
setback value(slow) Superheat from x seconds ago)
x Kd
Kd = setpoint #13/#68
value(fast) or setback
value(slow)

24.14. Allowing an Adjustments to the EXV Valve

(When Ki & Kd are in opposite, we are going in the right direction)
1. When the Proportional adjust, Integral adjust, Derivative adjust and Acceleration all add up to be ≥ to .1 or
-.1, the adjustment is made based on that number.
2. The Proportional adjust, Derivative adjust and Acceleration all run every second.
3. The Integral adjust uses setpoint #19 (ExvKiDelay) as a delay before posting a value as long as;
a. If the current Integral adjust (Ki) is > 0 and the current superheat > the current target plus setpoint
#10 high zone field.
b. If the current Integral adjust (Ki) is < 0 and the current superheat < the current target plus setpoint
#10 low zone.

Ki adjust HiZone
12 plus 2.20 = 14.2
14.20F No
Superheat Target Ki
120F
Ki adjust LOW zone
Adjust in
12 plus -2.20 = 9.8 9.80F this area

112
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

Chapter - 25. EXV Level Control using PID

„„ The following versions of Firmware are needed to setup EXV Level Control:
„„ MCS-CONFIG – 17.17.00U or later
„„ MCS-CONNECT – 17.003.11 or later
„„ MCS-MAGNUM Firmware - 17.16C or later

25.1. Setting up EXV Level Control

„„ Setup Analog Outputs to control electronic expansion valves.

„„ Setup INPUTS to read evaporator or condenser level.

25.1.1 Setting up EXV Level Control – User Defined

„„ Selecting ‘User Defined’ type

Under the Display Type, select

User Defined

113
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

„„ Screen below will open:

1.2 0%
3.7 100%

1. Setting up the Level Sensor

2. Wire the Level Sensor to the designated input.
3. If available, have the Level Sensor loose and manually move the float or submerge in a bucket of liquid to
100% (standpipe full of refrigerant).
4. Record the voltage input, this would be point #2 on the SI Calculation Wizard
(Ex. Voltage = 3.7 Value = 100%)
5. Move the float to 0% (no refrigerant in the standpipe=empty)
6. Record the voltage input. This would be point #1 on the SI calculation wizard
(Ex. Voltage = 1.2 Value = 0%)

NOTE: If Level Sensor is a 4-20ma output, where at 4ma = 0% level and at 20ma = 100% level,
you would put the designated input jumper on digital and the SI calculation wizard would be
Setup as:
Point #1 .882 vdc = 0% See APP066- 4-20mA Sensor Connection to MCS-Magnum
Point #2 4.41 vdc = 100%

114
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

25.1.2 Circuit Base Setup

„„ Point to the EXV outputs in the Circuit Base screen.

„„ Point to the Refrigerant Level inputs in the Circuit SI screen.

„„ Make sure the Discharge Pressure and Discharge Temperature are pointing to correct sensors for the
calculation of discharge superheat.

25.1.3 Setup using EXV CONTROL WIZARD

„„ Select the EXV Control button and set up for level control with the desired EXV control method.

Heat Exchanger Type

Flooded Barrel

Control Parameter Control Method Set Default Values

PID Click MCS
Select Evaporator Level or
Condenser Level DEFAULTS

115
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

„„ The following setpoints will be setup:

„„ NOTE: If more than one circuit is available and you want to control two independent circuit target
levels, make setpoint#9 ‘Non-Active’ in the setpoint screen.
„„ Make the used FLA setpoints#171-190 a ‘target’ type and set the level target up in the setback field.

25.1.4 Low Discharge Superheat EXV Target Adjust Logic

„„ Requires Firmware Version: MCS-MAGNUM Firmware - 17.61-D or later
Below are three enables for the low discharge EXV target adjustment:
7. Comp has been running for 5 minutes, or
8. Discharge temperature is greater than 130F (or 54.5C), or
IMPORTANT
9. EXV control is setup for PID Evap, PID Cond, Old Evap Level or Old Cond Level control.

„„ Make setpoint #110 (LoDisSHExvAd) active if you want to dynamically change the EXV target based
on Low Discharge Superheat.

25.1.4.1. The Low Discharge Superheat logic:

„„ If Setpoint #110 (#164 for REFR) is setup as a “TARGET” type setpoint the following logic occurs
(New Logic):
1. If discharge superheat <= setpoint #110 (#164) low zone value and the low discharge superheat ad-
justed amount is less than the max adjust limit setpoint #110 setback value and the Time (SEC) value has
elapsed, then:
a. If Evap Level control, setpoint #110 (#164) value field is subtracted from the EXV Target and this
value becomes the new EXV target. The value in the Time (SEC) field will count down again and

116
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

another adjustment will be made until the max adjust is reached (setpoint #110 setback value) or
the discharge superheat goes above setpoint #110 (#164) low zone value.
b. For Cond Level control method, setpoint #110 (#164) value field is added to the EXV Target and
this value becomes the new EXV Target. The value in the Time (SEC) field will count down again
and another adjustment will be made until the max adjust is reached (setpoint #110 setback val-
ue) or the discharge superheat goes above setpoint #110 (#164) low zone value.
„„ Else if discharge superheat >= setpoint #110 (#164) high zone value and the low discharge superheat
adjusted amount is greater than 0 and the Time (SEC) value has elapsed, then:
a. If Evap Level control, setpoint #110 (#164) value field is added to the EXV Target and this value
becomes the new EXV Target. The value in the Time (SEC) field will count down again and anoth-
er adjustment will be made until the min adjust is reached (0) or the discharge superheat goes
below setpoint #110 (#164) high zone value.
NOTE: The EXV Target adjusted value will not go above the original setpoint Target value.
b. For Cond Level control method, setpoint #110 (#164) value field is subtracted from the EXV Tar-
get and this value becomes the new EXV Target. The value in the Time SEC) field will count down
again and another adjustment will be made until the min adjust is reached (0) or the discharge
superheat goes below setpoint #110 (#164) high zone value.
NOTE: The EXV Target adjusted value will not go below the original setpoint Target value.
„„ Else If Setpoint #110 (#164) is not a “TARGET” type setpoint the following logic occurs (Old Logic):
2. If discharge superheat is < Low discharge superheat safety setpoint #84 value, then:
a. If Evap Level or Cond Level and not level target by compressor circuit, then set EXV target to
setpoint #110 value.
b. Else If Evap Level or Cond Level and EXV target is by compressor circuit, then subtract setpoint
#110 value from the current EXV target.

117
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

Chapter - 26. Analog Output Control using PID

Required to have the software below or later version
Config version 18.01T
Connect version 18.31.15
Firmware HVAC 17.62R2

PID control will turn an analog output into a stand alone PID controlled output. This output will have a controlling sensor
that modulates the AO to a maintain target. This logic will run all the time.

NOTE
If AO is modulating the wrong direction, simply make all three multipliers negative values to reverse the direction the AO
modulates and vice versa.

If Relay-
If a relay is used and is OFF then associated AO will be set to the defined value and not modulate. If ‘not used’ the logic
is ignored.

Control Sensor
AO or SI point to be used as the controlling sensor for the AO.

118
MCS-MAGNUM-SSH, SSH2, PID

Control Target
SI, AO, or Setpoint used as the target the AO will try to maintain.
AO
Min to Max value the AO can modulate between.

Proportional(Kp)
Multiplier for Kp adjustments.

Integral(Ki)
Multiplier and delay between Ki Adjustments

Derivative(Kd)
Multiplier and time in seconds interval to calculate Kd.

Adjustment Limits
Min and Max adjustments allowed to the AO per adjustment, both negative and positive.

Under the Analog Outputs window in the MCS Connect software. You’ll find an AO PID tab that will show all of the PID
CONTROL AOs and all of the calculated adjustments being made to those Analog Outputs. Here you will be able to see
all three adjustments being made to the PID. This will assist you in any fine tuning required for the given analog output.

119
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

Chapter - 27. Hardware & Software support information

Refer to MCS web site at mcscontrols.com.

27.1. OEM Factory Checkout Procedure

Then select the “Support” button and then select “Installation, Testing & Unit Commissioning”.

27.2. Hardware Trouble Shooting

Then select the “Support” button and then select “Hardware Troubleshooting”.

27.3. The MCS Trouble Shooting Quick Reference Sheet

The following is a quick summary

PROBLEM POTENTIAL SOLUTION

No Sensor + 5 vdc Indicates a possible shorted input sensor
Remove all sensor + 5 vdc wires.
Wait about 30 to 60 seconds. If + 5 vdc returns, replace one sensor
wire at a time until the + 5 vdc is lost again. This will be the shorted
sensor.
A sensor input reads -99.9 This indicates an open sensor input signal or 5 VDC problem.
Check sensor wiring for missing wire or poor connection.
Check sensor for bad sensor.
Check + 5 vdc on sensor input to ground. If less than 5 VDC is on the
sensor 5 VDC terminal block, the problem is with probably a shorted
sensor. (A poly fuse protects the board)
Remove all sensor input terminals.
Wait about 1 min. or until 5 VDC restored at sensor input.
Connect terminals 1 at time until short reappears & fix bad sensor.
A sensor input reads +999.9 This indicates a shorted sensor input signal.
Check sensor wiring for +5VDC shorted to signal etc.
Check sensor for bad sensor.
A pressure sensor is reading This indicates the transducer sensor input needs to be calibrated via
more than 1 psi off the offset capability in the software. (Transducers by design need to
(The temperature & humidity be calibrated based on construction and altitude.)
sensors do not require calibra- You need to have a valid Auth code to change sensor offsets
tion.) You must use the Windows based software package ‘PConn’
See PConn Interactive section for instructions. (‘Change SI Status,
Manual Value and / or offset.)

Invalid reading on one sensor This indicates an input problem with 1 sensor.
input. Verify jumper settings correct for that SI.
‘MCS CONTROLLER INITIAL- Indicates Micro in constant reset.
IZATION’ on LCD display. Check incoming power > 105 VAC or 22 VAC
Top row of LCD display all bars Indicates software chip problem possible.
& 2nd row blank. Possible U11 software version incorrect or chip bad.
Possible U13 GAL chip incorrect or chip bad.
Possible bad connection or cable between LCD and MCS8

120
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

PROBLEM POTENTIAL SOLUTION

LCD blank. Indicates bad connection.
Connector J2 on MCS not on or offset on connector.
Resistor adjustment VR1 out of adjustment.
Lost I/O Indicates communications problem.
Verify RS485 LED blinking.
Verify termination jumper J6 only on at MCS-8 & last I/O.
Verify MCS-8 & I/O address’s set correctly.
Verify wiring from MCS-8 to each I/O correct.
Check fuses/120 VAC on I/O units
Changes to MCS not being This indicates inability to write to chip U10.
made from the unit’s keypad. Verify ‘EEP WRITE ENABLE’ jumper W6 is on.
Not authorized
MCS-PConnect – cannot make This indicates you are not at a proper authorization level.
changes Follow steps below for proper authorization
From either the SYSTEM INFO or STATUS screen, under PConn,
click on the ‘AUTH’ button on the lower right of your LCD display.
Follow prompts and enter a valid 4-digit authorization number.
The authorization level is displayed at the top of the display and is
reflected via the color of the AUTH button.
RED = view only
YELLOW = service level
BLUE = Supervisor level
Green = Factory level
Invalid authorization This indicates an invalid auth number.
Follow steps below for proper authorization
Press SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS key until the authorization option
appears
Press the ENTER key
From the “Display Status” press keys corresponding to your authori-
zation number.
Press ENTER
SI from AMPS board 10 A low. This indicates a problem with this SI only.
Jumper setting on this SI in wrong position.
Incorrect sensor type used.
INVALID CONFIG VER Indicates layout of CFG wrong.
CFG layout for different version than software chip U11.
INVALID CONFIG TYPE Indicates U10 CFG incompatible with U11 software.
Example U10 CFG for home while U11 for chiller.
INVALID CONFIG Indicates Checksum invalid
Reload CFG
Sensor input believed invalid Verify Berg jumpers using Quick Reference Sheets
(Under Sensor Diagnostic Sub Check board version number
Menu) Check wiring of sensor

121
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

PROBLEM POTENTIAL SOLUTION

Communications to MCS-485- Verify red LED on the gate way is blinking. This indicates that the
GATEWAY from MCS-Connect MCS-Connect program is talking to the gateway.
not working. Verify that the two wire shielded cable is properly wired from the RS-
485 connector to the gateway.
Verify red LED (Located just to he left of the RS-485 connector on the
MCS-8 board is blinking. This indicates that the MCS-8 is responding
to the gateway.
If both of these LED are blinking, check the address of the MCS-8
and any other MCS-8s that are on the network. Each must have a
unique address. This address can be changed from the MCS-8. Prop-
er authorization is required. Enter the UNIT INFORMATION screen by
depressing the SERVICE DIAGNOSTIC key and scrolling to this item.
Depress the ENTER key and scroll to the NETWORK ADDRESS
screen. Change address if needed.
Verify + 12 vdc to MCS-485-GATEWAY
INVALID CONFIG Indicates Checksum invalid
Either set to factory defaults on reset settings.

--- NOTE ---

ALL SENSOR INPUTS SHOULD BE SHIELDED CABLE WITH SHIELD TIED TO
GROUND ON MCS-8 SENSOR INPUT GROUND TERMINAL

122
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Chapter - 28. MODBUS RTU

Modbus RTU is supported directly by the MCS-Magnum using the RS485 port.
Please note this is the same port you plug into the RS232, so if using Modbus RTU you cannot
plug you laptop into RS232 port on the older keypad.

Please note the RS485 follows industry standard, two wire twisted pair in shielded cable.

28.1. Setup the Modbus from MCS-Config’s Magnum Setup Screen(see below):

123
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

28.2. From MCS-Connect’s Service Window RS485 tab(see below):

28.3. From MCS-Magnum LCD/Keypad(see below):

124
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

28.4. In MCS-CONFIG you can see & print a list of the Modbus Registers (see below):

The MCS-Magnum Modbus RTU setting allow you to specify the Modbus Slave address, Modbus
Baud rate (4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 are supported).
The number data bit is 8, stop bit is 1 and parity is none (these parameter are
not adjustable).
The sensors inputs are 16 bit signed values. (Read input Registers, Function code = 4)
• The analog sensor inputs values typically have 1 assumed decimal place, meaning a value of 12.3
will be transmitted as value 123. The # of decimal point depending on the sensor type define in
the MCS-MAGNUM CONFIG. Most sensor types are 1 decimal place.
But take care there are a few 2 decimal and a few zero decimal place types.
The BMS point list has a column which indicates how many assumed decimal are contained in the
value.
• The digital sensor inputs values will be 0 or 1, 0 = off and 1 = on.
The analog outputs are 16 bit signed values. (Read Input Registers, Function code = 4)
• The analog output have 1 assumed decimal place, meaning a value of 12.3 will be transmitted as value
123.
The relay outputs are 16 bit packed values. (Read Coil Status , Function code = 1)
• Each bit within the 16 bits can contains a relay output. A bit value of 0 = relay off, 1 = relay on.
The number of packed bit depends on the requesting Modbus message.
If only one coil is asked for, then only bit 0 will contains a relay status value and bit 1 thru 7 are do
not care.
If two relays are asked for, then bit 0 and bit 1 will contains values and bit 2 thru 7 are do not care.
The setpoints are 16 bit signed values. (Read Holding Registers, Function code = 3)
• The setpoints values typically have 1 assumed decimal place, meaning a value of 12.3 will be
transmitted as value 123.

The # of decimal point depending on the setpoint type defined in the MCS-MAGNUM CONFIG.
125
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Chapter - 29. BMS Communication Protocols

The MCS-Magnum supports as standard: BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, and Modbus TCP/IP protocols.
Using the MCS-BMS-GATEWAY, the MCS-Magnum can also support Johnson N2, LonTalk and Bacnet MSTP.
Supported baud rates for Modbus RTU and Johnson N2 are 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, and
57600bps.
29.1. MCS-Magnum to BMS Connections

126
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

29.2. Sensor Input Points

Sensor numbering is based upon the MCS-MAGNUM or SI16-AO4 hardware type board Notable BACnet properties
available: Units

BACnet Modbus BACnet Modbus

Magnum BACnet Name N2 Magnum BACnet Name N2
ID Register ID Register

Sensor M-1 AI: 1 Refer to Config *30001 *AI: 1 Sensor 2-9 AI:41 Refer to Config *30041 *AI: 41
Sensor M-2 AI: 2 Refer to Config *30002 *AI: 2 Sensor 2-10 AI:42 Refer to Config *30042 *AI: 42
Sensor M-3 AI: 3 Refer to Config *30003 *AI: 3 Sensor 2-11 AI:43 Refer to Config *30043 *AI: 43
Sensor M-4 AI: 4 Refer to Config *30004 *AI: 4 Sensor 2-12 AI:44 Refer to Config *30044 *AI: 44
Sensor M-5 AI: 5 Refer to Config *30005 *AI: 5 Sensor 2-13 AI:45 Refer to Config *30045 *AI: 45
Sensor M-6 AI: 6 Refer to Config *30006 *AI: 6 Sensor 2-14 AI:46 Refer to Config *30046 *AI: 46
Sensor M-7 AI: 7 Refer to Config *30007 *AI: 7 Sensor 2-15 AI:47 Refer to Config *30047 *AI: 47
Sensor M-8 AI: 8 Refer to Config *30008 *AI: 8 Sensor 2-16 AI:48 Refer to Config *30048 *AI: 48
Sensor M-9 AI: 9 Refer to Config *30009 *AI: 9 Sensor 3-1 AI:49 Refer to Config *30049 *AI:49
Sensor M-10 AI:10 Refer to Config *30010 *AI: 10 Sensor 3-2 AI:50 Refer to Config *30050 *AI: 50
Sensor M-11 AI:11 Refer to Config *30011 *AI: 11 Sensor 3-3 AI:51 Refer to Config *30051 *AI: 51
Sensor M-12 AI:12 Refer to Config *30012 *AI: 12 Sensor 3-4 AI:52 Refer to Config *30052 *AI: 52
Sensor M-13 AI:13 Refer to Config *30013 *AI: 13 Sensor 3-5 AI:53 Refer to Config *30053 *AI: 53
Sensor M-14 AI:14 Refer to Config *30014 *AI: 14 Sensor 3-6 AI:54 Refer to Config *30054 *AI: 54
Sensor M-15 AI:15 Refer to Config *30015 *AI: 15 Sensor 3-7 AI:55 Refer to Config *30055 *AI: 55
Sensor M-16 AI:16 Refer to Config *30016 *AI: 16 Sensor 3-8 AI:56 Refer to Config *30056 *AI: 56
Sensor 1-1 AI:17 Refer to Config *30017 *AI: 17 Sensor 3-9 AI:57 Refer to Config *30057 *AI: 57
Sensor 1-2 AI:18 Refer to Config *30018 *AI: 18 Sensor 3-10 AI:58 Refer to Config *30058 *AI: 58
Sensor 1-3 AI:19 Refer to Config *30019 *AI: 19 Sensor 3-11 AI:59 Refer to Config *30059 *AI: 59
Sensor 1-4 AI:20 Refer to Config *30020 *AI: 20 Sensor 3-12 AI:60 Refer to Config *30060 *AI: 60
Sensor 1-5 AI:21 Refer to Config *30021 *AI: 21 Sensor 3-13 AI:61 Refer to Config *30061 *AI: 61
Sensor 1-6 AI:22 Refer to Config *30022 *AI: 22 Sensor 3-14 AI:62 Refer to Config *30062 *AI: 62
Sensor 1-7 AI:23 Refer to Config *30023 *AI: 23 Sensor 3-15 AI:63 Refer to Config *30063 *AI: 63
Sensor 1-8 AI:24 Refer to Config *30024 *AI: 24 Sensor 3-16 AI:64 Refer to Config *30064 *AI: 64
Sensor 1-9 AI:25 Refer to Config *30025 *AI: 25 Sensor 4-1 AI:65 Refer to Config *30065 *AI: 65
Sensor 1-10 AI:26 Refer to Config *30026 *AI: 26 Sensor 4-2 AI:66 Refer to Config *30066 *AI: 66
Sensor 1-11 AI:27 Refer to Config *30027 *AI: 27 Sensor 4-3 AI:67 Refer to Config *30067 *AI: 67
Sensor 1-12 AI:28 Refer to Config *30028 *AI: 28 Sensor 4-4 AI:68 Refer to Config *30068 *AI: 68
Sensor 1-13 AI:29 Refer to Config *30029 *AI: 29 Sensor 4-5 AI:69 Refer to Config *30069 *AI: 69
Sensor 1-14 AI:30 Refer to Config *30030 *AI: 30 Sensor 4-6 AI:70 Refer to Config *30070 *AI: 70
Sensor 1-15 AI:31 Refer to Config *30031 *AI: 31 Sensor 4-7 AI:71 Refer to Config *30071 *AI: 71
Sensor 1-16 AI:32 Refer to Config *30032 *AI: 32 Sensor 4-8 AI:72 Refer to Config *30072 *AI: 72
Sensor 2-1 AI:33 Refer to Config *30033 *AI: 33 Sensor 4-9 AI:73 Refer to Config *30073 *AI: 73
Sensor 2-2 AI:34 Refer to Config *30034 *AI: 34 Sensor 4-10 AI:74 Refer to Config *30074 *AI: 74
Sensor 2-3 AI:35 Refer to Config *30035 *AI: 35 Sensor 4-11 AI:75 Refer to Config *30075 *AI: 75
Sensor 2-4 AI:36 Refer to Config *30036 *AI: 36 Sensor 4-12 AI:76 Refer to Config *30076 *AI: 76
Sensor 2-5 AI:37 Refer to Config *30037 *AI: 37 Sensor 4-13 AI:77 Refer to Config *30077 *AI: 77
Sensor 2-6 AI:38 Refer to Config *30038 *AI: 38 Sensor 4-14 AI:78 Refer to Config *30078 *AI: 78
Sensor 2-7 AI:39 Refer to Config *30039 *AI: 39 Sensor 4-15 AI:79 Refer to Config *30079 *AI: 79
Sensor 2-8 AI:40 Refer to Config *30040 *AI: 40 Sensor 4-16 AI:80 Refer to Config *30080 *AI: 80

*- Indicates value multiplied by 10 to include one decimal place. (I.e. BMS value of 500 indicates actual value 50.0)

127
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

29.3. Relay Output Points

Relay Output points are read-only. Sensor numbering is based upon RO-10 hardware type board

Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2 Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2
Relay M–1 BO: 1 Refer to Config 00001 BO: 1 Relay 4–1 BO:41 Refer to Config 00041 BO: 41
Relay M–2 BO: 2 Refer to Config 00002 BO: 2 Relay 4–2 BO:42 Refer to Config 00042 BO: 42
Relay M–3 BO: 3 Refer to Config 00003 BO: 3 Relay 4–3 BO:43 Refer to Config 00043 BO: 43
Relay M–4 BO: 4 Refer to Config 00004 BO: 4 Relay 4–4 BO:44 Refer to Config 00044 BO: 44
Relay M–5 BO: 5 Refer to Config 00005 BO: 5 Relay 4–5 BO:45 Refer to Config 00045 BO: 45
Relay M–6 BO: 6 Refer to Config 00006 BO: 6 Relay 4–6 BO:46 Refer to Config 00046 BO: 46
Relay M–7 BO: 7 Refer to Config 00007 BO: 7 Relay 4–7 BO:47 Refer to Config 00047 BO: 47
Relay M–8 BO: 8 Refer to Config 00008 BO: 8 Relay 4–8 BO:48 Refer to Config 00048 BO: 48
Relay M–9 BO: 9 Refer to Config 00009 BO: 9 Relay 4–9 BO:49 Refer to Config 00049 BO: 49
Relay M-10 BO:10 Refer to Config 00010 BO: 10 Relay 4 -10 BO:50 Refer to Config 00050 BO: 50
Relay 1–1 BO:11 Refer to Config 00011 BO: 11 Relay 5–1 BO:51 Refer to Config 00051 BO: 51
Relay 1–2 BO:12 Refer to Config 00012 BO: 12 Relay 5–2 BO:52 Refer to Config 00052 BO: 52
Relay 1–3 BO:13 Refer to Config 00013 BO: 13 Relay 5–3 BO:53 Refer to Config 00053 BO: 53
Relay 1–4 BO:14 Refer to Config 00014 BO: 14 Relay 5–4 BO:54 Refer to Config 00054 BO: 54
Relay 1–5 BO:15 Refer to Config 00015 BO: 15 Relay 5–5 BO:55 Refer to Config 00055 BO: 55
Relay 1–6 BO:16 Refer to Config 00016 BO: 16 Relay 5–6 BO:56 Refer to Config 00056 BO: 56
Relay 1–7 BO:17 Refer to Config 00017 BO: 17 Relay 5–7 BO:57 Refer to Config 00057 BO: 57
Relay 1–8 BO:18 Refer to Config 00018 BO: 18 Relay 5–8 BO:58 Refer to Config 00058 BO: 58
Relay 1–9 BO:19 Refer to Config 00019 BO: 19 Relay 5–9 BO:59 Refer to Config 00059 BO: 59
Relay 1- 10 BO:20 Refer to Config 00020 BO: 20 Relay 5 -10 BO:60 Refer to Config 00060 BO: 60
Relay 2–1 BO:21 Refer to Config 00021 BO: 21 Relay 6–1 BO:61 Refer to Config 00061 BO: 61
Relay 2–2 BO:22 Refer to Config 00022 BO: 22 Relay 6–2 BO:62 Refer to Config 00062 BO: 62
Relay 2–3 BO:23 Refer to Config 00023 BO: 23 Relay 6–3 BO:63 Refer to Config 00063 BO: 63
Relay 2–4 BO:24 Refer to Config 00024 BO: 24 Relay 6–4 BO:64 Refer to Config 00064 BO: 64
Relay 2–5 BO:25 Refer to Config 00025 BO: 25 Relay 6–5 BO:65 Refer to Config 00065 BO: 65
Relay 2–6 BO:26 Refer to Config 00026 BO: 26 Relay 6- 6 BO:66 Refer to Config 00066 BO: 66
Relay 2–7 BO:27 Refer to Config 00027 BO: 27 Relay 6–7 BO:67 Refer to Config 00067 BO: 67
Relay 2–8 BO:28 Refer to Config 00028 BO: 28 Relay 6–8 BO:68 Refer to Config 00068 BO: 68
Relay 2–9 BO:29 Refer to Config 00029 BO: 29 Relay 6–9 BO:69 Refer to Config 00069 BO: 69
Relay 2 -10 BO:30 Refer to Config 00030 BO: 30 Relay 6–10 BO:70 Refer to Config 00760 BO: 70
Relay 3–1 BO:31 Refer to Config 00031 BO: 31 Relay 7–1 BO:71 Refer to Config 00071 BO: 71
Relay 3–2 BO:32 Refer to Config 00032 BO: 32 Relay 7–2 BO:72 Refer to Config 00072 BO: 72
Relay 3–3 BO:33 Refer to Config 00033 BO: 33 Relay 7–3 BO:73 Refer to Config 00073 BO: 73
Relay 3–4 BO:34 Refer to Config 00034 BO: 34 Relay 7–4 BO:74 Refer to Config 00074 BO: 74
Relay 3–5 BO:35 Refer to Config 00035 BO: 35 Relay 7–5 BO:75 Refer to Config 00075 BO: 75
Relay 3- 6 BO:36 Refer to Config 00036 BO: 36 Relay 7–6 BO:76 Refer to Config 00076 BO: 76
Relay 3–7 BO:37 Refer to Config 00037 BO: 37 Relay 7–7 BO:77 Refer to Config 00077 BO: 77
Relay 3–8 BO:38 Refer to Config 00038 BO: 38 Relay 7–8 BO:78 Refer to Config 00078 BO: 78
Relay 3–9 BO:39 Refer to Config 00039 BO: 39 Relay 7–9 BO:79 Refer to Config 00079 BO: 79
Relay 3–10 BO:40 Refer to Config 00040 BO: 40 Relay 7–10 BO:80 Refer to Config 00070 BO: 80

*- Indicates value multiplied by 10 to include one decimal place. (I.e. BMS value of 500 indicates actual value 50.0)

128
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Analog Output PointsAnalog Output points are read-only. Sensor numbering is based upon SI16-AO4 hardware type
board. Notable BACnet properties available: Units

Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus Register N2

Analog Out M-1 AO:1 Refer to Config *30201 *AO: 1
Analog Out M-2 AO:2 Refer to Config *30202 *AO: 2
Analog Out M-3 AO:3 Refer to Config *30203 *AO: 3
Analog Out M-4 AO:4 Refer to Config *30204 *AO: 4
Analog Out 1-1 AO:5 Refer to Config *30205 *AO: 5
Analog Out 1-2 AO:6 Refer to Config *30206 *AO: 6
Analog Out 1-3 AO:7 Refer to Config *30207 *AO: 7
Analog Out 1-4 AO:7 Refer to Config *30208 *AO: 8
Analog Out 2-1 AO:8 Refer to Config *30209 *AO: 9
Analog Out 2-2 AO:10 Refer to Config *30210 *AO: 10
Analog Out 2-3 AO:11 Refer to Config *30211 *AO: 11
Analog Out 2-4 AO:12 Refer to Config *30212 *AO: 12
Analog Out 3-1 AO:13 Refer to Config *30213 *AO: 13
Analog Out 3-2 AO:14 Refer to Config *30214 *AO: 14
Analog Out 3-3 AO:15 Refer to Config *30215 *AO: 15
Analog Out 3-4 AO:16 Refer to Config *30216 *AO: 16
Analog Out 4-1 AO:17 Refer to Config *30217 *AO: 17
Analog Out 4-2 AO:18 Refer to Config *30218 *AO: 18
Analog Out 4-3 AO:19 Refer to Config *30219 *AO: 19
Analog Out 4-4 AO:20 Refer to Config *30220 *AO: 20

*- Indicates value multiplied by 10 to include one decimal place. (I.e. BMS value of 500 indicates actual value 50.0)
29.4. Setpoints
Setpoints are read-only. Notable BACnet properties available: Units
Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2
Setpoint #1 AV:0 STP# 1-<Setpoint name> 40301 ADF:1
Setpoint #21 AV:88 STP# 21-<Setpoint name> 40321 ADF:89
STP# 163-<Setpoint
Setpoint #163 AV:230 40463 ADF:231
name>
*- Indicates value multiplied by 10 to include one decimal place. (I.e. BMS value of 500 indicates actual value 50.0)

29.5. Chiller/Compressor States

State values are read-only. Notable BACnet properties available: Number of States, State-Text (Contains character
text of current state)

Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus Register N2

Chiller Unit State MV:0 CHILLER STATE 30306 BYT:1
Compressor #1 State MV:1 COMPRESSOR #1 STATE 30307 BYT:2
Compressor #2 State MV:2 COMPRESSOR #2 STATE 30308 BYT:3
Compressor #3 State MV:3 COMPRESSOR #3 STATE 30309 BYT:4
Compressor #4 State MV:4 COMPRESSOR #4 STATE 30310 BYT:5
Compressor #5 State MV:5 COMPRESSOR #5 STATE 30311 BYT:6
Compressor #6 State MV:6 COMPRESSOR #6 STATE 30312 BYT:7

129
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus Register N2

Compressor #7 State MV:7 COMPRESSOR #7 STATE 30313 BYT:8
Compressor #8 State MV:8 COMPRESSOR #8 STATE 30314 BYT:9
Compressor #9 State MV:130 COMPRESSOR #9 STATE 30560 BYT:131
Compressor #10 State MV:131 COMPRESSOR #10 STATE 30561 BYT:132
Compressor #11 State MV:132 COMPRESSOR #11 STATE 30562 BYT:133
Compressor #12 State MV:133 COMPRESSOR #12 STATE 30563 BYT:134
Compressor #13 State MV:134 COMPRESSOR #13 STATE 30564 BYT:135
Compressor #14 State MV:135 COMPRESSOR #14 STATE 30565 BYT:136
Compressor #15 State MV:136 COMPRESSOR #15 STATE 30566 BYT:137
Compressor #16 State MV:137 COMPRESSOR #16 STATE 30567 BYT:138
Compressor #17 State MV:138 COMPRESSOR #17 STATE 30568 BYT:139
Compressor #18 State MV:139 COMPRESSOR #18 STATE 30569 BYT:140
Compressor #19 State MV:140 COMPRESSOR #19 STATE 30570 BYT:141
Compressor #20 State MV:141 COMPRESSOR #20 STATE 30571 BYT:142

29.6. Other Points

These points are read-only.
Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2
Wanted FLA% AV:3 Wanted FLA% 30318 ADF:4
Steps Wanted AV:4 Steps Wanted On 30315 ADF:5
Steps On AV:5 Steps On 30316 ADF:6
Step Delay AV:6 Step Delay 30317 ADF:7
Compressor #1 FLA% AV:7 C1_FLA% *30319 *ADF:8
Compressor #1 Sat Suction AV:10 C1_Sat Suct *30327 *ADF:11
Compressor #1 Sat Disch AV:11 C1_ Sat Disch *30329 *ADF:12
Compressor #1 Disch SH AV:12 C1_Disch SH *30330 *ADF:13
Compressor #1 Suct SH AV:13 C1_Suct SH *30328 *ADF:14
Compressor #1 Oil Pres Diff AV:63 C1_Oil Pres Diff *30375 *ADF:64
Compressor #2 FLA% AV:14 C2_FLA% *30320 *ADF:15
Compressor #2 Sat Suction AV:17 C2_Sat Suct *30331 *ADF:18
Compressor #2 Sat Disch AV:18 C2_ Sat Disch *30333 *ADF:19
Compressor #2 Disch SH AV:19 C2_Disch SH *30334 *ADF:20
Compressor #2 Suct SH AV:20 C2_Suct SH *30332 *ADF:21
Compressor #2 Oil Pres Diff AV:64 C2_Oil Pres Diff *30376 *ADF:65
Compressor #3 FLA% AV:21 C3_FLA% *30321 *ADF:22
Compressor #3 Sat Suction AV:24 C3_Sat Suct *30335 *ADF:25
Compressor #3 Sat Disch AV:25 C3_ Sat Disch *30337 *ADF:26
Compressor #3 Disch SH AV:26 C3_Disch SH *30338 *ADF:27
Compressor #3 Suct SH AV:27 C3_Suct SH *30336 *ADF:28
Compressor #3 Oil Pres Diff AV:65 C3_Oil Pres Diff *30377 *ADF:66
Compressor #4 FLA% AV:28 C4_FLA% *30322 *ADF:29
Compressor #4 Sat Suction AV:31 C4_Sat Suct *30339 *ADF:32
Compressor #4 Sat Disch AV:32 C4_ Sat Disch *30341 *ADF:33
Compressor #4 Disch SH AV:33 C4_Disch SH *30342 *ADF:34
Compressor #4 Suct SH AV:34 C4_Suct SH *30340 *ADF:35
Compressor #4 Oil Pres Diff AV:66 C4_Oil Pres Diff *30378 *ADF:67
Compressor #5 FLA% AV:35 C5_FLA% *30323 *ADF:36
Compressor #5 Sat Suction AV:38 C5_Sat Suct *30343 *ADF:39
130
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2

Compressor #5 Sat Disch AV:39 C5_ Sat Disch *30345 *ADF:40
Compressor #5 Disch SH AV:40 C5_Disch SH *30346 *ADF:41
Compressor #5 Suct SH AV:41 C5_Suct SH *30344 *ADF:42
Compressor #5 Oil Pres Diff AV:67 C5_Oil Pres Diff *30379 *ADF:68
Compressor #6 FLA% AV:42 C6_FLA% *30324 *ADF:43
Compressor #6 Sat Suction AV:45 C6_Sat Suct *30347 *ADF:46
Compressor #6 Sat Disch AV:46 C6_ Sat Disch *30349 *ADF:47
Compressor #6 Disch SH AV:47 C6_Disch SH *30350 *ADF:48
Compressor #6 Suct SH AV:48 C6_Suct SH *30348 *ADF:49
Compressor #6 Oil Pres Diff AV:68 C6_Oil Pres Diff *30380 *ADF:69
Compressor #7 FLA% AV:49 C7_FLA% *30325 *ADF:50
Compressor #7 Sat Suction AV:52 C7_Sat Suct *30351 *ADF:53
Compressor #7 Sat Disch AV:53 C7_ Sat Disch *30353 *ADF:54
Compressor #7 Disch SH AV:54 C7_Disch SH *30354 *ADF:55
Compressor #7 Suct SH AV:55 C7_Suct SH *30352 *ADF:56
Compressor #7 Oil Pres Diff AV:69 C7_Oil Pres Diff *30381 *ADF:70
Compressor #8 FLA% AV:56 C8_FLA% *30326 *ADF:57
Compressor #8 Sat Suction AV:59 C8_Sat Suct *30352 *ADF:53
Compressor #8 Sat Suction AV:59 C8_Sat Suct *30355 *ADF:60
Compressor #8 Sat Disch AV:60 C8_ Sat Disch *30357 *ADF:61
Compressor #8 Disch SH AV:61 C8_Disch SH *30358 *ADF:62
Compressor #8 Suct SH AV:62 C8_Suct SH *30356 *ADF:63
Compressor #8 Oil Pres Diff AV:70 C8_Oil Pres Diff *30382 *ADF:71
Compressor #9 FLA% AV:440 C9_FLA% *30572 *ADF:441
Compressor #9 Sat Suction AV: 443 C9_Sat Suct *30584 *ADF: 442
Compressor #9 Sat Disch AV: 444 C9_ Sat Disch *30586 *ADF: 443
Compressor #9 Disch SH AV: 445 C9_Disch SH *30587 *ADF: 444
Compressor #9 Suct SH AV: 446 C9_Suct SH *30585 *ADF: 445
Compressor #9 Oil Pres Diff AV:524 C9_Oil Pres Diff *30656 *ADF:525
Compressor #10 FLA% AV:447 C10_FLA% *30573 *ADF:448
Compressor #10 Sat Suction AV: 450 C10_Sat Suct *30588 *ADF: 451
Compressor #10 Sat Disch AV: 451 C10_ Sat Disch *30590 *ADF: 452
Compressor #10 Disch SH AV: 452 C10_Disch SH *30591 *ADF: 453
Compressor #10 Suct SH AV: 453 C10_Suct SH *30589 *ADF: 454
Compressor #10 Oil Pres Diff AV:525 C10_Oil Pres Diff *30657 *ADF:526
Compressor #11 FLA% AV:454 C11_FLA% *30574 *ADF:455
Compressor #11 Sat Suction AV: 457 C11_Sat Suct *30592 *ADF: 458
Compressor #11 Sat Disch AV: 458 C11_ Sat Disch *30594 *ADF: 459
Compressor #11 Disch SH AV: 459 C11_Disch SH *30595 *ADF: 460
Compressor #11 Suct SH AV: 460 C11_Suct SH *30593 *ADF: 461
Compressor #11 Oil Pres Diff AV: 526 C11_Oil Pres Diff *30658 *ADF: 527
Compressor #12 FLA% AV: 461 C12_FLA% *30575 *ADF: 462
Compressor #12 Sat Suction AV: 464 C12_Sat Suct *30596 *ADF: 465
Compressor #12 Sat Disch AV: 465 C12_ Sat Disch *30598 *ADF: 466
Compressor #12 Disch SH AV: 466 C12_Disch SH *30599 *ADF: 467
Compressor #12 Suct SH AV: 467 C12_Suct SH *30597 *ADF 468
Compressor #12 Oil Pres Diff AV:527 C12_Oil Pres Diff *30659 *ADF:528
Compressor #13 FLA% AV:468 C13_FLA% *30576 *ADF:469
Compressor #13 Sat Suction AV: 471 C13_Sat Suct *30600 *ADF: 470
Compressor #13 Sat Disch AV: 472 C13_ Sat Disch *30602 *ADF: 473
Compressor #13 Disch SH AV: 473 C13_Disch SH *30603 *ADF: 474
Compressor #13 Suct SH AV: 474 C13_Suct SH *30600 *ADF: 475
131
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2

Compressor #13 Oil Pres Diff AV: 528 C13_Oil Pres Diff *30661 *ADF: 529
Compressor #14 FLA% AV: 475 C14_FLA% *30577 *ADF: 476
Compressor #14 Sat Suction AV: 478 C14_Sat Suct *30604 *ADF: 479
Compressor #14 Sat Disch AV: 479 C14_ Sat Disch *30606 *ADF: 480
Compressor #14 Disch SH AV: 480 C14_Disch SH *30607 *ADF: 481
Compressor #14 Suct SH AV: 481 C14_Suct SH *30605 *ADF: 482
Compressor #14 Oil Pres Diff AV: 529 C14_Oil Pres Diff *30661 *ADF: 530
Compressor #15 FLA% AV: 482 C15_FLA% *30578 *ADF: 483
Compressor #15 Sat Suction AV: 485 C15_Sat Suct *30608 *ADF: 486
Compressor #15 Sat Disch AV: 486 C15_ Sat Disch *30610 *ADF: 487
Compressor #15 Disch SH AV: 487 C15_Disch SH *30611 *ADF: 488
Compressor #15 Suct SH AV: 488 C15_Suct SH *30609 *ADF: 489
Compressor #15 Oil Pres Diff AV: 530 C15_Oil Pres Diff *3062 *ADF: 531
Compressor #16 FLA% AV: 489 C16_FLA% *30579 *ADF: 490
Compressor #16 Sat Suction AV: 492 C16_Sat Suct *30612 *ADF: 493
Compressor #16 Sat Disch AV: 493 C16_ Sat Disch *30614 *ADF: 494
Compressor #16 Disch SH AV: 494 C16_Disch SH *30615 *ADF: 495
Compressor #16 Suct SH AV: 495 C16_Suct SH *30613 *ADF: 496
Compressor #16 Oil Pres Diff AV: 531 C16_Oil Pres Diff *30663 *ADF: 532
Compressor #17 FLA% AV: 496 C17_FLA% *30580 *ADF: 497
Compressor #17 Sat Suction AV: 499 C17_Sat Suct *30616 *ADF: 500
Compressor #17 Sat Disch AV: 500 C17_ Sat Disch *30618 *ADF: 501
Compressor #17 Disch SH AV: 501 C17_Disch SH *30619 *ADF: 502
Compressor #17 Suct SH AV: 502 C17_Suct SH *30617 *ADF: 503
Compressor #17 Oil Pres Diff AV: 532 C17_Oil Pres Diff *30664 *ADF: 533
Compressor #18 FLA% AV: 503 C18_FLA% *30581 *ADF: 504
Compressor #18 Sat Suction AV: 506 C18_Sat Suct *30620 *ADF: 507
Compressor #18 Sat Disch AV: 507 C18_ Sat Disch *30622 *ADF: 508
Compressor #18 Disch SH AV: 508 C18_Disch SH *30623 *ADF: 509
Compressor #18 Suct SH AV: 509 C18_Suct SH *30621 *ADF: 510
Compressor #18 Oil Pres Diff AV: 533 C18_Oil Pres Diff *30665 *ADF: 534
Compressor #19 FLA% AV: 510 C19_FLA% *30582 *ADF: 511
Compressor #19 Sat Suction AV: 513 C19_Sat Suct *30624 *ADF: 514
Compressor #19 Sat Disch AV: 514 C19_ Sat Disch *30626 *ADF: 515
Compressor #19 Disch SH AV: 515 C19_Disch SH *30627 *ADF: 516
Compressor #19 Suct SH AV: 516 C19_Suct SH *30625 *ADF: 517
Compressor #19 Oil Pres Diff AV: 534 C19_Oil Pres Diff *30666 *ADF: 535
Compressor #20 FLA% AV: 517 C20_FLA% *30583 *ADF: 518
Compressor #20 Sat Suction AV: 520 C20_Sat Suct *30628 *ADF: 521
Compressor #20 Sat Disch AV: 521 C20_ Sat Disch *30630 *ADF: 522
Compressor #20 Disch SH AV: 522 C20_Disch SH *30631 *ADF: 523
Compressor #20 Suct SH AV: 523 C20_Suct SH *30629 *ADF: 524
Compressor #20 Oil Pres Diff AV: 535 C20_Oil Pres Diff *30667 *ADF: 536
*- Indicates value multiplied by 10 to include one decimal place. (I.e. BMS value of 500 indicates actual value 50.0)

29.7. Network inputs to MCS-Magnum

The MCS-Magnum can receive changes from the network to enable or disable the Network Run/Stop, Network Target
Reset (adjustments to the Cooling Target, Setpoint #1, based on Setpoint #21), Network Demand FLA, and Network
Demand Steps.

132
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

The MCS-Magnum must be setup to accept these inputs. The configuration file must contain a Network Run/Stop,
Network Target, Network Demand FLA, and Network Demand Steps sensors.
Magnum BACnet ID BACnet Name Modbus N2
Network Run/Stop AV:246 Net_R/S 40201 BO:247
Network Target/Reset AV:247 Net_Tar/Res 40202 AO:248
Network Demand/FLA AV:248 Net_Demad_FLA 40204 AO:249
Network Demand/Steps AV:249 Net_Demad_Steps 40205 AO:250
Note the following Information panel has a Network Run/Stop, and /or Network Target Reset sensors inputs indicated.
This is an example of how MCS-Config must be setup in the General Information and Evaporator Information panels.

The sensors must be set up as follows (This is only an example)

133
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Chapter - 30. REFR Unit and Compressor State Chart

BMS Points Unit State Chart BMS Points RTU Building Mode Chart
State # State # State # State #
MCS & Modbus BACnet State Text/Name MCS & Modbus BACnet State Text/Name
0 1 UNIT IN POWER UP 0 1 LOST IO LOCKED
1 2 POWER LOSS DELAY 1 2 CMP LOCKED OUT
2 3 NO RUN- I/O LOST 2 3 SWITCHED OFF
3 4 UNIT IN LOCKOUT 3 4 UNLD & PMPDWN
4 5 UNIT IS OFF 4 5 CMP ANTICYCLE
5 6 UNIT IS HOLDING 5 6 CMP OFF/READY
6 7 UNIT UNLOADING 6 7 OIL PMP LUBING
7 8 UNIT IS LOADING 7 8 CMP IS RUNNING
8 9 NO RUN - SAFETY 8 9 CMP UNLOADED
9 10 RUN/STOP SW OFF 9 10 CMP UNLD STEP1
10 11 SCHEDULED OFF 10 11 CMP UNLD STEP2
11 12 OFF-NO FLOW(s) 11 12 CMP IS HOLDING
12 13 OFF-NO COND FLOW 12 13 CMP IS LOADING
13 14 AMBIENT OFF 13 14 CMP IS UNLDING
14 15 PROCESS HEAT OFF 14 15 CMP IS RUNNING
15 16 UNIT IS UNLOADED 15 16 FAST UNLOADING
16 17 UNIT IS LOADED 16 17 LO SUCT UNLOAD
17 18 OFF TMP-ICE MADE 17 18 LO SUCT HOLD
18 19 ECONOMIZER ONLY 18 19 HI DISC UNLOAD
19 20 SWITCHING MODES 19 20 HI DISC HOLD
20 21 DEF-STARTING CMP 20 21 SAFETY TRIPPED
21 22 DEFROSTING COILS 21 22 LO TEMP UNLOAD
22 23 HI AMP UNLDING
BMS Points Unit Mode Chart 23 24 HI AMP HOLD
State # State # 24 25 HI DIS TMP HLD
MCS & Modbus BACnet State Text/Name 25 26 CMP IS AT 40%
0 1 CHILLER MODE 26 27 CMP IS AT 70%
1 2 ICE MAKING MODE
27 28 HI WATER HOLD
2 3 HEATING MODE
3 4 DEHUMID MODE 28 29 DEFROST EVAP#1
4 5 VENT ONLY 29 30 DRIP DOWN #1
5 6 DEHUMID MODE 30 31 DEFROST EVAP#2
6 7 OFF
31 32 DRIP DOWN #2
7 8 SWITCHING MODES
8 9 COOLING w/HEAT 32 33 DEF-START COMP
9 10 HEATING w/COOL 33 34 DEF-PUMP DOWN
10 11 DEFROSTING 34 35 DEFROST COILS
35 36 DEF-AIR NORMAL
36 37 DEF-AIR HOTGAS
37 38 CMP OFF/D-DOWN
38 39 CMP OFF/DefAIR
134
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

MCS-MAGNUM BMS PROTOCOLS

The following Protocols are available with the Magnum. Changes can be made to the settings using the Keypad or
can be made using MCS-CONNECT SERVICE WINDOW.
1. BACnet IP
2. MCS PROTOCOL
3. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
4. ETHERNET PROTOCOL (this protocol is always active)
5. MODBUS IP (this protocol is always active)

30.8.1 BACNET OVER IP PROTOCOL

The BACNET DEVICE ID is a five-digit number. The first three digits are based on MCS’s Bacnet Vendor ID 181, and
the last two are set by the Bacnet/MSTP address.
181 XX
↓ ↓
Bacnet Bacnet IP
MCS181 Address
In case the end user would like to set up an ID other than 181-XX, there is an extended BACnet setting that can only be
set in MCS Config.
The following changes can be made using the Keypad or can be made using MCS-CONNECT
SERVICE WINDOW.
The BACnet IP address can be verified and changed (with the proper authorization code) from the Keypad/LCD. The
following steps will display the Bacnet IP Network address, and the the TCP/IP port:
„„ Press the Menu key, select Serv Tools, and then press the Enter key.
„„ Use  arrow to BACnet Setting then press Enter.
„„ Select address then press Enter. Change the address so it matches the last two digits of the device
ID then press Enter.
„„ Use  arrow to tab to the TCP/IP address.
„„ Select address then press Enter. Change the address and port to match your device.

30.8.2 ETHERNET NETWORK PROTOCOL

The following steps will display the ETHERNET NETWORK settings:
If you are going to manually assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
„„ Press the Menu key, select Serv Tools, and then press the Enter key.
„„ Select Ethernet Network then press Enter.
„„ Set “DYNAMIC IP” to NO.
„„ Set the “IP Address”.
„„ Set the “Subnet Mask”.
„„ Set “Default Gateway”.
„„ Reset Magnum for change to take effect.
If you are going to let your network assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway:
„„ Press the Menu key, select Serv Tools, and then press the Enter key.
„„ Select Ethernet Network then press Enter.
„„ Set “DYNAMIC IP” to YES.
„„ Connect the MCS-Magnum to the network and power up the board.

135
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

29.7.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

The Modbus RTU address can be verified and changed (with the proper authorization code) from the keypad/LCD or
can be made using MCS-CONNECT SERVICE WINDOW.
The following steps will display the Modbus RTU Network address, and the Baud Rate:
„„ Press the Menu key, select Serv Tools, and then press the Enter key.
„„ Select RS485 Network then press Enter.
„„ Select Protocol then press Enter. Change the protocol to Modbus RTU.
„„ Select address then press Enter. Change the address then press Enter.
„„ Select Baud then press Enter. Set the baud rate then press Enter.
„„ Connect the communication wires to the TX RS485 three-position terminal located above the Ethernet
connector.
„„ Reset Magnum for change to take effect.

29.7.2 MODBUS TCP/IP PROTOCOL

This protocol is always active.
Make sure the MCS-Magnum network settings are set correctly.
If you are going to manually assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
Press the Menu key, select Serv Tools, and then press the Enter key.
„„ Select Ethernet Network then press Enter.
„„ Set “DYNAMIC IP” to NO.
„„ Set the “IP Address”.
„„ Set the “Subnet Mask”.
„„ Set “Default Gateway”.
„„ Reset Magnum for change to take effect.

If you are going to let your network assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway:
„„ Press the Menu key, select Serv Tools, and then press the Enter key.
„„ Select Ethernet Network then press Enter.
„„ Set “DYNAMIC IP” to YES.
„„ Connect the MCS-Magnum to the network and power up the board.

29.8. PROTOCOLS USING MCS-BMS-GATEWAY

The MCS-BMS-GATEWAY is a microprocessor based communication device that provides translation from
BACnet IP to LonTalk, BACnet MSTP, or Johnson Control N2.
Information that can be transmitted includes the status of control points, alarm information, digital inputs, ana-
log inputs or setpoints.
For more information on the MCS-BMS-GATEWAY please go to www.mcscontrols.com.

136
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

Chapter - 31. NETWORK PROTOCOLS

Network protocols are formatting rules that specify how data is sent and received between devices.
Protocols are necessary for devices to interact with each other.

31.1. Protocols MCS controllers support:

1. BACNET
2. MODBUS RTU
3. ETHERNET
4. MCS
5. LONTALK
6. JOHNSON N2

Over
Ethernet

Over
RS485

Over
LonWorks

Requires MCS-BMS-GATEWAY

137
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

31.2. MCS-MAGNUM USING RS-485

Using the RS485, the MCS-Magnum can be connected to the BMS (Modbus RTU or MCS 485)

MCS-MAGNUM

Building
MCS-MAGNUM .. Management
. System

RS485

MCS-MAGNUM

138
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

31.3. Wiring Multiple MCS Controllers

„„ Using the RS485, the network must be wired controller to controller

„„ Star configurations not allowed

„„ Up to 30 controllers can be wired together

139
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

31.4. MCS-MAGNUM USING ETHERNET

„„ Using the Ethernet, the MCS-Magnum can be connected to:

„„ BMS (Bacnet IP or Modbus IP)

„„ MCS-Touch (MCS-Connect)

„„ PC (MCS-Connect)

„„ Internet access through router (which allows connection via MCS-Connect from anywhere)

Or

Or

Or
Ethernet

140
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

31.5. EXAMPLE NETWORK

31.5.1 Standalone MCS-Magnum
„„ MCS-Touch

„„ BMS (Johnson N2 or LonTalk or Bacnet MSTP)

„„ Internet Access

RS485 or
LonWorks

Building
Management
System
MCS-BMS-Gateway

Internet
Ethernet
Router

MCS-Touch

141
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

31.5.2 MULTIPLE MCS-MAGNUM ENCLOSURES

„„ Internet Access

„„ BMS (Bacnet IP or Modbus IP)

Rooftop/Chiller #1 Rooftop/Chiller #2

Ethernet

Building
Management Internet
System Router

142
MCS-MAGNUM-BMS- Refrig.

31.6. MULTIPLE MCS-MAGNUM BMS RS485 WIRING DIAGRAM

143
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

Chapter - 32. Set Point Definitions

# (Number)–From 1 to 255 (maximum number of Setpoints supported). Only active Setpoints will be
displayed in
MCS-Connect and on the keypad display.

Name–The Setpoint’s name consists of up to 12 characters. The name is displayed follow-

ing the number on the LCD display. The Setpoint name can be changed to make it more meaningful to the
current application, however the function of the Setpoint will remain the same.

Value–The value or target of the Setpoint. With proper authorization this value can be changed,
within limits that
have been established in MCS-Config.

Min–The minimum value that can be set. This field is not displayed and cannot be changed in
MCS-Connect or in
the keypad display.

Max–The maximum value that can be set. This field is not displayed and cannot be changed in
MCS-Connect or in
the keypad display.

Adjust Value–The interval that the value field can be changed by. This field is not displayed
and cannot be
changed in MCS-Connect or in the keypad display.

‘Time (sec)’ – this field has two purposes:

1) In either a LOCKOUT or ALARM type; this is the length of time the Setpoint must be true before it will trip.
This time is always in seconds and it is displayed on the keypad display and MCS-Connect if the Setpoint is
either a LOCKOUT or ALARM type. This field can be changed in MCS-Connect and through the keypad.
2) In a non-safety type Setpoint this field can be used as an extra timer. This will be specified in the Setpoint
definition if it is used.
Lockout Delay Hrs. – If a second safety occurs within this time, the unit or compressor will be locked
out. This field is not displayed and cannot be changed through MCS-Connect or in the keypad display.
Safety Down Time (min.) – After the first safety occurs the Magnum will wait this number of
minutes before the unit or associated compressor is allowed to run again.
Active or Non-Active – Only active Setpoints will be displayed in MCS-Connect or on the keypad dis-
play, but only if the needed authorization level has been achieved.

Select Value: # decimals and print char – This indicates the number of decimal places and the
unit character that accompanies the value displayed. The number of decimal places is crucial when the
Value, Minimum, and Maximum data is entered in MCS-Config.

Level of Auth. To Display – This column indicates what authorization level a user must have in order
to view the Setpoint from MCS-Connect or the keypad display.

Comments – This column allows the user to add comments about the function of the Setpoint.
BMS Writeable (Click Here to Disable All) – The Magnum software will enable communica-
tions with an outside source, building management system (BMS), to modify the value of a set point.
Object is to provide maximum flexibility and capability with an BMS.

144
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

32.1. Setpoint Types

There are six different types of Setpoints. The Magnum software determines if a Setpoint contains a target
value or is a safety. If it is a safety then its type determines what action the Magnum will take when the safety
occurs (either locking out the unit or generating an alarm only).
32.1.1 SETPOINT
This type of Setpoint contains a target or provides information for some action. The time element in this type can be
used for an additional counter if specified. This time is not displayed and cannot be changed through MCS-Connect or
from the keypad display.
32.1.2 LOCKOUT
This type of Setpoint contains a safety value and the time that the safety must be violated before the safety will trip.
Once a safety has tripped the Magnum will take the appropriate action, shutting down the entire package or an individual
compressor depending on the purpose of the safety. The Magnum will then wait the Safety Down Time contained in that
Setpoint before trying to return the normal. If successful, the system will continue to operate. If a second trip occurs on
the same Setpoint with in the Lock Out Delay Time that is contained in that Setpoint the system will move to a LOCKOUT
state. If the lockout delay time is set to zero the lockout will occur on the first trip. This requires manual intervention
to reset the system. With each safety trip, the Magnum will generate an alarm; refer to section 8 Magnum Alarms and
Safeties.
Sec. to ignore safety - If this value is not zero, at compressor startup this safety will be ignored for the time in this field.
Window to extend Safety ‘Time (sec)’ – If this value is not zero, at compressor startup the normal Safety Time will be
increased by the value in Safety Time Extension field for the time specified in this field.
Safety Time Extension (Sec) – This is the value that will be added to the Safety Time during the Window to extend
Safety Time period.
32.1.3 ALARM
This type of Setpoint has two uses:
1) When it is used as a safety, it will be similar to the LOCKOUT Setpoint except it will never cause a lock out. The
system will continue to try returning to normal operation after waiting the safety down time. An ALARM Setpoint type will
never require manual intervention to reset the system.
2) When the Setpoint is being used as a second timer it will be available to change in a live unit. If the type is not
changed to ALARM then the time field cannot be viewed or changed from a live unit.
Sec. to ignore safety - If this value is not zero, at compressor startup this safety will be ignored for the time in this field.
Window to extend Safety ‘Time (sec)’ – If this value is not zero, at compressor startup the normal Safety Time will be
increased by the value in Safety Time Extension field for the time specified in this field.
Safety Time Extension (Sec) – This is the value that will be added to the Safety Time during the Window to extend
Safety Time period.
32.1.4 Time
This type of Setpoint allows the ‘Time (SEC)’ value to be displayed and modified in a live unit.
32.1.5 Target
This type of set point is used to develop a target with a high and low zone values.
The decimal characteristics of these values are the same as the Value field
High Zone – The value of this cell is added to the Value cell to create the high zone value.
Low Zone – The value of this cell is subtracted from the Value cell to create the low zone value.
Night Setback – If system has an unoccupied mode, this value is used to modify the value of the ‘Value’ cell.
32.1.6 Delay
This type of set point is used to develop a target with a high and low zone values.
The decimal characteristics of these values are the same as the Value field
High Zone – The value of this cell is added to the Value cell to create the high zone value.
Low Zone – The value of this cell is subtracted from the Value cell to create the low zone value.
Night Setback – If system has an unoccupied mode, this value is used to modify the value of the ‘Value’ cell.

145
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

32.2. Window/Safety extension

32.2.1 Time and seconds to ignore for setpoints

Seconds to ignore – This is the time in seconds to ignore the associated safety at compressor start
up.

The window to extend safety time and safety time extension fields work together.

Window to extend safety – This value in seconds is the time window when the compressor starts
that the safety time extension is added to the safety time(sec) value.

Safety time extension – This value is the time that is added to the time(sec) value during the
window to extend safety time(sec) time.

Example – Unsafe suction setpoint has a 3 second safety trip. So if we add a 120 to our window to extend
safety, we will then be telling the controller at startup we’re going to extend that 3 second safety trip for 120
seconds. This is where the Safety time extension comes into play. If we put a 6 in this field we’re telling the
controller for the first 120 seconds at startup we’re extending the safety trip time to 9 seconds (3 second
trip plus the 6 second extension). Once the 120 seconds expires we will then revert back to a 3 second trip time
for the duration of the compressors run time till the next startup.

146
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

32.3. Set points for MAG REFR V17 Software

1 CTL TARGET Control target. This value is used as the base to develop the Control Zone. Refer
to setpoints # 2 and #3.
The control target is used with the control zone and rate of change of the control-
ling sensor to determine required action for the system. The controlling sensor is
usually one of the following:
Leaving Temperature – Most common used as a target, fitting for most applica-
tions.
Return Temperature – Used in sites with large air masses, ice rinks, common
areas, etc.
Suction Pressure – Used in continuously running process systems.
2 CTL ZONE + Added to the CTL TARGET to create the upper limit of the control zone.
3 CTL ZONE - Subtracted from the CTL TARGET to create the lower limit of the control zone.
4 HGS TEMP ON This setpoint is used with screw compressors with a hot gas bypass solenoid.
When this setpoint is active and the control temperature is less than the CTL
TARGET plus the value in this setpoint and the FLA % is within 25% of setpoint
#31 “MIN SLIDE%”, the hot gas bypass solenoid for the compressor will be
turned on.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If this field is not zero, it is added to setpoint #31 to determine
when the hot gas solenoid is to be turned on. If zero, then the value of 2.5 is
added.
5 HGS TEMP OFF This setpoint is used with screw compressors with a hot gas bypass solenoid.
When this setpoint is active and the control temperature is greater than the CTL
TARGET plus the value in this setpoint or the FLA % is not within 25% of set-
point #31 “MIN SLIDE%”, the hot gas bypass solenoid for the compressor will be
turned off.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If this field is not zero, it is added to setpoint #31 to determine
when the hot gas solenoid is to be turned off. If zero, then the value of 3.0 is
added.
6 HGS PSI ON This setpoint is used with screw compressors with a hot gas bypass solenoid.
** not used When this setpoint is active and the suction pressure is less than the value of
this setpoint and the FLA % is within 25% of the setpoint #31 “MIN SLIDE%”, the
hot gas bypass solenoid for the compressor will be turned on.
7 HGS PSI OFF This setpoint is used with screw compressors with a hot gas bypass solenoid.
** not used When this setpoint is active and the suction pressure is greater than the value of
this setpoint or the FLA % is not within 25% of the setpoint #31 “MIN SLIDE%”,
the hot gas bypass solenoid for the compressor will be turned off.
8 L.INJECT.ON This setpoint can be used for both liquid injection solenoids.
** not used Value: Liquid injection is turned on when the discharge temperature is greater
than or equal to this setpoint, and is turned off when the discharge temperature
is less than this setpoint minus 10.0°F (5.5°C).
‘Time (sec)’ field: If the first liquid injection solenoid has been on for a time
greater than this value, then turn on the second liquid injection solenoid.
9 SPRHT TARGET If EXV control is based upon superheat, this is the Superheat target that the
or system will control from.
LEVEL TARGET If EXV control is based upon refrigerant level, this is the refrigerant level target
that the system will control from.
‘Low Zone’ if nonzero then develop control super heat based upon the lowest
superheat of any compressor that is on with in this suction group else use the
superheat of this compressor.
‘Time (sec)’ field: Seconds between samples used for calculating the Superheat
Rate of Change.
10 SPRHT ZONE +- The value in this setpoint is added and subtracted to setpoint #9 to determine
the upper and lower limits of the control zone respectively.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If non-zero, skip ROC adjustment logic in the control zone.
147
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

11 EXV LOAD ADJ The opening adjustment that will be made to the EXV percentage when the
circuit changes to the Loading state, or the closing adjustment that will be made
when the circuit changes to the Unloading state.
Note: In MOP hold state, only closing adjustments are allowed.
12 EXV FINE ADJ The adjustment is made when in the 1st zone above or below the control zone.
Refer to section on EXV control.
13 EXV COURSE If a course adjustment to the EXV when in the 2nd zone above or below the
control
zone.
If the type is TIME and the time (SEC) field is greater than 1 and less than 7 then
multiple the value field by the time field else multiple by 2 for adjustment amount.
If a course adjustment to the EXV when in the 3nd zone above or below the
control
zone. Multiple value by the by 2 for adjustment amount.
If a course adjustment to the EXV when above or below the 3nd zone the control
zone.
The value is the adjustment amount.
Refer to section on EXV control. If a course adjustment to the EXV when in the
3nd
zone above or below the control zone. Multiple value by the by 2 for adjustment
amount.
If a course adjustment to the EXV when above or below the 3nd zone the control
zone.
The value is the adjustment amount.
Refer to section on EXV control.
14 EXV LOAD DIV The EXV slide adjustment can be fined tuned by dividing by the value of this set
point.
Note the value of this set point is used regardless if the set point is active or not.
15 EXV MIN % This is the minimum valve position allowed when modulating the expansion
valve. This value should be set so when hot gas is applied the valve opening is
adequate.
Note the value of this set point is used regardless if it is active or not.
Refer to section on EXV control.Note the value of this set point is used regard-
less if it is
active or not.
16 EXV MAX % This is the maximum position allowed when modulating the expansion valve to
maintain the superheat target. This value should be the valve % opening at full
capacity plus a 10 to 15 % margin.
17 LO SUPERHEAT If super heat is less or equal to this value and the control slope is less that the
roc for
zone 3, make a slide adjustment of 3 times the value of set point #13.
If the calculated superheat remains below this value for the time specified in the
Time
(SEC) cell, the Magnum will generate a LOW SUPERHEAT alarm.
Refer to section on EXV control.
18 LOWSUCPSI DLY Delay in seconds when in ‘Low Suction PSI Opening’ between adjustments to
the EXV valve.
19 EXV DELAY Delay in seconds between valve adjustments. Should not be less than 48.
(When adjusting at 4x this will allow 12 seconds for the controller to process the
results of the last action before making the next adjustment)
20 EXV STRT TIME This is the time in seconds to hold the valve at the start % setpoint when the
compressor starts. Since the superheat calculation is not valid when the com-
pressor is not running the EXV logic sets the valve to a given position for a set
time to allow the system to develop a valid superheat.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If zero, then there is no delay when a compressor is ready to
start. If non-zero, this is the time delay in which the EXV valve is allowed to open
before the compressor starts.
148
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

21 MAX TRG RESET This value is used to adjust setpoint #1 “CTL TARGET”. The sensor input value
** not used will vary between 0 and 5 volts and the adjustment to the control target will be
modulated from negative “MAX TRG RESET” to the positive “MAX TRG RESET”
value.
22 LOW AMBIENT If the ambient temperature is below this value the system will be disabled and
the unit state will be AMBIENT OFF. The unit will remain off until the ambient
temperature rises above this setpoint value by 5.0F (2.5C).
23 POWERUP DELAY The time in seconds that the system will remain in the START UP state before
moving to the next state.
24 HI AMBIENT If the ambient temperature is above this value the system will be disabled and
the unit state will be AMBIENT OFF. The unit will remain off until the ambient
temperature drops below this setpoint value by 5.0F (2.5C).
25 STEP SENSTIY This value is used to adjust the rate of response to changes in the control
algorithm. 1 is the fastest response, whereas higher numbers will mean a more
gradual response. Used only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
26 STEP DELAY Value: This is the time delay before making adjustments to the system capacity.
Used with both the Magnum Control Zone and Voltage Step control method.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If used, this will force a minimum time delay between any two
compressor starts. This time delay is specified in the ‘Minimum Delay Between
Compressor Starts’ box in the ‘Compressor Information’ section under the MAG
REFR tab.
27 MAX ROC - Maximum negative Rate of Change allowed before preventing the unit from load-
ing. If the ROC is less than this value the capacity control state is set to HOLD-
ING. Used only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
28 MAX ROC + Maximum positive Rate of Change allowed before preventing the unit from un-
loading. If the ROC is greater than this value the capacity control state is set to
HOLDING. Used only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
29 ROC INTERV Seconds between samples used for calculating the Rate of Change. Used only
with the Magnum Control Zone control method. (Maximum 60 seconds)
30 MAX FLA % Indicates the maximum amp draw or speed allowed. Usually set to 100%, else
or compressors will load to the value of this setpoint until all steps are on, then the
MAX VFD % system will load to 100%.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If non-zero, then force individual compressors to stay at maxi-
mum capacity when another compressor starts. This option is selected in in the
‘Keep Running Comp at 100% when starting next?’ box in the ‘Compressor Infor-
mation’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
31 MIN FLA % Value: Indicates the minimum amp draw or speed allowed (usually 40%). This is
or where the slide valve or VFD will be set when the compressor is turned on. This
MIN VFD % % is a function of actual amp draw relative to the FLA.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If used, this forces a time delay before unloading all running
compressors before the next compressor is started. This time delay is specified
in the ‘Unload Compressor Before Starting Next’ box in the ‘Compressor Infor-
mation’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
‘Target’ field: Adds support to force the digital compressor speed to a different
min value if only the digital compressor is running on the suction group.
In order to use this new logic you must make setpoint #31 “Min Spd%” a “TAR-
GET” type and put in the Low Zone column the min speed value you want to
running the digital compressor when only the digital compressor is running on
the suction group.
32 MAX ADJUST % Indicates the maximum percentage change that can be made to the slide valve
or VFD.
‘Time (sec)’ field: A zero indicates that the calculated FLA will be used, else the
value in setpoint #31 will be used when starting the next compressor. This value
is specified in the ‘Wanted FLA starting next Compressor’ box in the ‘Compres-
sor Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab.

149
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

33 MIN ADJUST % Indicates the minimum percentage change that can be made to the slide valve or
the VFD.
34 SLIDE SENSITY This controls the sensitivity of the adjustment made to the Wanted Percentage
(adjustments are relative to the difference between the current control sensor
and target). The larger the value the larger the adjustment (usually 1).
35 LOAD PULSE Length of time to engage the slide valve load solenoid in tenths of a second
(usually between 1 and 9).
‘Time (sec)’ field: If non-zero, use this value as a multiplier to increase the load
pulse when the compressor’s amp draw is more than twice the value of setpoint
#36 “AMP DB LO”.
36 UNLOAD PULSE Length of time to engage th e slide valve unload solenoid in tenths of a sec-
ond (usually between 1 and 9).
37 LUBE OIL TMP Safety. If oil seal temperature sensor and this set point is active then when the
compressor is running the oil temperature will be checked for a low condition
based on the values in this set point.
38 LUBE OIL PSI The oil must reach this pressure before the circuit will move out of the LUBE
** not used state.
39 LUBE DELAY This is the maximum time that a compressor can be in the LUBE state. When
this time is exceeded, an alarm is generated and the compressor is locked out.
Both the oil temperature and pressure must be satisfied before the LUBE state
will be exited. Refer to the OIL PMP LUBING state.
40 CND STG1 ON When the discharge pressure is above this value, turn on the first stage of the
(Air cooled) condenser fans.
‘Time (sec)’ field: (Applies to compressors with shared condensers) If non-zero,
then the compressor in startup state will not be in sole control of the condenser
fans, it will control off of highest discharge pressure. If zero, then compressor in
startup will have sole condenser control for 5 minutes. This option is selected in
in the ‘Newly started Comp Controls Common Fan Bank’ box in the ‘Condenser
Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
PID MOD Individual If active, multiplier uses PID condenser control KP (Proportional). Setup as
PID Step Comm setpoint.
41 CND STG1 OFF If stage 1 of condenser capacity is on and the discharge pressure drops below
(RO Type) this value, then turn this stage off.
PID MOD Individual If active, uses Multiplier for Ki adjustments (Integral Time Delay). Setup as set-
PID Step Common point
42 CND DIFF ON Differential pressure added to setpoint #45 to set the threshold at which each
(RO Type) additional stage of condenser capacity will turn on.
PID MOD Individual If active, uses Multiplier for Kd adjustments, (ROC Time Delay). Setup as Target.
PID Step Common
44 CND MIN RUN Once a condenser stage has been turned on, it will remain on for at least the
(Modulating Type) amount of minutes specified in this setpoint.
DUAL TIME DELAY Time delay once the pressure difference in setpoint #48 has been reached be-
(Dual V8) fore the second condenser stage can be started.
45 LO AMB COND
** OFF
not used
46 CND PSI TARG Target discharge pressure which the condenser valve will try to maintain by
(Modulating Type) modulating open or closed.

150
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

47 CND ADJ DIV Controls scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted (Usually 1). The larger the
(Modulating Type) number the smaller the valve adjustment as the adjustment will be divided by
this value.
CND VFD MIN If there is a VFD associated with the condenser, this is the starting minimum
speed.
‘Time (sec)’ field: This field contains the condenser stage that must be on before
the VFD is modulated.
48 CND MIN SPD Minimum valve opening percentage allowed.
(Modulating Type) If the compressor is off, then check the ‘Time (sec)’ field:
If 0, then set the VFD to the value of this setpoint. If 2 and the run/stop is set
to run, then set the VFD to 100%, else set the VFD to 0%. This option is selected
in in the ‘Default Valve Opening % when Comp. is OFF’ box in the ‘Condenser
Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
49 CND ROC- Maximum negative discharge pressure rate of change allowed. If the rate of
(Modulating Type) change is less than this setpoint, then stop opening the valve. The absolute val-
ue of this setpoint also serves as the maximum positive rate of change allowed.
If the rate of change is greater than the absolute value of this setpoint, then stop
closing the valve.
50 CND MIN SPD Minimum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
(Modulating Type)
CND ADJ MULT Allows scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted. The larger the number the
(Modulating Type) larger the valve adjustment will be multiplied by this value.
51 CND MAX SPD Maximum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
(Modulating Type)
52 COND LOW AMB Standard condenser logic dictates that a newly started compressor will use its
own discharge pressure as the control for the first five minutes. If this setpoint is
active and the ambient temperature sensor is reading less than the value of this
setpoint, then this compressor’s discharge pressure will remain in control for the
additional time in seconds as specified in the ‘Time (sec)’ field.
53 LOW AMBIENT
** OFF
not used
54 COND HI AMB If active, standard condenser control on compressor startup logic will be by-
passed when there is a high ambient temperature. If the condenser type is
common and the ambient temperature is above the value of this setpoint, then
the compressor with the highest discharge pressure will have control of the
condenser.
55 COND FAULT For Condensers with Fault Indicators: If setpoint is active, a condenser fault oc-
curs, and the setpoint type is Alarm, then an alarm message will be generated.
If the type is Lockout, and a condenser fault occurs, then all of the compressors
associated with this fault will be locked off.
For Common VFD Fan Condensers with Bypass: Time in seconds before the
bypass can be used when a fault has occurred.
56 COND PHASE If this set point is active and a digital input has been selected for the Condenser
Fault 1 Phase Failure 1 when the compressor is on this digital input will be checked. If
the digital input is on for the Time specified for this set point, the circuit will enter
a safety state and an alarm will be generated indicating which circuit has the
failure.
57 COND PHASE If this set point is active and a digital input has been selected for the Condenser
Fault 2 Phase Failure 2 when the compressor is on this digital input will be checked. If
the digital input is on for the Time specified for this set point, the circuit will enter
a safety state and an alarm will be generated indicating which circuit has the
failure.

151
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

58 CFG TESTING This must be setup as ‘Non-Active. If active the system will not lockout when an
I/O communications signal is lost. This setpoint should NOT be active in a live
unit.
59 ACYC OFF->ON This is the anti-cycle time delay (in seconds) from when the compressor was
turned off. The compressor must wait the time frame (in seconds) in this set-
point, from last shutting off, before being allowed to start again.
60 ACYC ON->ON This is the anti-cycle time delay (in seconds) from when the compressor was
turned on. The compressor must wait the time (in seconds) in this setpoint, from
last start, before being allowed to start again.
61 PMP CUT IN
** not used
62 PMP DWN OFF This is the suction pressure value for turning off the compressor when in the
PUMP DOWN or for opening the liquid line solenoid during the PRE-PUMP
down state.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If non-zero, then the system will bypass the pre-pump down
state. This option is selected in the ‘Pre-Pump Out’ box in the ‘Compressor In-
formation’ section under the MAG V8 tab.
63 PMP DWN DELY Maximum time delay (in seconds) that a compressor can remain in the PUMP
DOWN or PRE-PUMP down states.
64 COMP MIN RUN This is the minimum run time (in minutes) for a compressor once it is turned on.
This minimum run time can be overridden by a safety condition, however.
65 STARTER DLAY This setpoint controls the start of a compressor’s second relay.
If the ‘Select Value: # decimals & print char’ cell is set to ‘HUMD or %’ then logic
is:
If the slide amp percentage is less than the value of this setpoint and the first
relay has been on for 2 seconds or it has been on longer than the value in the
safety time of this setpoint, then turn on the second relay. Else it is off.
If the ‘Select Value: # decimals & print char’ cell is set to ‘Seconds’ then the set-
point’s value is a time delay between the first and second relay’s starts. Used for
part wind (typical value of 1) and star delta (typical value of 5) starter.
66 OIL PUMP OFF If oil pump is set up to cycle and discharge psi minus, etc.(specified in MCS-
** not used Config), this Setpoint is not used.
If Discharge PSI minus Suction PSI is less than Setpoint #74 minus 10
PSI than turn on the oil pump RO.
If Discharge PSI minus Suction PSI is greater than Setpoint #74, turn off the oil
pump RO.
67 HI AMPS This setpoint is a percentage of the FLA; it is used to create the high amp draw
limit. The value of this setpoint is multiplied by the respective compressor’s full
load amps setpoint (#171 through #190) to obtain its upper limit. If the compres-
sor’s amps exceed this value for the time specified in this setpoint, then a safety
trip occurs.
68 LO AMPS This setpoint is a percentage of the FLA; it is used to create the low amp draw
limit. The value of this setpoint is multiplied by the respective compressor’s full
load amps setpoint (#171 through #190) to obtain its lower limit. If the compres-
sor’s amps fall below this value for the time specified in this setpoint, then a
safety trip occurs.
69 LOW SUCTION If active, the system checks for low suction pressure for each running compres-
sor. If suction pressure is less than this value for the specified period of time, a
safety trip occurs.
Refers to ‘Suction Pressure’ column in the Circuit SI screen.

152
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

70 LO SUCT UNLD The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action to prevent a low suc-
tion pressure safety trip. For fixed step compressors: If a compressor has more
than one step, is fully loaded, and if the suction pressure is less than the value
of setpoint #77 “LOW SUCTION” plus the value of this setpoint, then one step
of capacity will be turned off. For infinite step compressors: If a compressor has
a suction pressure less than the value of setpoint #69 “LOW SUCTION” plus
the value of this setpoint, then the compressor will be forced to unload. The
circuit state will be changed to LO SUCT HOLD, and will remain in this state for
a minimum of the time in setpoint #90 “SAFETY HOLD DELAY”. At that time, if
the suction pressure has increased greater than the value of setpoint #69 “LOW
SUCTION” plus the value of setpoint #79 “LOW SUCT RELD” the compressor
will return to normal control.
71 LOW SUCT RELD Refer to setpoint #78 description.
72 UNSAFE SUCT If active, the system checks for unsafely low suction pressure for each running
compressor. If suction pressure is less than this value for the specified period of
time a lockout occurs. NOTE: The time period specified should be very short (2-5
seconds). If this setpoint trips, the compressor will be sent straight to the Lockout
state.
Refers to ‘Suction Pressure’ column in the Circuit SI screen.
73 HI DISCH PSI If active, the system checks for high discharge pressure for each running com-
pressor. If the discharge pressure sensor reads greater than this setpoint for the
specified period of time, a safety trip will occur.
Refers to ‘Discharge Pressure’ column in the Circuit SI screen.
74 HI DISC UNLD The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action to prevent a high dis-
charge pressure safety trip. For fixed step compressors: If a compressor has
more than one step, is fully loaded, and if the discharge pressure is more than
the value of setpoint #73 “HI DISCH PSI” minus the value of this setpoint,
then one step of capacity will be turned off. For infinite step compressors: If a
compressor has a discharge pressure more than the value of setpoint #73 “HI
DISCH PSI” minus the value of this setpoint, then the compressor will be forced
to unload. The circuit state will be changed to HI DISC HOLD, and will remain
in this state for a minimum of the time in setpoint #90 “SAFETY HOLD DELAY”.
At that time, if the discharge pressure has decreased below than the value of
setpoint #73 “HI DISCH PSI” minus the value of setpoint #75 “HI DISC RELD”
the compressor will return to normal control.
75 HI DISC RELD Refer to setpoint #74 description.
76 LO DISC SHEAT If the calculated discharge superheat is less than this value for the specified
period of time, a safety trip will occur. Also, there is an option in the Circuit Base
screen to tie a Relay Output to this setpoint that will activate whenever a low
discharge superheat condition occurs.
77 LO DISC PSI If active, the system checks for low discharge pressure. If the discharge sensor
reading is less than this value for the specified period of time, a safety trip oc-
curs.
78 HI RETURN TEMP Only active in Mistubishi compressors. If active the system will check for high
** Not used entering liquid temperature. If this temperature is greater than the value in this
setpoint, the circuit state will be HI WATER HOLD.
79 HI DISCH TMP If active, the system checks for high discharge temperature for each compressor.
If the discharge temperature sensor reading is greater than this setpoint for the
specified period of time, a safety trip will occur.
Refers to ‘Discharge Temperature’ column in the Circuit SI screen.

153
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

80 DIS TMP UNLD The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action to prevent a high dis-
charge temperature safety trip. For fixed step compressors: If a compressor has
more than one step, is fully loaded, and if the discharge temperature is more
than the value of setpoint #79 “HI DISCH TMP” minus the value of this setpoint,
then one step of capacity will be turned off. For infinite step compressors: If a
compressor has a discharge temperature more than the value of setpoint #79
“HI DISCH TMP” minus the value of this setpoint, then the compressor will be
forced to unload. The circuit state will be changed to HI DISC HOLD, and will
remain in this state for a minimum of the time in setpoint #90 “SAFETY HOLD
DELAY”. At that time, if the discharge temperature has decreased below than
the value of setpoint #79 “HI DISCH TMP” minus the value of setpoint #81 “DIS
TMP RELD” the compressor will return to normal control.
81 DIS TMP RELD Refer to setpoint #80 description.
82 LOW OIL DIF If active, the system checks for low differential oil pressure. If the calculated
differential oil pressure is less than this value for the specified period of time, a
safety trip occurs.
Refers to ‘Oil Pressure’ column in the Circuit SI screen.
83 UNSAFE OIL If active, the system checks for unsafe differential oil pressure. If the calculated
differential oil pressure is less than this value for the specified period of time,
a lockout occurs. NOTE: The time period specified should be very short (2-5
seconds). If this setpoint trips, the compressor will be sent straight to the Lockout
state.
Refers to ‘Oil Pressure’ column in the Circuit SI screen.
84 HI OIL SEAL If the oil seal or oil cooler temperature exceeds the value of this setpoint for the
time specified, a safety trip occurs.
Refers to ‘Oil Seal Temp’ column in Circuit SI screen.
85 HI OIL TEMP If active, the system checks for high oil temperature. The sensor can be either
an analog or digital input. If the oil temperature sensor reading is ON (Digital) or
exceeding the temperature value of this setpoint (Analog) for the specified period
of time, a safety trip occurs.
Refers to ‘Oil Temp’ column in the Circuit SI screen.
86 MOTOR FAULT If active, the system checks for high motor temperature. The sensor can be
either an analog or digital input. If the motor temperature sensor reading is ON
(Digital) or exceeding the temperature value of this setpoint (Analog) for the
specified period of time, a safety trip occurs.
Refers to ‘Motor Temp’ column in the Circuit SI screen.
87 NO CMP PROOF If active, when the compressor is called to be on by the controller, the system will
check for a digital input to indicate that the compressor is indeed running. If the
controller calls for a compressor to turn on and no proof is given in the specified
period of time, a safety trip occurs.
Refers to ‘Comp Proof’ column in the Circuit Base screen
88 DIRTY FILTER If discharge pressure minus oil filter pressure is greater than this value for the
time specified, a safety trip occurs.
89 HIGH SUMP TEMP If active, and sump temperature is above the value of this setpoint for the time
** not used specified, a HIGH SUMP TEMP alarm is generated and the unit is locked out.
90 SAFETY HOLD Time in seconds that the circuit will remain in a hold state after the condition that
DELAY caused it has returned to normal. The circuit can be holding for the following
(only used with vari- reasons:
able type of com- Low suction pressure
pressors) Low refrigerant temperature
High discharge pressure
High discharge temperature
High amperage
91 PUMP FREEZE
** PROTECTION
not used
154
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

92 LEAD COMP Enables the user to specify the lead compressor. The value of this setpoint will
indicate the lead compressor. If zero, then auto rotation is enabled.
If the ‘Time (sec)’ field is non-zero the compressor with the least amount of run
time will become the lead compressor upon rotation.
93 COMP ROTATION Specifies the number of days between rotations (setpoint #92 must be set to
zero to enable auto rotation). If zero, then rotation will occur with every cycle.
94 LLS#2 ON This setpoint is used to control a second liquid line solenoid. When the capacity
** not used wanted is greater than this value (can either be number of steps for Fixed Step
compressors, or percentage of full load amps for Infinite Step compressors) for
the number of seconds in the ‘Time (sec)’ field, the second liquid line solenoid
will open. When the compressor capacity below this value for the number of sec-
onds in Delay Between Trips Field the second liquid line will be turned off.
‘Time (sec)’ field: The delay in seconds before the solenoid will be turned on. If
zero, then there will be no delay.
Delay Between Trips Field: The delay in seconds before turning this solenoid off.
If zero, then an offset of 20 seconds will be used.
95 LLS#3 ON This setpoint is used to control a third liquid line solenoid. When the capacity
** not used wanted is greater than this value (can either be number of steps for Fixed Step
compressors, or percentage of full load amps for Infinite Step compressors) for
the number of seconds in the ‘Time (sec)’ field, the third liquid line solenoid will
open. When the compressor capacity below this value for the number of sec-
onds in Delay Between Trips Field the third liquid line will be turned off.
‘Time (sec)’ field: The delay in seconds before the solenoid will be turned on. If
zero, then there will be no delay.
Delay Between Trips Field: The delay in seconds before turning this solenoid off.
If zero, then an offset of 20 seconds will be used.
96 FREEZE If active, the system will compare the leaving temperature to this setpoint. If it is
less than this value for the specified period of time, a safety trip occurs.
97 NO STOP This setpoint is used to ensure that a compressor is actually off when the con-
troller calls for it to be off. This setpoint contains a percentage of the FLA for set-
points #171-#190. If the compressor amperage is greater than this percentage of
the FLA setpoint for the specified period of time, signaling that the compressor is
still running, then the entire system is locked out and a NO STOP alarm is gener-
ated. If a Control Power relay is specified, then it will be turned off when this
safety trips.
98 OIL INJ TEMP DIFF This is a temperature differential subtracted from setpoint #8 to control the oil
** not used injection relay. When discharge temperature is above this differential, then oil
injection is turned on. If inactive then value will be 5.6° F (2.8° C).
99 OIL TEMP DIFF This is a temperature differential used in controlling the oil heater and second
** not used liquid line solenoid. If inactive then value will be set to 5° F.
100 OIL FLOAT If active, the system checks for an oil float digital input. It must be ON for the
period of time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint will trip.
101 Lost Leg Alm If active, a check for a lost leg (lost current flow) on a part winding starter is
added. A current sensor will be placed on only one of the legs; it must be set up
to be multiplied by 2 in MCS-Config (select CT-### x2 as the sensor in the SI
screen). If current flow to the leg with the sensor is lost, a low amp alarm will be
generated. If the sensor is reading more than the wanted FLA times the value of
this setpoint for the specified period of time, then a high amp alarm is generated.
102 LOW AMBIENT Compressors with a low SI Off sensor will be disabled when the sensor is below
** OFF this setpoint.
not used
103 HI AMBIENT OFF Compressors with a high SI Off sensor will be disabled when the sensor is above
** not used this setpoint.
104 UNLOADED % Used if a slide open percentage sensor is present. When this sensor is reading
** not used less than the value of this setpoint, then the slide is considered closed.

155
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

105 OIL HEATER ON The oil heater will be turned on if the oil temperature is less than the value of this
** not used setpoint. It will be turned off if the oil temperature is greater than the value of this
setpoint plus 5.0° Fahrenheit.
‘Time (sec)’ field: If zero, then the calculated oil temp will be the saturated suc-
tion temperature plus the value of the setpoint. Else it will be the value of this
setpoint.
106 OIL COOLER ON The oil cooler will be turned on if the oil seal temperature is greater than the
** not used value of this setpoint. It will be turned off if the oil seal temperature is less than
the value of this setpoint minus 5.0° Fahrenheit.
107 UNLOADED OFF If active, the system is fully unloaded, and the control temperature is greater
** not used than this value, then the capacity state will be set to holding.
108 HP OVERHEAT This setpoint is only used when the heat pump option has been selected in the
‘Unit Type’ box in the ‘General Information’ section under the MAG V8 tab. It is
used to protect against a heat pump with unloaders (or variable speed) from
overheating. When this setpoint is active and the leaving temperature sensor is
greater than this setpoint minus 3.0° Fahrenheit, then the compressor will enter
HIGH TEMP UNLOAD state. The temperature must drop to less than this set-
point minus 4.5° Fahrenheit before the system will move to the holding state.
109 SftyUnld Del The time delay in seconds between compressor capacity adjustments when
safety unloading.
110 VFD Sfty Adj The VFD percentage adjustment to be made after every amount of time in set-
point #153 “SftyUnld Del” when safety unloading.
111 LO REF TMP If active, the system checks for low refrigerant temperature. If the refrigerant
temperature is less than the value of this setpoint for the specified period of time,
a safety trip occurs.
112 LO REF UNLD The purpose of this setpoint is to take preventative action before a low refriger-
ant temperature safety trip. The compressor will unload when the refrigerant
temperature is less than the value of the setpoint #111 “LO REF TMP” plus
this setpoint. The compressor state will be changed to LO TMP UNLOAD. The
compressor will remain in this state until the refrigerant temperature is above the
value of setpoint #111 “LO REF TMP” plus twice the value of this setpoint. The
compressor state change to LO TMP HOLD.
113 CRANK CASE If active and a crank case heater proof has been specified for a circuit, if the
HEAT digital input, crank case heater proof , is on for the time specified a compressor
safety will be generated.
114 DHH WAIT The system will wait the number of seconds contained in this set point if the
compressor is in dehumidification heat mode and the compressor is ready to be
defrosted before the defrost cycle begins.
115 ROTATE EVAP If active, then the Relay Outputs must have a second liquid line solenoid and 2
** hot gas solenoids. Not used with Reverse Cycle type of defrost. Must be active
and a value = 1
If active and the value is 0 then when the system is in the dehumidification mode
the evaporators will be rotated during the defrost cycle. Refer to dehumidification
defrost with rotation.
116 MAX IN DEHUM This is the maximum number of evaporator solenoids that can be on when the
** not used system is in the dehumidify mode.
117 DefConvType Indicates the types of defrost. If active and value is a 1 then conventional defrost
will be used . Else Defrost on the Fly type of defrost will be used.
118 DEF HI TEMP Set points #118, #119 & #120 work as a group. If the entering temperature is
less than set point #118 but greater than set point #121, the values in #118, #119
& #120 will be used to determine if a defrost cycle is required.
‘Target’ - then setpoint high zone column is used as the ambient disable temper-
ature for rotating coil defrost. Otherwise if is not configured as “Target” type the
old logic value as the ambient disable point for rotating coil defrost is used.

156
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

119 DEF HI APPR The calculated defrost approach temperature must be greater than the value of
this set point for the system to enter a high defrost cycle.
120 DEF HI TIME This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a high defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
‘Target’ - then manual defrost time delay is based on the enter temp compared to
setpoint #118, 121, and 124 and uses the values in the high zone column from
setpoint #120, 123, or 126 as the defrost time delay.
121 DEF MED TEMP Set points #121, #122 & #123 work as a group. If the entering temperature is
less than set point #121 but greater than set point #123, the values in #121,
#122 & #123 will be used to determine if a defrost cycle is required.
122 DEF MED APPR The calculated defrost approach temperature must be greater than the value of
this set point for the system to enter a medium defrost cycle.
123 DEF MED TIME This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a medium defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
124 DEF LO TEMP Set points #124, #125 & #126 work as a group. If the entering temperature is
less than set point #121, the values in #124, #125 & #126 will be used to deter-
mine if a defrost cycle is required..
125 DEF LO APPR The calculated defrost approach temperature must be greater than the value of
this set point for the system to enter a low defrost cycle.
126 DEF LO TIME This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a low defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
127 DEF DEH APPR If the dehumidification enable indicator is on, the calculated defrost approach
temperature must greater than the value of this set point for the system to enter
a defrost cycle.
128 DEF DEH TIME This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a dehumidification enable defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
129 DEF DEH 2ND This set point contains the percent of the time that a compressor will remain in a
dehumidification enable defrost cycle for the second evaporator if set point 115,
ROTATE EVAP, is active and equal to 0.
130 DefMinAccTime This is the minimum accumulated run that a compressor must be on before a
defrost cycle can be initiated. Expressed as minutes.
131 AprTypAdjDly Time in minutes that the system waits, after a defrost, before determining what
defrost valves to use.
132 DEFDRIP DWN This setpoint contains the time expressed in minutes, that the system will remain
in a drip down state for each evaporator defrost. For reverse cycle defrost types,
this setpoint must be active and a value of zero.
133 DEF MAX EVAP This set point contains the maximum number of circuits that can be in defrost at
any one time.
134 EVAP Rotation If this set point is active and its value is greater than zero then the evaporators
will be rotated when the number of evaporator relays that are ON is less than the
number available. The value which is expressed in minutes is the time between
rotations
135 HTGDTD MAIN When the circuit is in a defrost cycle and the time has not exceeded the value
of this set point, the hot gas main is turned off and the hot gas bypass is turned
on. When the time exceeds this value, the hot gas main is turned on; refer to set
point #136 to determine the status of the hot gas bypass.
136 HGDBP&BLEED When the circuit is in a defrost cycle and the time has exceeded the value in set
point #135, HTGDTD MAIN; if this set point contains a zero the hot gas bypass
will be turned off, else it will be turned on.
137 ApprONdly This is the time expressed in seconds that the evaporator temperature must
be greater than the defrost trigger temperature before a defrost cycle will be
checked to determine if a defrost cycle is required.

157
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

138 DEF CMP RTIM This is the minimum time that a compressor must be on before a defrost cycle
can be initiated. Expressed as minutes. Note, time in set point #130, accumu-
lated run must be meet and the compressor must be on for the time specified in
this set point before a defrost cycle is initiated.
139 DEF Min PSI When a compressor is in a defrost start state the defrost cycle will not begin until
the discharge pressure is less or equal to the value in this set point.
140 DEF COND ADJ When a compress is in defrost, the value of this set point is added to the con-
denser set points.
141 DEF PDWN TIM This is the maximum time that a compressor will remain in the defrost pump
down state. Expressed in seconds.
142 DEF PDWN PSI A compressor will remain in the defrost pump down state until the suction pres-
sure decreases by the value of this set point. Also refer to set point #143
143 DEF TERMIN T When a compressor is in a defrost mode and the evaporator suction temperature
rises above the value in this set point, the defrost cycle will be terminated.
144 DEF TERMIN P When a compressor is in a defrost mode and the discharge pressure drops be-
low the value in this set point, the defrost cycle will be terminated.
145 DEF TIME DLY This is the time delay between defrost cycles expressed as minutes. Note this
was a fixed time. Not used if set point #120, #123, #126 high zone has values.
146 DEF AIR HGAS Set point is used to indicate when the defrost air option is used and a hot gas
** not used defrost as backup is required. If this set point is active a message will be gener-
ated indicating which circuit required the hot gas defrost.
147 DEF AIR TIME Value expressed in minutes is the maximum time that a circuit will be in air de-
** not used frosts cycle.
148 DEF AIR BLEED Time expressed in minutes that the bleed solenoid will be on when a normal air
** not used defrost cycle begins. During this time the hot gas main solenoid will be off. Once
this time as pasted the bleed solenoid will be turned off and hot gas main sole-
noid will be turned on.
149 DEF AIR ALARM If this set point is active, a defrost alarm messages will be generated.
** not used
150 EVAP FAN WAIT After defrost time to keep the system off.
** not used
151 LIQUID LINE CTL Only used with a variable type of compressor to control the liquid injection sole-
noid.
152 ADJUST AP- If this set point is active and the number of steps on is greater than the minimum,
PROACH then all approach defrost set points will be adjusted by this set point. This set
point is expressed as a percentage The amount of adjustment is calculated by
taking the number of steps that are on greater than the minimum number and
dividing this by the number of available steps. This is then multiplied by the value
of this set point and it is subtracted from the approach set points. The actual
value of the set point will be changed.
153 HOT GAS ON If there is a modulating hot gas valve, this valve will be modulated when the
control voltage or temperature is below this value.
154 PUMP DELAY Time in seconds to keep the chilled water pump running after the last compres-
** not used sor has been turned off to ensure the chiller barrel does not freeze.
155 HI SI OFF If active, and a High SI OFF sensor is specified (sensor can be an analog or
digital input, and is specified in the Circuit SI screen for each compressor). If
the High SI Off sensor reading ON (Digital) or the temperature rises above the
value of this setpoint (Analog) for the specified period of time, the circuit will be
disabled. If a digital input, the circuit will be enabled once the sensor is off. If an
analog input, the circuit will be enabled once the sensor is less than the value of
this setpoint minus the value in the ‘Time (sec)’ field.

158
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

156 LOW SI OFF If active, and a LOW SI OFF sensor is specified (sensor can be an analog or
digital input, and is specified in the Circuit SI screen for each compressor). If the
LOW SI Off sensor reading ON (Digital) or temperature drops below the value of
this setpoint (Analog) for the specified period of time, the circuit will be disabled.
If a digital input, the circuit will be enabled once the sensor is off. If an analog
input, the circuit will be enabled once the sensor is rises above the value of this
setpoint plus the value in the ‘Time (sec)’ field.

157 COND COMP HIGH If active, this set point contains the pressure difference that will be used to deter-
** not used mine if a compressor has reached a critical condition when another compressor
is in a start up. If inactive, a value of 50.0 PSI will be used. A critical condition
is determined by subtracting this value from set point #70, HI DISCH PSI. If the
discharge pressure is greater then this pressure will be used to control the fans.
158 PHASE LOSS If active and the phase loss digital input is ON for the specified period of time, a
safety trip occurs. The system will attempt to restart after waiting the number of
minutes contained in the ‘Safety Down Time’ field of this setpoint.
159 PWR OFF TIME If the system is off for a time greater than 2 hours then the system state will
be ‘POWER LOSS DELAY’ for the time contained in this setpoint , the time is
expressed in hours.
160 LO SHT DXcoil If the calculated superheat remains below this value for the time specified, the
system will generate a LOW SHT DX alarm. This is the superheat calculated at
the dx coil.
161 HI SHT DXcoil If the calculated superheat remains above this value for the time specified, the
system will generate a HIGH SHT DX alarm. This is the superheat calculated at
the dx coil.
162 LHI SUPERHEAT If the calculated superheat remains above this value for the time specified, the
system will generate a HIGH SUPERHEAT alarm. This is the superheat calcu-
lated at the compressor.
163 HiRefLevel This setpoint has two functions.
If active, the system checks for high refrigeration level. If the refrigeration level
sensor is greater than this value for the specified period of time, a safety trip oc-
curs.
If active, system has EXV valve control based on refrigerant level, and the refrig-
erant level is greater than this value, then the EXV valve adjustment will be set
to the value in setpoint #13 “EXV COURSE” * ( –3).
Refers to ‘Refirg Level’ column in the Circuit SI screen
164 LoRefLvlTarg If setpoint #76 “LO DiscSPRHT” is active and it has reached one third of its safe-
ty time, then setpoint #9 “REF LVL TARG” will be set to the value of this setpoint,
165 PULSE DELAY Used with infinite capacity screws. The number of seconds between load or un-
load pulses (Usually between 3 and 5. Allows load change to be checked before
next pulse and eliminates oil foaming when unloading too fast).
‘Time (sec)’ field: If used, this is the fast unloading state time delay. This option is
selected in in the ‘Fast Unload Delay’ box in the ‘Compressor Information’ sec-
tion under the MAG V8 tab.If non-zero, and when the compressor’s amp draw is
more than twice the value of setpoint #192 “AMP DB LO” away from the wanted
FLA, then set the delay between pulses to zero.
166 REVERSE CYCLE Add logic for Reverse Cycle defrost to have adjustable time delay for turning off
COMP OFF TIME the compressors when first entering into, and coming out of, the defrosting coil
WHEN DEFROST state. If this setpoint is active its value is used as the delay, otherwise 5 seconds
START is still used. This change was made to help the reversing valve to switch posi-
tions before and after defrost was completed. The scroll compressors do not
need this extra time but reciprocating compressors do need it.

159
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

167 PUMP FAILURE If active, flow is lost, and only one pump is present, then the system will be
(NO FLOW) locked out. If the system has two pumps and flow is lost, then the backup pump
will start and the lead pump will be locked out. If the second pump is running and
flow is lost again then the entire system will be locked out. A lock out reset will be
required to restart the system or to reactivate a locked out pump.
If inactive, and the flow is lost, the system will move to the OFF- NO EVAP
FLOW state. When flow is returned the system will automatically restart.
168 UNLOAD DELAY This is the time delay before the system will begin to unload a circuit due to a
pending safety condition. This includes: high discharge PSI, high discharge tem-
perature, low or high amps, or low suction PSI.
169 LO SUCT SHEAT This set point contains the value that indicates a low suction SUPERHEAT con-
dition. If the calculated suction SUPERHEAT is less than this value, the low suc-
tion SUPERHEAT timer will be set to 120 seconds. This will keep the low suction
SUPERHEAT RO on for that period of time. (This can be used as a warning only
or the user may wire through the low suction superheat relay to solve the prob-
lem.) . Note, during the first 5 minutes that compressor has been running, the
safety time is increased to 3 times the safety time of this set point.
170 SERVICE MODE If non-zero, then a compressor being disabled by the pump down switch will be
continue to run until its suction pressure is zero. The compressor will be turned
on to perform the pump down the number of times indicated in this setpoint. This
is in preparation for service to be performed on the compressor.
171 FLA COMP#1 Full Load Amps for compressor #1. This is the amps at design suction and dis-
charge pressures referenced in the MCS-Config RO screen. This value is used
to calculate the high and the low amperage safety limits. Refer to setpoints #75
and #76.
For screw compressors: The amp draw when the compressor is fully loaded.
This value is used to calculate the Full Load Amps Percentage (FLA %), which is
used to control loading and unloading the slide valve.
172 FLA COMP#2 Full Load Amps for compressor #2. Refer to setpoint #171.
173 FLA COMP#3 Full Load Amps for compressor #3. Refer to setpoint #171.
174 FLA COMP#4 Full Load Amps for compressor #4. Refer to setpoint #171.
175 FLA COMP#5 Full Load Amps for compressor #5. Refer to setpoint #171.
176 FLA COMP#6 Full Load Amps for compressor #6. Refer to setpoint #171.
177 FLA COMP#7 Full Load Amps for compressor #7. Refer to setpoint #171.
178 FLA COMP#8 Full Load Amps for compressor #8. Refer to setpoint #171.
179 FLA COMP#9 Full Load Amps for compressor #9. Refer to setpoint #171.
180 FLA COMP#10 Full Load Amps for compressor #10. Refer to setpoint #171.
181 FLA COMP#11 Full Load Amps for compressor #11. Refer to setpoint #171.
182 FLA COMP#12 Full Load Amps for compressor #12. Refer to setpoint #171.
183 FLA COMP#13 Full Load Amps for compressor #13. Refer to setpoint #171.
184 FLA COMP#14 Full Load Amps for compressor #14. Refer to setpoint #171.
185 FLA COMP#15 Full Load Amps for compressor #15. Refer to setpoint #171.
186 FLA COMP#16 Full Load Amps for compressor #16. Refer to setpoint #171.
187 FLA COMP#17 Full Load Amps for compressor #17. Refer to setpoint #171.
188 FLA COMP#18 Full Load Amps for compressor #18. Refer to setpoint #171.
189 FLA COMP#19 Full Load Amps for compressor #19. Refer to setpoint #171.
190 FLA COMP#20 Full Load Amps for compressor #20. Refer to setpoint #171.

160
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

191 AMP DB HI Used only with screw and centrifugal compressors. If the set point type is “hu-
midity”
then the upper dead band is value times the FLA for that circuit else the value is
the upper dead band limit of the FLA. If the amps are within the dead band, the
slide valve will not be moved.
If controlled by Slide Position, instead of FLA, this Setpoint will not be used.
192 AMP DB LO Used only with screw and centrifugal compressors. . If the set point type is “hu-
midity”
then the lower dead band is value times the FLA for that circuit else the value is
the lower dead band limit of the FLA. If the amps are within the dead band, the
slide valve will not be moved.
If controlled by Slide Position, instead of FLA, this Setpoint will not be used.
193 MOP TARG PSI If active, maximum operating pressure (MOP) control will be added to the EXV
control logic. This value will be the MOP suction pressure target.
194 MOP PSI ZONE Added to and subtracted from setpoint #199 to develop the upper and lower
limits of the MOP control zone.
193 MOP TARG PSI If active, maximum operating pressure (MOP) control will be added to the EXV
control logic. This value will be the MOP suction pressure target.
194 MOP PSI ZONE Added to and subtracted from setpoint #199 to develop the upper and lower
limits of the MOP control zone.
195 MOP ADJ % TME The adjustment value by which the EXV valve will close each time the MOP logic
calls for it to maintain the suction pressure target. This adjustment will be made
each time after the delay in the ‘Time (sec)’ field has expired.
196 MDP MIN OIL DIFF If active, MDP logic will be added to EXV control. If the oil differential pressure is
less than the value of this setpoint following compressor start up during the time
specified in the Sec to Ignore Safety field, then the MDP function is active and
will close the EXV valve to restore the oil differential pressure. However, the EXV
will not be allowed to go into the MDP logic unless the suction pressure is less
than setpoint #69 “LOW SUCTION” plus twice the value of setpoint #71 “LOW
SUCT RELD”. The MDP logic will be exited and go to EXV HOLDING when the
suction pressure is less than the setpoint #69 “LOW SUCTION” plus the value of
setpoint #71 “LOW SUCT RELD”.
The ‘Sec to Ignore Safety’ cell contains the time that the MDP will be active after
a compressor is started. The ‘‘Time (sec)’ field’ cell contains the offset to exit the
MDP control. The ‘Safety Down Time’ contains the percentage to close the EXV
valve.
197 DELTA TEMP EVP If active, the system will check the temperature differential before additional
** not used capacity is enabled. If the difference between entering and leaving temperature
is greater than the value of this setpoint for the amount of time in the ‘Time (sec)’
field, then no additional capacity will be allowed.
198 HiSuctSheat If active, the system will check for high suction superheat. If the suction super-
heat is greater than the value of this setpoint for the specified period of time, an
alarm will be generated and a safety trip occurs.
199- not used
201
202 NO OIL FLOW If active and there is an Oil Flow sensor specified in the ‘Oil Flow Switch’ cell of
the Circuit SI screen, then the system will test for oil flow. If the No Oil Flow sen-
sor reading is OFF (Digital) or falls below the value of this setpoint (Analog) for
the specified period of time, then a safety trip occurs.
203 SAT EVAP ADJ This set point contains the temperature adjustment that is made to suction tem-
perature (converted from suction PSI) when calculating the evaporator approach
value.
204 SPARE Not used.

161
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

205 STAGE CUT OUT Offset used in calculating the cut out value. Subtracted from the stage cut in set
points #206 through #229
206 STAGE 1 CUT IN STAGE 1 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
207 STAGE 2 CUT IN STAGE 2 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
208 STAGE 3 CUT IN STAGE 3 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
209 STAGE 4 CUT IN STAGE 4 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
210 STAGE 5 CUT IN STAGE 5 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
211 STAGE 6 CUT IN STAGE 6 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
212 STAGE 7 CUT IN STAGE 7 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
213 STAGE 8 CUT IN STAGE 8 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
214 STAGE 9 CUT IN STAGE 9 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
215 STAGE 10 CUT IN STAGE 10 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
216 STAGE 11 CUT IN STAGE 11 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
217 STAGE 12 CUT IN STAGE 12 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
218 STAGE 13 CUT IN STAGE 13 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
219 STAGE 14 CUT IN STAGE 14 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
220 STAGE 15 CUT IN STAGE 15 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
221 STAGE 16 CUT IN STAGE 16 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
222 STAGE 17 CUT IN STAGE 17 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
223 STAGE 18 CUT IN STAGE 18 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
224 STAGE 19 CUT IN STAGE 19 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
225 STAGE 20 CUT IN STAGE 20 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
226 STAGE 21 CUT IN STAGE 21 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
227 STAGE 22 CUT IN STAGE 22 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
228 STAGE 23 CUT IN STAGE 23 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
229 STAGE 24 CUT IN STAGE 24 cut in, set point value contains the value when this stage is turned on.
230 Not Available This set point cannot be used it MUST be INACIVE! This forces all EXV fine tune
type set points to be inactive; therefore, the default settings will be used.
231- not used
235
236 AirDefHiTemp Set points #236, #237 & #238 work as a group. If the entering temperature is
less than set point #236 but greater than set point #239, the values in #236,
#237 & #238 will be used to determine if a defrost cycle is required.
If the evaporator entering temp SI is greater than this value, air defrost will be
disabled.
237 AirDefHiAppr The calculated defrost approach temperature must be greater than the value of
this set point for the system to enter a high defrost cycle.
238 AirDefHiTime This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a high defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
239 AirDefMdTemp Set points #239, #240 & #241 work as a group. If the entering temperature is
less than set point #239 but greater than set point #242, the values in #239,
#240 & #241 will be used to determine if a defrost cycle is required.
240 AirDefMdAppr The calculated defrost approach temperature must be greater than the value of
this set point for the system to enter a high defrost cycle.
241 AirDefMdTime This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a high defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
162
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

242 AirDefLoTemp Set points #236, #237 & #238 work as a group. If the entering temperature is
less than set point #242 but greater than the value of set point #242 – the Low
Zone value, the values in #242, #243 & #244 will be used to determine if a de-
frost cycle is required.
Low Zone: Contains the value to be subtracted to the value of this setpoint, if
the evaporator entering temp SI is below this calculation, air defrost is disabled.
243 AirDefLoAppr The calculated defrost approach temperature must be greater than the value of
this set point for the system to enter a high defrost cycle.
244 AirDefLoTime This set point contains the time expressed in minutes that a compressor will
remain in a high defrost cycle. Expressed as minutes.
245 AirDefCmpDly Contains the amount of time, expressed as minutes, that a compressor calling
for defrost, will be delayed from shutting off so that the logic can bring another
compressor up to capacity to ensure refrigeration is maintained.
This still applies, even if all compressors are on and fully loaded.
246 AirDefTrgrDly This is the time expressed in seconds that the evaporator temperature must
be greater than the defrost trigger temperature before a defrost cycle will be
checked to determine if a defrost cycle is required.
247 Reheat Offset Off Voltage must be greater than this value to allow reheat relays to be turned on.
248 Reheat Stage 1 Voltage above this value will allow 1 stage of reheat to be turned on.
249 Reheat Stage 2 Voltage above this value will allow 2 stage of reheat to be turned on.
250 Reheat Stage 3 Voltage above this value will allow 3 stage of reheat to be turned on.
251 Reheat Stage 4 Voltage above this value will allow 4 stage of reheat to be turned on.
252 Reheat Stage 5 Voltage above this value will allow 5 stage of reheat to be turned on.
253 Reheat Stage 6 Voltage above this value will allow 6 stage of reheat to be turned on.
254 Low Suction Un- If active the number of low suction unloads will be tracked. If the number of
loads unloads is greater than the value with in the time specified in the safety time cell
then the circuit will be locked off.
255 Split Scroll Staging If active and compressor type is a scroll with split staging, PETRA special stag-
ing:
Value contains the number of compressor steps available for staging.
Safety Time is the delay between step adjustments.

163
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

Chapter - 33. Magnum Alarms and Safeties

33.1. Introduction
There are three types of alarms that are generated by the Magnum control logic:
„„ Information only alarms,
„„ Magnum system alarms and
„„ Chiller set point safety alarms.
All of the alarms have the same format. The alarm is identified and it is date time stamped. Alarms can be viewed from
the Magnum by pressing the ALARM STATUS (4) key or from the MCS-Connect program.

33.2. Information only Alarms

33.2.1 System Generated Alarms
The following alarms are generated to provide information; they will not cause a change in the control algorithm such as
a lock out condition or a relay output being forced off.

„„ POWER FAILED
„„ POWER RETURNED
„„ COMPUTER RESET
„„ LCD FAILURE
„„ HW DATE INVALID
„„ HW TIME INVALID
„„ SW DATE INVALID
„„ SW TIME INVALID
„„ RAM INTEGRITY
„„ WATCHDOG RESET

33.2.2 Alarms As A Result Of Individual Action

The following alarms indicate that an individual took action:

„„ ALARMS CLEARED
„„ STPT CHANGED
„„ RO MANUAL
„„ AO MANUAL
„„ SI MANUAL
„„ POINT INFO CLEAR
„„ CLOCK SET
„„ CFG DOWNLOADED

33.2.3 Alarms Generated By The Control Algorithm

The following alarms indicate that the control algorithm took action:

„„ ROTATED LEAD
„„ DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

164
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

33.3. Magnum System Alarms

33.3.1 Alarms Are Generated By The Magnum Control Algorithm:
33.3.1.1. Configuration Problem Alarms
These alarms indicate a problem with the configuration file that has been loaded into the system. The system is not
operational, a configuration must be transmitted to the unit form MCS-Connect or the config chip must be replaced with
a valid one.
■■ INVALID CONFIG. (Check if sums are incorrect)
■■ INVALID CFG VER (version number of the configurator is invalid)
■■ INVALID CFG TYPE (the type does not agree with software, chiller software with a home unit configuration)

33.3.1.2. Mcs Local Network Problem Alarms

These alarms indicate problems with the MCS local network, the system can be accessed but the system is in a lock
out state, LOST I/O.
■■ MCS-I/O 1 LOST
■■ MCS-I/O 2 LOST
■■ MCS-I/O 3 LOST
■■ LOST IO SHUTDOWN

33.3.1.3. Key Sensors Problem Alarms

This alarm indicate a problem with a key sensor, it is either shorted or open. The alarm will contain ALARM followed by
the 8-character name of the sensor.
The following sensors related to the entire system are tested:
■■ Leaving liquid, if failed: lock out the chiller system
■■ Returning liquid, if failed: alarm only no lock out
■■ Ambient temperature, if failed: alarm only no lock out

The following circuit sensors are tested. If they fail that circuit only is locked out.
■■ Suction pressure and temperature
■■ Discharge pressure and temperature
■■ Oil pressure and temperature
■■ Motor temperature (if it is an analog input device)

33.3.1.4. EMERGENCY STOP Alarm

This alarm indicates that the emergency stop switch has been turned on. The system can be accessed but the entire
system is in a lock out state.
■■ EMERGENCY STOP

33.4. Set Point Safety Alarms

33.4.1 Introduction
The Magnum chiller algorithm incorporates a number of safety checks to ensure that the various components that make
up the chiller package are not damaged. These types of safeties are based upon set points. When a safety trips for the
first time, the compressor will be set to “SAFETY TRIPPED” state. The compressor will remain in “SAFETY TRIPPED”
state for ten minutes and then move to the “CMP IS OFF” state where the compressor will be allowed to run if required. If
the same safety occurs again within two hours of the first trip, the compressor will be set to “CMP LOCKED OUT” state,
which requires a manual reset to restart the compressor. In this matter the Magnum attempts to take corrective action
to protect the compressors but avoid nuisance trips.

The time in the safety state and the time between safeties are specified in the individual set points. This enables the
times to be unique for each lock out set point.

165
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

33.4.2 Sensor Inputs used In Conjunction with Magnum Set Point Safeties:
Suction Pressure
Read the suction pressure. (Optional digital input)
Discharge Pressure
Read the discharge pressure. (Optional digital input)
Oil Pressure
Read the oil pressure (optional digital input)
Oil Differential Pressure
Calculated valve of the oil pressure as follows:
Fixed step compressors, oil psi minus suction psi
Screws with oil pump, Oil psi minus discharge psi
Screws without oil pump, discharge psi minus suction psi
Oil Temperature
Indicates that a high oil temperature condition. This can be either a temperature sensor or a digital input.
Discharge Temperature
Indicates that a high discharge temperature condition. This can be either a temperature sensor or a digital
input.
Motor Temperature
Indicates that a high motor temperature condition. This can be either a temperature sensor or a digital input.
Motor Amps
Sensor input that measures AMP draw of the compressor. (Optional digital input)
Motor Fault
If the high motor temperature input rises above the value of the setpoint or the digital input turns ON for the time
specified in the ‘Time (sec)’ field, the circuit will be Locked Out and a HIGH MOTOR TEMPERATURE or MOTOR
FAULT alarm generated. Refer to setpoint #86.
Liquid Temperature
Temperature sensor that can be used to detect a freeze condition
Compress Proof
A digital input that when on indicates that a compressor is running.
Flow Switch
A digital input that indicates that flow through the chiller barrel exists. There can be one switch per chiller or
one for each circuit.
33.4.3 Set Point Safeties
For a safety to be interrogated, both the associated sensor input and the lockout set point must be active. If a safety
trips, the alarm name will consist of the set point name plus additional identification such as point number or circuit
number if applicable.
The system exercises “smart” safety testing in the following manner:
If a safety applies to a circuit and it is an active lockout type of a set point, the first time this safety trips an alarm will
be generated and the circuit will be shut down and placed in a safety state. The system will attempt to reactivate this
circuit after waiting the length of time specified in this set point, safety down time. If successful the system will continue
to run. If the same safety trips the time specified in the lockout delay time, the circuit will be locked off and a manual
intervention is required. If the lockout delay time is set to zero, the system will generate a lockout condition the first time
that the safety occurs.
The time in the safety state and the time between safeties are specified in the individual set points. This enables the
times to be unique for each lock out set point.
166
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

MOST SAFETIES ARE CHECKED ONLY IF THE COMPRESSOR IS RUNNING, IF THE SAFETY IS ALWAYS
CHECKED IT WILL BE SO NOTED.
The following are a list of safeties that are incorporated in the standard chiller algorithm control. These safeties are
checked every second. Note, for a multiple circuit system, each circuit is tested individually. If a safety condition exists,
action will be taken with that circuit only, other circuits will continue to function.

Freeze Protection (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED)

If the leaving liquid temperature drops below the set point value the system, and all circuits, will enter a lockout state and a
freeze notification alarm will be generated. You have the option of one freeze protect for the package or individual freeze pro-
tections by circuit. This is selected in the MCS-Config program.
No Flow Protection
If the flow switch is for the chiller system, then the entire system will be shut down with the LOCK OUT state if set point
167, PUMP FAILURE, is an active lockout type of set point. If the set point is inactive, the system will determine if there
is a second pump, if so it will be started. Else, the system will be shut down and automatically restarted when the flow
switch is on, indicating that there is flow. If the flow switch is for the individual circuit, then that circuit will be locked out.

Phase Loss Protection

Phase loss, as indicated by the phase loss monitor, will result in the system and all circuits being locked off and a phase
loss notification alarm will be generated. Refer to set point is #158.

Emergency Stop
Emergency stop, as indicated by the emergency stop switch, will result in the system and all circuits being locked off
and an emergency stop notification alarm will be generated. No set point is required.

Low Differential Oil Pressure

This safety is designed to meet the compressor manufacturer requirements on oil pressure. For the first 5 (60 seconds
if setup as Hitachi screw compressors) seconds following a compressor start this safety is NOT checked. For the next
30 seconds, if the oil differential pressure drops below ½ of the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and
it remains there for the time specified in the safety time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a low
oil alarm generated. After this time period, if the oil differential pressure drops below the value of the set point and it
remains there for the time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out (as described in section ‘Chiller
set point safety alarms.’) and a low oil alarm generated. This enables the set point value and the safety time to be much
tighter. This safety is interrogated when the compressor is on and not in a pump down state.

Low Suction Pressure

If the suction pressure drops below the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the
time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out and a low suction alarm generated. For the first 5
minutes after the compressor has started the safety time is extend by 2 minutes, this enables the set point safety time to
be set much tighter for normal operation. This safety is bypassed when the compressor is in the “CMP PUMP DOWN”
state. This safety can also be used as a freeze protection based upon the suction PSI.
Unsafe Suction Pressure
This safety is similar to the low suction pressure safety except this set point can be set up with a lower value and a
very short safety time. If the suction pressure drops below the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and
it remains there for the time specified in the safety time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a low
suction alarm generated. This safety will always cause a lock out on the first trip requiring a manual reset to restart the
compressor. For the first 5 minutes after the compressor has started the safety time is extend by twice the normal time
delay, this enables the set point safety time to be set much tighter for normal operation. . This safety is bypassed when the
compressor is in the “CMP PUMP DOWN” state.

Low Discharge Pressure

If the discharge pressure drops below the value of the set point and it remains there for the time specified in the safety
time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a low discharge alarm generated.
High Discharge Pressure (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED)
If the discharge pressure raised above the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the
time specified in the safety time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a high discharge alarm generated.
167
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

High Discharge Temperature (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED)

If the discharge temperature analog input rises above the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and it re-
mains there for the time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out and a high temperature alarm
generated.

HI Motor Temp or Motor Fault (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED)

If the high motor temperature input rises above the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and it remains
there for the time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out and a high motor temperature or motor
fault alarm generated.

Hi Oil Temp
If the oil temperature rises above the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the time
specified in the safety time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a high oil temperature alarm gener-
ated.

Hi Motor Amp
If the ampere analog input rises above the value of the set point or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the
time specified in the safety time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a high motor amp alarm gener-
ated. This safety is bypassed for the first 3 seconds after a compressor has started.

Low Motor Amp

If the ampere analog input drops below the value of the set point and it remains there for the time specified in the safety
time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a low motor amp alarm generated. This alarm can be used
to indicate low refrigerant. This safety is bypassed for the first 3 seconds after a compressor has started.

No Compress Proof
If a compressor is called to be on and the compressor proof input is off (this is a digital input), a NO COMP PROOF
alarm will be generated.

High Oil Seal Temperature (Screw Compressors only)

If the oil seal temperature analog input rises above the value of the set point and it remains there for the time specified
in the safety time of that set point, the compressor will be locked out and a high oil seal alarm generated. This safety is
bypassed for the first 4 minutes after a compressor has started and when the compressor is in the “CMP PUMP DOWN”
state.

Dirty Oil Filter (Fixed Step Compressors only)

If the difference between the discharge pressure minus the oil pressure is above the value of the set point and it re-
mains there for the time specified in the safety time of that set point a dirty oil filter alarm will generate. If the difference
raises 20.0 above the set point then the compressor is locked out on the first trip requiring a manual reset to restart the
compressor.

168
MCS-REFRIG MANUALVERSION 17

Revision/Disclaimer Page

Date Author Description of Changes

2015-11-15 BT Contert to Version 17
2015-12/15-15 DEW Covert Manual to Indesign
2015-12-21-15 DEW Corrections from Bob
2016-07-06 DEW Add Refr Multiple Evaporator/Reheat Solenolds Section
2016-11-21 DEW Edits from Bob T
2016-11-29 DEW Edits from Bob T on setpoints
2017-02-03 DEW Edits from Jeff
2017-05-15 DEW Edits for BMS-STATES
2017-10-17 DEW Edits for rotating coil defrost setpoint 118, Refr Defrost Section
2017-23-24-17 DEW Add to Standard Control Options - sec Force Digital Compressor Speed -
setpoint #31
2019-10-22 DEW Make changes as per Jeff
2019-12-9 DEW Change Authorization for RS485 Service
Add PID to Manual, remove reference to subcooler
2020-6-17 DEW Modify EXV SECTION UP SCREEN SHOTS Ver 2.6
2020-8-07 DEW Change made to Compressor Rotation section Chapter 9-13
2020-8-07 DEW Changes made to Chapter 20-25 EXV chapter
2020-8-07 DEW Changes made to Chapter 29 BMS Unit and Compressor States
2020-8-07 DEW Changes made to setpoints 40, 41, 43 add PIP

169
Providing HVAC/R Control Solutions Worldwide

5580 Enterprise Pkwy. Fort Myers, FL 33905

Office: (239) 694-0089
Fax: (239) 694-0031
www.mcscontrols.com